JP2019107542A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve the problem that a conventional game machine may cause a decrease in interest in a game when a game performance results in a jackpot relatively disadvantageous to a player while enhancing interest in a game in execution of a game performance having high jackpot reliability although the conventional game machine has a plurality of jackpots, namely a relatively advantageous jackpot and a relatively disadvantageous jackpot, to a player as jackpots, has a plurality of game performances having different execution modes as game performances and shows different jackpot reliability depending on a game performance to be executed, and hence enhances player's interest in a game in execution of a game performance having high jackpot reliability, and further enhances interest in a game when an advantageous jackpot occurs.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided in consideration of the above mentioned problem, the game machine capable of enhancing the effect on the security of a game and executing a game performance for enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and in particular to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  In the conventional gaming machine, based on entering the ball to the starting opening, it performs the decision of success or failure with a predetermined big hit probability and displays the symbols variably, and when the result of the success or failure decision becomes a big hit, it stops and displays the symbols in big hit symbols, There was something to execute the big hit game which opens the winning a prize mouth. In addition, the game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the result of the success or failure judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol The possibility of doing this has been shown (for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, as a big hit, the player had a plurality of big hits of a relatively favorable big hit and a relatively disadvantageous big hit. In addition, when it becomes an advantageous big hit, there was a thing which sets the game state after the big hit game end to the game state (for example, high probability state, high base state etc.) relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, there are a plurality of effect modes which are executed in a predetermined effect mode, and a predetermined effect mode selected according to the game state is executed. In this effect mode, there are an effect mode that suggests that the player is in the advantageous gaming state, an effect mode that suggests that the player is in the adverse gaming state, and an effect mode that does not notify which gaming state it is. There was, by performing a variety of production mode, was enhancing the game interest.

JP 10-57583

  In the gaming machine as described above, although the amusement mode is enhanced when the effect mode indicating the gaming state advantageous to the player is executed, the effect mode indicating the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is executed. There was a possibility that the game interest might be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of diversifying the execution mode of the effect mode and enhancing the game interest.

A gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is:
Pass / fail judgment means capable of executing a hit / fail judgment based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination;
Game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode in a predetermined gaming state;
Providing a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the success or failure judgment is a specific result,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The first specified effect mode for executing the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode are executed as the effect mode, and a second game state is suggested to indicate that the game state is advantageous to the player. And a specific effect mode,
In any of the case where the special game is executed as the specific result in the first gaming state, and the special game is executed as the specific result in the second game state, In the game state after the end of the special game, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, transition to another effect mode is enabled based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times,
There is a possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
When the special game is executed in the second gaming state and the special game is executed, and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the specific result is in the first gaming state It is characterized in that the special game is executed and higher than the case where the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the predetermined gaming state, the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the predetermined effect mode is provided. In addition, the game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and at least a first effect mode is executed as an effect mode. There is a first specific effect mode, and a second specific effect mode which indicates that the second effect mode is executed and a game state (for example, a second game state) advantageous to the player is presented.

  And, in the first gaming state, when the result of the success or failure judgment becomes the specific result and the special game is executed, and, in the second gaming state, the result of the success or failure judgment becomes the specific result, the special game is executed, In either case, in the gaming state after the end of the special game, the first specific effect mode can be set. Further, in the first specific effect mode, when the variable display of identification information is performed a specific number of times, transition to another effect mode is enabled.

  Then, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game performed as the specific result in the second gaming state can be shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times In the first game mode, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game executed as the specific result in the first gaming state is shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times Higher than possibility.

  Thereby, even in the same first specific effect mode, the effect mode to be transferred after that differs depending on the transition process, and it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the effect mode and to enhance the game interest. In addition, since the first specific effect mode shifted from the second gaming state can be expected more than the first specific effect mode shifted from the first gaming state, even in the same first specific effect mode, a different sense of expectation It is possible to play a game with

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein
The third effect mode having a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode is provided as the effect mode.
The third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the gaming state is the first gaming state,
The second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that a game state is the second game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, by executing the third specific effect mode of the third effect mode, it is suggested that the gaming state is the first gaming state, and the second specific effect mode of the second effect mode is Execution indicates that the gaming state is a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. As a result, when the second specific effect mode is executed as the effect mode, the player can increase the sense of expectation and the game interest.

In the gaming machine of the third invention, in the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention,
As the gaming state, there is a third gaming state and a fourth gaming state,
The third gaming state is transitioned to the first gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. When the variable display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the state, it is assumed that the game state is shifted to the second game state.
The first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode in any of the third game state and the fourth game state.
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth gaming state, transition to the second specific effect mode is performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and the above in the third gaming state When the first specific effect mode is being executed, transition to the second specific effect mode is not performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state includes the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state. In the third gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the third gaming state to the first gaming state based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state In the fourth gaming state, the gaming state is shifted from the fourth gaming state to the second gaming state based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times in the fourth gaming state. Further, in the fourth gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is shifted from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times. Further, in the third gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is not shifted from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode on the basis of performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times .

  That is, in the case of the fourth gaming state and the first specific effect mode, the second specific effect indicating that the effect mode is the second gaming state advantageous to the player based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times Although transition to mode is possible, in the case of the third gaming state and the first specific effect mode, the effect mode can not be transitioned to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times. Thereby, even when the same first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode that can be shifted to later depending on whether the gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is being executed is the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state It is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effect mode and to enhance the game interest.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein
A variable entrance capable of changing into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the game ball has a higher possibility of entering the ball than the first aspect, and
Pitching frequency setting means that can be set to a predetermined frequency state and a high frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state;
A probability setting unit configured to set the probability that the success / failure determination unit determines that the identification result is the specific result, to a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
The first gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. It is said that.

  According to such a game machine, a variable ball entry port, a ball entry frequency setting means capable of changing the ball entry frequency of the game ball to the variable ball entrance, and a probability setting means capable of changing the probability of success or failure judgment And. Then, the first gaming state is a gaming state set to a predetermined frequency state and a predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to a predetermined frequency state and a high probability. As a result, the second gaming state is determined to be a specific result with high probability when the success / failure determination is executed, so that the gaming state in which the special game is more likely to be executed becomes easier than the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the special game and to enhance the game interest.

The gaming machine of the fifth invention is the gaming machine of the fourth invention,
The third gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the high probability. It is said that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the third gaming state is set to a high frequency state and a predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is set to a high frequency state and a high probability. In other words, the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are both set to the high frequency state, and the probability of the determination of success or failure is different. Thereby, if the gaming state when the first specific effect mode is executed is the fourth gaming state, transition to the second gaming state in which the second specific effect mode is executed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times And the gaming state advantageous to the player. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the effect mode and to provide a gaming machine that enhances the fun of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a reverse view of a game machine concerning an example of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of the example of the present invention. It is an enlarged view of the main indicator shown in FIG. 3, and is a figure which shows indicatores with which the game machine is equipped. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of hit and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation It is a pattern selection table. It is a table showing a change pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of processing at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of common drawing operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol success or failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of normal symbol decision processing. It is a flow chart of processing of ordinary electric role. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 yes or no decision processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol 1 change. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 decision processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flow chart of special symbol 2 standby processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 success or failure determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol 2 variation. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 decision processing. It is a flowchart of special electric role processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of jackpot game start processing. It is a flow chart of game state setting processing. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a special drawing operation status setting process 1; FIG. It is a flowchart of special electric combination processing 2 (small hit game). FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a special drawing operation status setting process 2; FIG. It is a flowchart of holding ball number processing. It is a flowchart of a power failure monitoring process. It is a flowchart of secondary control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flow chart of change production start processing. It is a table showing the symbol type of the effect pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of effect design game effect of state A. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of effect design game effect of state B. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of production mode C, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of production mode D. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of effect design game effect of effect mode C. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of effect design game effect of effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in small hit fluctuation in the production mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the small hit game in the production mode D. It is a flowchart of small hit pre-reading effect processing. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of production when a specific period is started. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode selection screen in the ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen from before the start of the mode selection period in a big hit game to the start. (A) is a table which shows the kind of 2nd production pattern (battle production pattern of production mode C), (b) is a table which shows the kind of 3rd production pattern (battle production pattern of production mode D). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the advance notice image in presentation mode D. FIG. It is a display pattern determination table of an advance notice image. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a production | presentation symbol game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 1st specific presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 1st specific presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 2nd specific presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 2nd specific presentation A. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 2nd specific presentation B. As shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 2nd specific performance C. FIG. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 1st prior notice production (production pending advance notice), and (b) is a presentation pending notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of 3rd prior notice production (firework advance notice). It is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display of the 4th notice effect (chance zone notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 5th prior notice production (all rotation advance notice) and a total rotation production. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of specific reach production. It is a table showing an example of advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of advance production. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the acquired profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of the acquired profit display presentation. It is a figure showing the game mode and the transition mode of a big hit game. 6 is a table showing game effects in each effect mode. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of each presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect of confrontation reach. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows the other execution aspect of the acquisition profit display presentation. It is a figure which shows a 1st discharge direction alerting | reporting production. It is a figure which shows a 1st discharge direction alerting | reporting production. It is a figure which shows a 2nd discharge direction alerting | rendering effect. It is a figure which shows a 2nd discharge direction alerting | rendering effect. It is a figure which shows a 3rd discharge direction alerting | rendering effect. It is a figure which shows a 3rd discharge direction alerting | rendering effect. It is a figure showing the 4th firing direction information production. It is a figure showing the 4th firing direction information production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the presentation performed at the time of a low probability low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution conditions of a pro-effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the specific example of a omen effect. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the specific example of a omen effect. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of RAM 913 for production control. It is a flowchart which illustrates a omen effect pattern setting process.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, when the symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a hit game capable of providing a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, winning balls) to the player. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the gaming board 2 removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main frame 52 for attaching the game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an island facility of a hall ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. The front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are axially supported at one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can be supplied with a launch handle 60 for launching game balls with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and game balls stored and stored to the launch device side. A striking ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the striking ball supply plate 61 are provided. In the front frame 51, the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are generically referred to are operable by the player during the execution of a game effect to be executed with the progress of the game). Therefore, it is simply referred to as "effect button 63". The plurality of effect buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means that can detect an input from the player or the player directly contacts the button portion to perform input (for example, , Or may be a touch sensor type), or may be a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type etc) that performs an input by detecting that a part of the player's body has approached. Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (a second image display device 71, a third image display device 72). In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily view the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed to be inclined toward the outside and to project toward the In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described later, according to the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game effects (characters, effect patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, game related information (acquired ball out information, number of rounds, number of consecutive stays, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game effects, etc.) , Information on setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, among the information of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, there are cases where different information is displayed and the case where the same information is displayed. Further, the same information is displayed as in the case where different pieces of information among the information are displayed by the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed in any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining information is different from one another. May be displayed. The image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may all be referred to simply as "image display device".

  Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner area of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display apparatus 72 are provided in the outer area of the game area 3. ing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open end) is attached to the front frame 51 via the hinge 75 (hinge part) for the second image display device. It is done. Therefore, the upper and lower second image display apparatus hinges 75 can be used as a pivot in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) rightward from the state (normal state) shown in FIG. This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to project forward of the front frame 51 is pachinko It is a structure for preventing collision with a hall facility (a ball rental machine, an inter-platform facility, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (the left side in FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1 for breakage. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is provided fixed to the front frame 51 and is not rotatable.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which game balls fired by the operation of the firing handle 60 flow down is formed by being surrounded by the rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a decorative board lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are provided in a protruding manner. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and it becomes possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launcher side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display 7 comprising a liquid crystal display is provided. The image display 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. In the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an effect symbol display portion) in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbol") are displayed side by side. ) Is provided, the rendering pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the game state The fluctuation display is performed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main game. The effect pattern 8L is also referred to as "left pattern", the effect pattern 8C is also referred to as "middle pattern", and the effect pattern 8R is also referred to as "right pattern".

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (a low probability low base state described later, the state A). Although this will be described in detail later, in this low probability and low base state, the ball entering frequency of the gaming ball to the starting opening (the second starting opening 21) is set low compared to the high base state and the special symbol Judgment probability (the first special symbol pass / fail judgment and the second special symbol pass / fail judgment) is low probability (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol It is set (more than 2 times) (all outliers are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the second game area) is displayed rather than the game ball shot in the right game area 3B (the second game area) and the second start hole 21 entering the ball to change and display the second special symbol. It is considered advantageous for the player to play a game in which the game ball is fired in 1 game area and entered into the first starting opening 20 and the first special symbol is variably displayed. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that this is a gaming state in which the first special symbol (rendering symbol) is the main variable display. For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Also, the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The first special symbol display 41a (see “First Display” described later (see FIG. 4) depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle and right effect symbols displayed in the stop display (derivative display) in the effect symbol display area 7b. The second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "the second special symbol display portion") as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display portion" and the second special symbol The result of the variable display of the symbol (the result of the special symbol acceptance / rejection determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize. The first special symbol, the second special symbol, and any (or all) of the effect symbols may be simply referred to as "symbol" or "identification information". In addition, the special symbol success or failure judgment is also simply referred to as "success or failure judgment" or "first success or failure judgment". In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol acceptance determination is also referred to as "approval determination execution means" or "first acceptance determination execution means".

  For example, when the result of the special symbol success or failure judgment is a big hit (the first specific), the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a 3-digit identical symbol (Zoro eyes) such as "777" ("big hit symbol") Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), it is rendered with a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a small hit dedicated symbol such as "3 * 3" (also referred to as "small hit symbol"). Stop displaying the symbol. In addition, when it becomes a small hit, it changes to the aspect which carries out stop display of a small hit exclusive symbol, and may carry out stop display of the pattern of the same aspect with a small hit symbol and a detached symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbols, second small hit symbols) so that they can be distinguished. ) May be stopped, or the same (common) small hit symbols may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  In addition, when the result of special design equality decision becomes off, stop the production design indication with the disappointing design where the design differs with at least 1 design among 3 designs such as “637” and “373” (“outside design It is also called "). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol determination result) by looking at the stop-displayed effect pattern. That is, the player does not generally grasp the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41a or the second special symbol indicator 41b, rather than directly grasping the result of the special symbol equality determination or not, The effect design displayed in the symbol display area 7b is seen and grasped. In addition, as the mode of the fluctuation display of the production design, for example, the mode in which the scroll display is performed in the vertical direction, the left and right, the diagonal direction, etc., the mode in which the production display is performed using only the first production symbol display section 7b In addition to the above, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used to perform effect display. Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which effects-displays using only the 2nd presentation symbol display part 71a or the 3rd presentation symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying game effects (rendering symbol game effects) using the effect symbols as described above, it is executed along with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) Game effects (big hit game effects, small hit game effects) and demonstration effects for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition to the effect symbols such as numerals, effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed in the effect symbols game effect, the hit game effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, although details will be described later, the game state (state A, state B or state C) or the state where the game ball is fired to the left gaming area 3A or the game ball is fired to the right gaming area 3B Depending on whether or not to play a game, the display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of fluctuating and displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of gaming machine The machine is also called "simultaneous change machine (parallel change machine)".

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect on-hold display area 9c (first effect on-hold display unit) for displaying the first effect on hold 9a according to the number of memories of the first special view to be described later. There is a second effect on-hold display area 9 d (second effect on-hold display unit) that displays the second effect on hold 9 b in accordance with the storage number of the second special view to be described later. By the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special view hold displayed on the first special view hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later It is possible to show the player the number of memories of the second special figure reserve and the number of memories of the second special figure reserve displayed on the second special figure reserve display 43b. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect or the like) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit may be displayed (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the special symbol as the subject).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage unit 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can be rolled is provided. A hollow warp 12 is provided on the left side of the center decoration 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides the game balls to the stage section 11. The gaming ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 is capable of entering the first starting opening 20 described later with high possibility compared to the gaming ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Furthermore, at the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is a decorative member 13 (panel lamp 5) such as an LED or the like, which can be lighted according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in which characters, figures, etc. There is.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable along with the game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward with the execution of the game effect with a relatively high probability of hitting (predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a so that most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player can increase the fun of the game and increase the expectation for winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided which has a non-variable first starting opening 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A random number etc. for special symbol pros and cons determination is acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 20, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) established in advance is established The first special symbol judgment is executed, and the first special symbol starts variable display, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment of acceptance after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Above the right side area (right play area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the play area 3, the game ball can pass (enter the ball) gate 28 (common figure starting port or passing port or entrance port or specific start) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and also the start gate 29. When the game ball enters the gate 28 (passes), the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for judging whether or not the normal pattern is determined, etc., and a predetermined condition (variation condition) defined in advance is established. While executing the symbol success / failure determination (also referred to as “the second success / failure determination”), the normal symbol starts fluctuating display, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol compliance determination. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes normal symbol acceptance determination whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (open operation) and the second starting port 21 is opened or not is a "permission determination execution means" or It is also referred to as a "second pass / fail judgment execution means". The gate sensor 28a doubles as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the gate is the gate sensor 28a and also the start gate sensor 29a.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when a condition that enables the big hit game is established (big hit execution It is only possible state and big hit waiting state). Therefore, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not established, control processing relating to the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start processing is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit standby state), the big hit game in standby starts and a predetermined big winning opening ( A round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is in the open state (the ball entry possible state) is started.

  The first right winning area (right gaming area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the gaming area 3 and the first large winning opening 30 is provided in the gaming area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29). A big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entry port") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening and closing member 32 and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening and closing member 32. The opening and closing member 32 is a game ball passage whose upper surface is a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape), and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (left to right in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening and closing member 32 is in the closed state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Flow downstream of the game area.

  In addition, the opening and closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening and closing member 32 retracts toward the back of the game board 3 to form the game ball passage. There is no As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 enters the first big winning opening 30. Thus, the opening and closing member 32 for opening and closing the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening and closing member, and the gaming ball which has flown down smoothly in the open state (at the time of opening) While entering the winning opening 30 and guiding the gaming ball which has flowed down in the closed state (at the closing time) to an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage It becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 only when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (the first variable entry port), the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32, the game ball can not enter the ball impossible entry state (closed state) and entering the game ball can enter It can be changed to the ball capable state (open state).

  In the right-hand area (right-hand game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, which is the lower (downstream) gaming area of the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the gaming ball does not change A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start opening 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting opening 26, a random number etc. for special symbol eligibility determination is obtained, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) established in advance is established, the eligibility determination pertaining to the second special symbol ( The second special symbol judgment is executed, and the second special symbol starts variable display, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment of acceptance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), the upper side game ball passage where the 3rd starting opening 26 is provided, 2nd starting opening 31 and the 2nd A lower stage side game ball passage in which the 2 large winning opening 35 is provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper stage side game ball passage contacts the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start opening 26 and enters the third start opening 26. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting opening 26 is a fixed type winning device that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in left-handed game (so-called, first hit), and the first big-hit game is executed in right-handed game The game ball is allowed to enter the third starting opening 26 (held) during the big hit game, and it becomes possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big hit game is over.

  It is a right area (right gaming area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the gaming area 3, and in the gaming area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, the variable entry probability of the gaming ball changes A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable start opening" or a "variable start opening") provided with a second start opening 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, random numbers etc. for special symbol pros and cons determination are acquired, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) established in advance is met, the pros and cons determination of the second special symbol (the second (2) Special symbol judgment is executed, and the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening and closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting opening 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening and closing operation, the second starting opening 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (opened state) in which the possibility of entering the gaming ball is higher than that of the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the game ball can enter the ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and the game ball can not enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. When the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the second starting port 21 is completely when the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It does not have to be impossible to enter the

  Further, the movable member 23 is, similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the gaming ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) at the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (right to left in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the inlet of the second start opening 21 passes the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second start opening 21. Flow downstream of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by the second start opening solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 forms a game ball passage by retracting in the back direction of the game board 3 (vertical direction to the game board surface). The movable member 23 disappears from the inlet of the second start port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the inlet of the second starting opening 21 enters the second starting opening 21. As described above, the movable member 23 for opening and closing the entrance of the second start opening 21 is a projecting / retracting opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and in the open state (at the time of opening) The ball is allowed to smoothly enter the second starting opening 21 and, in the closed state (at the closing time), the game ball which has flowed down is directed in any direction (the second large winning opening 35 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. Lead to

  In addition, a second large winning opening 35 is provided in the right-hand area (right gaming area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the gaming area 3 and in the gaming area below (downstream) the second starting opening 21. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entry port") is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening and closing member 37 and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening and closing member 37. Similar to the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) gaming ball passage, and in the closed state, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 is closed and the opening and closing is performed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening and closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (right to left in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the closed state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes the upper surface of the opening and closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Flow downstream of the game area.

  In addition, the opening and closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening and closing member 37 retracts in the back direction of the game board 3 (vertical direction to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening and closing member 37 which has been removed from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is removed. As a result, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. In this manner, the opening and closing member 37 for opening and closing the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is a projecting and retracting opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when open (when open) Smoothly enter the second large winning opening 35 and, in the closed state (at the time of closing), guide the game balls which have flowed down to an arbitrary direction (out port 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 only when the open / close member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 (the second variable entry port), by the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37, the game ball can not enter the ball impossible entering state (closed state) and entering the game ball can enter It can be changed to the ball capable state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality of (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided. As described above, the game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right from the center in the horizontal direction. It can be divided into How to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the left gaming area 3A is called left hitting, and how to shoot the game ball so that the gaming ball flows down on the right gaming area 3B is called right hitting . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game aims to enter the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-run game mainly based on entering the first start opening 20 by left-hand strike (first special symbol hit / not decision).

  On the other hand, if it becomes a big hit in the hit determination (1st special symbol hit or not decision) based on entering the ball to the first start opening 20, a big hit game, and after the big hit game (special game) (low probability high base state or high probability In the low base state), the game is aimed at entering the gate 28, the first large winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, or the second large winning opening 35 by hitting the right. That is, the big hit game, and low probability high base state (state B) or high probability low base state (state C) mainly enters the ball into the second starting opening 21 by the right-handed (second special symbol hit or not judgment) It becomes a right-handed game. And, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general ball entrance 27, the respective entering openings A predetermined number of gaming balls (also referred to as "winning balls" and "game profits") are paid out (granted). In this embodiment, the number of winning balls (the amount of gaming profit) to be paid out based on entering the first large winning opening 30 is calculated based on the entering of the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (the amount of game profit). Specifically, the first large winning opening 30 pays out 15 winning balls for one entering ball, and the second large winning opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entering ball. It is supposed to pay out the prize ball.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. On the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) for changing and stopping the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for changing and stopping the second special symbol. A container 41b (second special symbol display unit), and a normal symbol display 42 (normal symbol display unit) for variably displaying and stopping displaying a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. In addition, the main display 40, the first special view hold indicator 43a that displays the storage number of the pass / fail judgment information (first special view pending) pertaining to the first special symbol, pass / fail decision information pertaining to the second special symbol (the first 2) Special drawing reserve display 43b for displaying the number of storages for the special figure reserve, and general drawing reserve display 44 for displaying the number of memories for operation reserve (general drawing reserve) of the normal symbol display 42 ing.

  In addition, the main indicator 40 is a hit indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment or the second special symbol equivalence judgment is a hit, the first special symbol equivalence judgment or the second special symbol equivalence judgment When the result is hit, the round indicator 45 showing the number of rounds of the game to be played, the gaming state indicator 46 showing that the probability variation function is activated, and the firing direction of the gaming ball, ie right strike A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be left or hit. The various displays included in these main displays 40 are controlled by the main control unit described later.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display portion 41. In addition, the first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special view hold indicator 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then displayed as a stop, and the first start opening 20 or the second start opening is displayed by the special symbol (stop design) displayed as a stop (derivation display). We announce the result of the propriety judgment (special symbol propriety judgment, big hit lottery) based on entering the ball to 21. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol acceptance determination. If the stop symbol is a specific special symbol (specific identification information) determined in advance (ie, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed stop, A special game (big hit game, small hit game) in which 1 large winning opening 30 or second large winning opening 35 is opened is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol pass / fail judgment is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Also, in the case of the second big hit (4R second big hit), the four "jnkl" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. Also, when it comes off, the two "lo" LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. In addition, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined depending on the result (big hit, small hit, out) of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment. Moreover, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derived display), the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, in a predetermined order, from left to right Each LED can be turned on so that the light is repeatedly flowed.

  Here, among the stop display modes (display results of the variation display) of the special symbol and the effect pattern, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol pass / fail determination is hit (big hit or small hit) It is also called "specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol judgment is out is "out mode", "non-specific mode" , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the special symbol hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the small hit result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "small It is also referred to as a hit mode. Furthermore, it points to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display portion), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display portion), and the special symbol display portion 41. It is also called "variation display means" or "identification information display means".

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, various information such as a random number for special symbol acceptance or rejection determination ("acquired information") based on the entering the ball. The various information acquired and acquired is temporarily stored in the special image storage section 85 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. In detail, if it is the information acquired based on entering the first starting opening 20, it is stored as the first special view reserve (also referred to as "first acquired information") in the first special view reserve storage unit 85a, If it is the information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 21, it is stored as the second special view reserve (also referred to as "second acquired information") in the second special view reserve storage unit 85b. An upper limit is set to the number of special drawing reservations that can be stored in each special drawing reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special view reserve storage unit 85a and second special view reserve storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquired information storage means" and "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and also collectively referred to as "obtained information storage means". .

  The special view reserve stored in the special view reserve storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special view reserve becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means that a random number etc. for special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variation display of the special symbol for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 can not be immediately executed at the time of entering the ball, ie, each special During the execution of the variable display of the symbol or during the special game based on any of the special symbol equality determination, the right to the special symbol equality determination for the entering ball is reserved with a predetermined number (four each) as the upper limit (pending ) Can be.

  Then, the number of such special drawing reservations is displayed on the first special drawing reservation indicator 43a and the second special drawing reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special view hold display 43a is configured by two LEDs of "uv", and the first special view is displayed by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special view hold. It displays the number of reservations. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, turn 緑: turn on green) In the case of “u □ v ●”, the LED of u can be turned off and the LED of v can be turned on in red. In addition, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to set a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u · v □”. Moreover, when the number of reservations is 3, it can be set as the display mode which lights both LEDs in red like "u ● v ●". Moreover, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as in "u v v」 ", and the display mode can be made. The second special view hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and the second special view hold is performed by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special view hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs, such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, turn :: turn on green) 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special view hold display 43a.

  The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the stop display is performed, and the result of the normal symbol acceptance determination based on the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 28 is displayed by the normal symbols (stop symbols) displayed stop. Inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols by normal symbol judgment. The auxiliary game ("specific game") which opens the second starting opening 21 with the opening pattern according to the current gaming state, when the normal symbol displayed stopped is the predetermined specific normal symbol (performing normal symbol) Also called). Further, means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is configured of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol suitability determination according to the lighting mode thereof It is. For example, if the judgment result is a hit, both LEDs are lighted and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "s.t." (e.g., ■: lighted, □: lighted off). In addition, when the judgment result is out, the out-of-the-box normal symbol of a mode in which only the LED of t is lighted is displayed, such as “s □ t ■”. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined and predetermined change time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs repeat lighting and extinction alternately.

  When the game ball passes to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for normal pattern judgment on the basis of the passage, and acquires various information Is temporarily stored as a common drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set to the number of common drawing reservations that can be stored in the common drawing reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The regular drawing reserve stored in the regular drawing reserve storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the regular drawing reserve becomes possible. The term “general drawing reserve” means to determine a normal symbol suitability determination random number corresponding to the common drawing reserve, and to execute the variation display of the normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 28 can not be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of normal symbol judgment on the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

  The number of general drawing reservations is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 44. Specifically, the common drawing reservation display 44 is configured by two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of common drawing reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of common drawing reservations. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green); In the case of “q □ r ●”, the LED of q can be turned off, and the LED of r can be lit in red. Further, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special view reservation indicator 43a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment controls the main game board 80 ("main control unit" or "main control unit") to perform control related to gaming profits such as special symbol acceptance / disapproval determination, normal symbol Also referred to as a "game control unit", a sub control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub control unit", a "sub control unit", or a "production control unit") that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses Payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that performs control relating to the payout of the symbol, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, the third effect suspension indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) for performing display control of the fourth effect suspension indicator 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case containing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case An image control board etc. containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board containing case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board etc. It is provided. In addition, on the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided, and on the right side thereof, a power board case for housing the power board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 81 is mounted which controls the progression of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program or the like for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU for executing the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like through the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 81. Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the special view reserve storage unit 85 (the first special view reserve storage unit 85a and the second special view reserve storage unit 85b) and the general view reserve storage unit 86 described above. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal from each sensor is input to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first big winning port sensor 30a, the second big winning port sensor 35a, and The general ball entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

  The first starting opening sensor 20 a is provided in the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball entered into the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21 a is provided in the second starting opening 21 and detects a game ball entered into the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects the game ball passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball entered into the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball entered into the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general ball entrances 27, and detects the gaming balls having entered the general ball entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second starting opening solenoid 24, a first big winning opening solenoid 33, and a second big winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the open / close member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second large winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the open / close member 37 of the second large winning device 36. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special view hold indicator 43a, a second special view hold indicator 43b, A figure reserve indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for dispensing monitoring. The payout control substrate 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that dispenses a winning ball and a rental ball, and a card unit 135, and a launch device 112 via a launch control substrate 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of FIG. 1), and the prepaid card (game) is inserted by the player performing a predetermined ball lending operation. Ball lending is enabled based on information stored in a value storage medium) or the like.

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of the gaming balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM storing a program or the like for controlling payout of gaming balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU for executing the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 or a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out a prize ball and pays out a rental ball. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is the shot handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the gaming ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one direction) communication connection in which only transmission of a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 is possible. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction control means is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the subsidiary control board 90 is mounted with a presentation control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("a presentation control microcomputer") for controlling the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU for executing the program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from other boards via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91. Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

  An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 controls the CPU (VDP) of the image control one chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect indicator 102, third effect suspension indicator 103a, and fourth effect suspension indicator 103b Give control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is performed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs variation indication and stop indication according to the variation indication and the stop indication of the first special symbol, and the other LED shows the variation indication of the second special symbol. Display the variation result and the stop display according to the stop display and the display result (the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by turning on / off the corresponding LED or the color Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each formed of two LEDs. The third effect hold indicator 103a is displayed on the first effect hold indicator 43a and the first special view hold indicator 43a according to the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs, or the combination of colors. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same hold number as the hold number. In addition, the fourth effect hold indicator 103b is controlled to be displayed in a display mode showing the same hold number as the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed in the second special view hold indicator 43b. Ru.

  The character pattern is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion) or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect pattern display) By covering a part or substantially whole of the part), a part or all of the effect pattern 8, the first effect suspension display portion 9c, or the second effect suspension display portion 9d may not be visible. is there. These effect indicators 102, the third effect suspension indicator 103a, and the like, can be used as a supplementary indicator so that the variation display and stop indication of the effect pattern, the number of pending items, etc. can be confirmed with certainty even when such a covering state is achieved. And, the fourth effect suspension indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect indicator 102, the third effect suspension indicator 103a, and the fourth effect suspension indicator 103b are always visible without being impeded by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It has become. Also, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control substrate 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and sound data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to execute voice control. Further, in this case, sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / lighting off, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamp such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. And lamp data) are determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Furthermore, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108. The movable decorative member 14 is a so-called movable gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decoration 10, although only a part is visible in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines and determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub control substrate 90. The motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the motion pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  In addition, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90.

  Next, control relating to the special symbol pass / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol success or failure determination, it has "big hit", "small hit", "off". In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "disengagement", the "disengagement symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" that opens the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35 is executed with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed stop. . A special game to be executed as a big hit is referred to as a "big hit game", and a special game to be executed as a small hit is referred to as a "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types in the hit, and a hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol suitability determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol equivalence determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc., different hit types (big hit , Including small hits). Further, depending on the hit type, the special game to be executed may be different, and the amount of game profit obtainable by the special game may be different, or the game state after the end of the special game may be different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit", "15R 3rd big hit", "4R 4th big hit", "2R third big hit" There are 5 jackpots, "2R sixth jackpot", "2R seventh jackpot", and "2R eighth jackpot". In the "15R third big hit", the number of opening times (the number of rounds) of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is 15 times. In the "4R first big hit", "4R second big hit", and "4R fourth big hit", the number of opening times (the number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is four. "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit", the number of opening (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) It is twice. Thus, in the big hit, all the first large winning opening 30 is opened and the second large winning opening 35 is not opened. From this, the first large winning opening 30 is also referred to as "big winning large winning opening (big hit variable entrance)".

  In addition, "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit", "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", later described the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, Transition to the high probability state of (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)." This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" to transition the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to the low probability state described later (do not operate the probability change function) . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, usually jackpots)."

  In addition, "4R first big hit", "15R third big hit", "4R fourth big hit" set the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time after the end of the big hit game "second special symbol time short Activate the function and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes the high probability low base state (state C). This high probability low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, concerning the game characteristic of high probability low base state (state C), it mentions later in detail, but it is 2nd special by carrying out the right strike game in the right game area 3B which arranges various ball entrances as mentioned above. It is a period in which it is possible to make a small hit by making a pattern hit / not determination, and to increase the gaming ball in a period (between a big hit) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by making a small hit frequently in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it is also possible to expect to obtain many game balls in a short time by the small hit. That is, it is a period advantageous to the player, and is a period in which it is possible to enhance the game interest.

  In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", "2R eighth big hit" operates "second special symbol time short function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R second big hit" and "2R eighth big hit", the low probability high base state ends based on the next big hit occurring or the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times . When the variation display of the special symbol is ended based on 100 times being executed, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Also, in the case of "2R seventh big hit", the low probability high base state ends based on the next big hit occurring, or the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times. When the variation display of the special symbol is terminated 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in the low probability high base state, as described above, by performing a right-handed game on the right gaming area 3B in which various ball entrances are arranged, the second special symbol success or failure is determined. It is a period to play a game expecting the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” operate “second special symbol time reduction function” and “high base generation function” after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high probability high base state. In the case of "2R fifth big hit", "second special symbol time short function" continues until the next big hit occurs, "high base generation function", the next big hit occurs or the variation of the special symbol It ends based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as described above, the "probability function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R fifth big hit", after the big hit game is over, until the variable display of the special symbol passes 50 times, it is considered as a high probability high base state, and a big hit should not occur even after 50 times. , The gaming state is set to high probability low base state.

  The high probability high base state, like the low probability high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right gaming area 3B, to perform the second special symbol acceptance determination, expecting the occurrence of the next big hit the game As mentioned above, the high probability and low base state is a period advantageous to the player who can expect to obtain many game balls in a short period of time by making the small hit frequently by the right hitting game as described above. is there. It should be noted that there are more gaming balls obtainable in the high probability low base state than gaming balls obtainable in the high probability high base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol after the big hit game end passes 50 times, the game state will change to the game state (specific game state) more advantageous than before.

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit" is a high probability high base state until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times after the big hit game is over, and a big hit does not occur even after 100 times, Similar to "2R fifth hit" except that the gaming state is set to the high probability low base state, that is, the period in which the gaming state changes is different. Further, "2R fifth big hit" is set earlier than "2R sixth big hit" at a time when the gaming state changes from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. Therefore, it can be said that "2R fifth big hit" is a big hit which is more advantageous to the player than "2R sixth big hit".

  In addition, the high probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) which relates to “2R fifth big hit”, and the big hit after “2R seventh big hit” (2R seventh big hit game) By executing common game effects (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are not notified (it is difficult to recognize) the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state).

  If the type of the jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the game state becomes high probability low base state (advantage advantageous state for the player) after 50 times the variation display of the special symbol has passed, "2R In the case of the "7th big hit", after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player), so the player is not notified In the state, regardless of which gaming state, it is possible to play in expectation of shifting to the high probability low base state, and to enhance the game interest.

  In addition, high probability high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) end which relates to “2R sixth big hit” and the big hit after “2R eighth big hit game” (2R eighth big hit game) end By executing the common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are not notified (it is difficult to recognize) the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state).

  If the type of the jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the game state becomes high probability low base state (advantage advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol, "2R In the case of the "8th big hit", the game state is not a low probability state base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the variable display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, the player is not notified In the state, regardless of which gaming state, it is possible to play in expectation of shifting to the high probability low base state, and to enhance the game interest.

  In addition, the high probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit game) which relates to “2R fifth big hit”, and the big hit after “2R seventh big hit” (2R seventh big hit game) A big hit game related to the high pitch base state and the high hit high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) according to the "2R sixth big hit" and a big hit game related to the "2R eighth big hit" (2R eighth big hit game) In the low probability high base state after the end, by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.), it is possible for the player to recognize which game state. It will be difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, the gaming state is not notified (it is difficult to recognize) the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state).

  If the type of the jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the game state becomes high probability low base state (advantage advantageous state for the player) after 50 times the variation display of the special symbol has passed, "2R In the case of the "7th big hit", the game state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player) after 50 times of the variation display of the special symbol. If the type of the jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the game state becomes a high probability low base state (advantage advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of variation display of the special symbol has passed, In the case of "2R Eighth Big Hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player) after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol. Therefore, the player is expected to shift to the high probability low base state when the variation display of the special symbol passes 50 times regardless of the gaming state in the non-informing state. , Will enhance the game interest.

  In addition, even in the case of not transitioning to the high probability low base state, at least the high base state continues (that is, the non notification state continues) without shifting to the low probability low base state. I do. When the non-informing state continues after 50 times of the change display of the special symbol, the occurrence of the big hit is expected, and when the change display of the special symbol passes 100 times, it shifts to the high probability low base state To play games in the hopes of doing things, will increase the fun of the game. As described above, in the non-informing state, points that enhance the player's sense of expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and to maintain high game interest for a long time.

  In addition, small hits that may occur as a result of the second special symbol suitability determination, the opening number of the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is six times, compared to other big hits, once (and The total open time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds of release is performed in six times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, as compared with a big hit game (for example, 15R third big hit game or 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set smaller. However, by generating small hits a plurality of times (multiple times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In the small hit, all the second large winning opening 35 is opened and the first large winning opening 30 is not opened. From this, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as "small hitting large winning opening (small hitting variable entry ball opening)". In addition, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of opening of the large winning opening is not referred to as the number of rounds, but simply referred to as the number of opening. In addition, based on the occurrence of small hit, the probability change function does not operate, if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is high probability state, it will be high probability state even after small hitting game end, when small hit occurs If the gaming state of is a low probability state, it will be a low probability state even after the small hitting game is over. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, as for the distribution probability to each big hit in the yes-no decision of the 1st special symbol (special figure 1), 4R 1st big hit is 65%, 4R 2nd big hit is 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the judgment of the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for 15R third big hit, 5% for 4R fourth big hit, 5% for 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, 2R eighth big hit is 10%. That is, if it becomes a big hit by the hit judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail decision) based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 whose fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time short function described later It becomes a big hit (15R 3rd big hit), and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it is possible to play a game in the second starting opening 21 rather than becoming a big hit in the acceptance determination (first special symbol acceptance determination) performed with the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. It is set to be more likely to be advantageous for the player (if a large number of game balls can be obtained), if the player wins the big hit in the hit judgment (second special symbol hit or not judgment) performed when the ball enters the ball. There is. In addition, the player plays a game in anticipation of the occurrence of a high probability low base state capable of increasing the number of gaming balls by a small hit along with the occurrence of the 15R third big hit.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of the big hit, the small hit, or the off is performed based on "the special symbol judgment random number (also referred to as" the information for judgment of good or bad) " The determination of the type of the big hit is performed based on "Rockup type determination random number (also referred to as" symbol determination random number "or" symbol determination information "). As shown to FIG. 7 (A), the random number for special symbol propriety judgment takes a value in the range of 0-629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. The random number (acquired information) acquired on the basis of entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 includes the “variation pattern, in addition to the special symbol random decision determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number. There is a random number (also referred to as "variation pattern information"). In addition, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including a fluctuation time of a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers obtained based on the passage of the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for normal symbol suitability determination is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 (normal symbol suitability determination). The normal symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has the probability fluctuation function (probability change function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the open extension function of the second start opening function or not activated. Depending on the combination of states, it has a plurality of gaming states. The state in which the probability variation function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as the "high probability state", and the state not in operation is referred to as the "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol qualification determination is higher than that of the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, although the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot determination table for the low probability state in the low probability state, the big hit judgment for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol pass / fail judgment random number determined to be the big hit is high in the high probability state Whether or not it is determined using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol operates, the probability of the result of the variation display of the special symbol becoming a big hit (the stop symbol becomes the big hit symbol) is higher than when not operating. In addition, a means (main control part) which sets a high probability or a low probability as a probability (big hit probability) of special symbol equivalence determination is called "probability setting means".

  In addition, the state in which the variation time shortening function is operating for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as "time-shortening state", and the state not operating is referred to as "non-time-shorting state". In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the finalized display time) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short time state, the change pattern is determined using the change pattern table which is determined such that the selection of the short change pattern of the change time is greater than in the non-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the Tokusou reserve becomes fast, and it becomes easy to generate effective ball entry to the starting opening (entering ball that can be stored as Tokusou reserve). Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the progress of a smooth game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage and disadvantage of the player, as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time-shortening function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player plays the right-handed game and causes the second starting opening 21 to enter the game ball, the second special While the symbol pass / fail determination is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for big hit, 2 minutes for small hit), the game can not proceed smoothly (such conditions Is also referred to as “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large amount of gaming balls even if the player plays a right-handed game in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left hitting game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol, Even when the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake in the state A, the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 20 without waiting for the variation display of the second special symbol to end. , It is possible to change display of the first special symbol.

  When the second special symbol time function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. (2) Since the variation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play a right-handed game without reducing the ball compared to the left-handed game (in state B, it is maintained or slightly decreased, state C The game can be smoothly performed (while increasing the second special symbol, determination of the second special symbol, variation game of the second special symbol). Further, in the present embodiment, while the first special symbol time short function is also activated while the second special symbol time short function is operating, the first special symbol time short function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function (second special symbol time short function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate at the same time. And, the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol are designed to operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and the low base state (low probability low base state, high probability) Not working in low base conditions). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol judgment is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a "general drawing high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be hit is more for the state B than in the low symbol state (state A, C). The normal symbol hit / non-permission judgment (normal symbol judgment) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation indication of the normal symbol is hit (the stop symbol becomes the normal hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

  Also, in the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting opening 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of normal symbol judgment is hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and the opening is performed. The second start port is in the open state during the period of operation. In the high base state, when the result of normal symbol judgment is hit, the open / close member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one open operation for 6.0 seconds (open time: 6.0 seconds). . The closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 second. In the present embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening and closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Alternatively, the opening operation in the high base state may be performed six times for 1.0 second, and may be more than the opening number in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as activation of the variable winning device 22 for increasing the number of times of opening.

  In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The opening period of the second starting opening 21 becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the ball entering frequency of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state" ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol suitability determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes the second starting opening 21 when the opening number is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting opening 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a very short time (1 second). In addition, during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, since the second starting opening 21 is closed, the variation time of the normal symbol is that the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 in the closed state. Before the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before the upper surface is passed. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the gaming ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting opening 21 which is in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material forming the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the game ball downward speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the speed of the game rush or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as an aspect of reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be relaxed, or a blocking member (protrusion or the like) may be provided to reduce the flow-down speed. Moreover, thereby, in the high base state, the game ball having flowed down to the second start opening 21 does not enter the second start opening 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second large winning opening The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (the ball entering possible state) as a small hit, the game ball which has flowed down enters the second starting hole 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the special winning opening 35.

  The high base state may not activate all the functions described above. That is, by activating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting opening than when the function is not activated 21 is easy to be released (the ball entry frequency is high). In addition, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the special symbol time reduction state. The function that generates such a high base state is called "high base generation function".

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the player is better off the first special symbol because it is more advantageous for the player to judge the second special symbol than the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility that a right-handed game will be played. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol Since the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it can not be variably displayed many times in the normal state, and the gaming efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left strike game than to display the second special symbol by the right strike game. Here, “the first special symbol is not in play (non-playing state)” means that the first special symbol is not in a fluctuating display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending first special symbols is “0 To say In addition, “the second special symbol is not in play (non-playing state)” means that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (including the confirmation stop display time) and the number of pending second special symbols is “0”. Say that.

  In addition, in the high base state such as the high probability high base state and the low probability high base state, and in the high probability low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes short due to the second special symbol time short function. The gaming efficiency by will be improved. In such a case, the player can proceed with the game more advantageously by performing a right-handed game and making a second special symbol success or failure determination that is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. The reason is that Therefore, while passing the gaming ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for normal symbol success / failure determination, the player performs a right strike to bring the gaming ball into the second starting opening 21.

  Moreover, in the high probability low base state, the ball entering frequency to the second starting opening 21 is the same as the low probability low base state (normal state), but it is executed based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 Since the variation time of the second special symbol to be changed is changing in a short time, a right-handed game capable of executing the second special symbol equivalence determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol equivalence determination is performed. Also, in the high probability low base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, so the second start opening 21 is entered. Sphere frequency is low compared to high base condition. Therefore, the winning balls based on entering the second starting opening 21 can not be obtained as high as in the high base state. However, instead, by the second special symbol qualification, by a small hit (small hit probability: 300/630) which occurs with high probability, it prevents the game ball from decreasing during the big hit, but rather causes a small hit frequently. It is also possible to increase the holding balls (by generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the right-handed game is frequently caused by entering the second starting opening 21 without significantly reducing the holding balls. 2 Aim to generate the next big hit by the special symbol judgment. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls based on entering the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls that are hit to the right enter the second start opening 21, it is possible to play the game. There is no increase in sphere (it becomes maintenance). Further, in the present embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the game balls hit to the right are set to enter the second starting opening 21, unless the ball is entered into another ball entrance, the high base If the condition is continued for a long time, it has a specification to reduce the ball holding capacity.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, by the right hitting game, small hit is frequently generated by the second special symbol equivalence determination based on entering the ball to the second starting opening 21, and the ball in the small hit game While aiming to increase, we aim for the next big hit occurrence by the second special symbol equivalence judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high probability and low base state, as the period in which the next big hit does not occur is longer (the period in the high probability and low base state lasts), a large number of small hits are generated. There are many opportunities to execute small hit games, which is advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and gaming state]
Also, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area), various entrances are gated from the upstream side of the gaming area from the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first big winning opening 30, the first The two starting openings 21 and the second and third winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. In addition, since the game ball flow down passages of the right game area 3B are formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls fired to the right game area 3B (90%) when these respective winning openings are closed. The above passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, and then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then the second The upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 is made to flow down to the out port 34. When there is a winning opening in the open state in the middle of the flow, the player enters the winning opening and is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entering game ball is in the gaming area further downstream than that. It is a configuration that is not obvious.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 and the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, that a normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which a normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right gaming area, it is possible to cause the gate 28 to pass almost all the game balls hit to the right regardless of the presence or absence of the other winning opening. In addition, since the game ball having passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area to the downstream side as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not inhibit entry to other winning openings.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low high high base state, high high high base state), first, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and it is determined whether the second start opening 21 is opened. Be done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so the gaming ball is gated. The movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened immediately after passing through (1 second). That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol equivalence determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, before the game ball passing through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting opening 21, 2) The start port 21 is in the open state. Moreover, since the opening time of the second start opening 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second start opening 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. , And then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then repeat open for 1 second 6.0 seconds (1 second closed → 6) .0 seconds open → 1 second closed → about 6.0 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting opening 21 becomes almost open, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 3B It will hit the ball. Further, when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special symbol success or failure judgment is executed. In the second special symbol suitability determination, in the high probability high base state, it is a big hit with a probability of 1/63, a small hit with a probability of 30/63, and a slip with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of the second special symbol success or failure judgment is out, the gaming ball flowing down the right gaming area 3B, after passing the gate 28, most (about 80 to 90%) of the gaming balls are in the open state The second game starting ball 21 enters the second starting hole 21 and the other game balls flow downstream from the gaming ball passage branched off in front of the second starting hole 21 and without flowing into the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26 or enter the out port 34. Thereby, the 2nd special symbol propriety judgment is performed continuously. In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting opening 21, the second special symbol pass / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in holding balls, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one winning ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting opening 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is a big hit, the first large winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode according to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second large winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the game to the right is smoothly blocked by the other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21 and the first big winning opening smoothly. Enter 30 on the ball. Here, when the second starting opening 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning opening 30, although it shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, the second starting opening 21 is in the low base state in this embodiment. Because it is a specification that will be opened frequently, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game entered the second start opening 21 first and did not enter the second start opening 21 A situation occurs in which only the game balls enter the second big winning opening 30.

  In addition, since the number of winning balls based on entering the second starting opening 21 is one, the execution time of the big hit game is simply increased for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant and does not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can be smoothly advanced. Become. In addition, since the first large winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first large winning opening 30 may also block entry to the second starting hole 21 when not in the large hitting game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the small hit opening / closing mode shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is in the open state for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the gaming balls flowing down to the second starting opening 21 enter the second starting opening 21 disposed on the upstream side of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even when a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is a small hit, and the second starting opening 21 on the upstream side, the second large winning on the downstream side Entry into the mouth 35 is inhibited, and entry into the second large winning opening 35 is difficult. Although the number is small (although the possibility is low), even in the high base state, when the second start port 21 is in the closed state, the game ball passes the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second start port 21 When the second large winning opening 35 is reached, the gaming ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 if the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state.

  Next, the high probability low base state will be described. The high probability low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting the right. When the right-handed game is performed in the high probability low base state, first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and it is determined whether or not the second starting opening 21 is opened (normal symbol judgment). In the low base state (high probability low base state), the variation time of the normal pattern is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal pattern is also about half the high base state ( Since the game ball is set to 120/240), the game ball passes the gate, and after a short time (3 seconds), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting opening 21 is opened when it comes into contact It becomes. Since the probability of being hit is about 1/2, the hit and the drop occur approximately in half.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol judgment is performed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second game ball passes through the gate of the second start opening 21 after passing through the gate The start opening 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting opening 21 is also three times 0.9 seconds (the closing time between opening is 0.1 second), the second starting opening 21 is , It is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds, and when it comes to hit, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds again. In the example where the hit and the drop occur alternately, the second opening 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and then opens 3 times of 0.9 seconds, and the normal symbol of 3 seconds It will close during the fluctuation time, it will come off, it will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and it will repeat the cycle (3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → .....).

  Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy low-base state, the period in which the second start port 21 is in the open state is about 30%, and the period in the closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, the high probability low base state is the second start in comparison with the high base state in which the period in which the second start port 21 is open is about 90% and the period in which the second start port 21 is closed is about 10%. The possibility that the game ball which has flowed down to the entrance of the mouth 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaches the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is set high without entering the second starting opening 21. . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success or failure judgment will be a small hit is different even in the high base condition (low probability high base condition, high probability high base condition) or high probability low base condition Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, it does not have a small hit in the result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment executed in left-handed gaming, and has a small hitting only in the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment executed in right-handed gaming ing.

  As described above, in the high probability and low base state, about 70% of the game balls of the game balls flowing down the right gaming area (flowing down to the second starting opening 21) enter the second starting opening 21. It flows down to the 2nd big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the 2nd starting opening 21 without. Thereby, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the small hit opening / closing mode shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the gaming ball having passed the gate 28 passes the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and the second starting opening 21 is in the open state. 2 Enter the starting opening 21 and if the second starting opening 21 is in the closed state, pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21 and flow down to the second large winning opening 35. Enter the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

  Since the winning balls based on entering the second large winning opening 35 are considered to be 10 winning balls for one entering the ball, the second winning opening 35 is allowed to enter during the small hitting game. This makes it possible to increase the holding ball during the high probability low base state. In addition, the high probability low base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs by the special symbol pass / fail judgment (only the second special symbol hit / off judgment is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued). The longer it lasts, the more the player can hold the ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain an average of about 20 winning balls (two entering balls) by the occurrence of one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is also possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 at 10 times). Moreover, in addition to the big hit game's winning ball, the small hit game's winning ball can be added as a total winning ball of the "long-running period" in which the right-handed game is continued, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the second large winning opening 35 disposed downstream (the most downstream among these) of the gate 28, the first large winning opening 30 for large hitting (for big hitting only) and the second starting opening 21 is for small hitting ( It is considered as a big winning opening for small hits only). In addition, by arranging the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hit, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the second large opening is performed by the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21. The number (percentage) of gaming balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, the high base state (when a small hit game is executed by opening / closing control of the second starting opening 21 (time to be in the open state, fluctuation time of the normal symbol, probability of hitting the normal pattern). The high probability low base state makes the possibility of the game ball entering the second big winning opening 35 higher than the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state). Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, as long as it does not pass through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), a flow path which does not reach the second big winning opening 35 is formed. The effect of the opening and closing control of the starting opening 21 is made more effective.

  Furthermore, even with the same right-handed game, this makes the game ball enter the second starting hole 21 and substantially maintains the ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or suppresses the speed of the ball decrease) While), the state (high base state) to play in hopes that the result of the second special symbol success or failure judgment will be a big hit (a favorable big hit), let the game ball enter the second starting opening 21 and small A state (high probability low) to play in hopes that the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment will be a big hit (favorable big hit) while entering the second big winning opening 35 at the time of hit and increasing the ball holding Base state) and, to diversify the playability. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. Note that for the player, a high probability low base state capable of increasing the number of balls is more advantageous to the gaming state than the high base state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit is set to the high probability high base state, the special symbol variation of the predetermined number (50 or 100) in the high probability high base state. When the jackpot does not become a big hit until the display ends, the gaming state is assumed to change to the high probability low base state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state in the effect symbol display part etc. The game effect is executed in the proper display mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is not the high probability low base state but the high base state, then it changes to the high probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It is possible to play games in anticipation. Also, this makes it possible to maintain the game interest for a long time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” are provided as the types of big hit to shift from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. "2R 5th big hit" will shift from high probability high base state to high probability low base state after passing 50 times of variation display of special symbol, "2R 6th big hit" will be variation display of 100 times of special symbol When it passes, it shifts from high probability high base state to high probability low base state. Moreover, it has "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit" as a high probability low base state. "2R seventh big hit", after passing 50 times of variation display of special symbol, it shifts from low probability high base state to low probability low base state (normal state), "2R eighth big hit" is 100 special When the variable display of the pattern has passed, it shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, high after the big hit game and big hit game pertaining to the four big hit types of "2R fifth big hit", "2R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" In the base state, by executing the common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state it is. That is, it is in a non notification state in which the gaming state is not notified.

  In this embodiment, the distribution ratio (rate of occurrence) of the “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” that are not notified is 50 times. If the high base state (non-informing state) continues after passing through, the transition to the high probability low base state at the time of 100 times has passed with high possibility than when the high base state ends in 50 times It is supposed to be. Thereby, the player is expected to shift to the high probability low base state after 50 times, and the high base status continues without shifting to the high probability low base state even after 50 passes ( Even in the case where the unannounced state continues), it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the high probability low base state. This makes it possible to maintain the game interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such an aspect, even if the transition is made 50 times or when the transition is made 100 times, the possibility of transition to the high probability low base state is set to the same. On the contrary, in the case of 50 transitions, the possibility of transition to the high probability low base state may be higher than in the case of 100 transitions. As a result, when the high base state continues even after 50 times, the sense of expectation for the high probability low base state transition is lowered. In addition, after the second predetermined number of times more than the first predetermined number of times, the jackpot type is further provided, and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of times of the variation display of the special symbol. If it does not become a big hit by that time, it may be decided to shift to a high probability low base state. Also, conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of times of the variation display of the special symbol, after a second predetermined number of times more than the first predetermined number (if so big hit It may be decided not to shift to the high probability low base state). In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery or the like) is established in the middle of the non-informing state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying the character or character that easily recognizes the gaming state (executes the fixed effect). The status may be reported.

  Moreover, in the high probability low base state, when the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is a big hit and when it is out, the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment in the high base state mentioned above is It is similar to the case of a big hit and the case of a lose.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right gaming area 3B by also using the gate 28. As a result, when the big hit standby state is established, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without blocking the passage to the start gate 29 by the second start port 21 etc., and the big hit game starts It is possible to Although the start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately, in this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30, the second It is necessary to provide the starting opening 21 and the second large winning opening 35 on the upstream side.

  In addition, when the right-handed game should be performed, the emission direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the game should be released to the right game area. In addition, when the left hitting game should be performed, the emission direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit (display control) in a predetermined manner, and it is informed that the game should be released to the left gaming area. Specifically, the emission direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the emission direction by lighting the LEDs in accordance with the game state. For example, in the low base state, it may be notified that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turn off, ■: turn on). it can. Also, in the high base state, it may be notified that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lighted, such as "y z" (for example, □: turn off, ■: turn on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the variable information of the identification information (special symbol, effect pattern) is displayed is "low probability low base state", "high probability low base state", " Among the low probability high base status and high high probability high base status, it is possible to control, but among them, the low probability low base status is also called "normal game state", and the high probability low base status It is also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described based on FIGS. The counter, flag, status, buffer and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, first, initialization is performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, setting of stack, setting of constant, setting of interrupt time, setting of CPU of main control board 80, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time), various flags, status and counters Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbol is "common figure", the special symbol is "special figure", the first special symbol is "special figure 1" or "first special figure", the second special symbol is "special figure" It may be called "2" or "2nd special view"

  Next to the initial setting (S101), the interruption is prohibited (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), updating is performed by adding one to the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. The value of each random number counter returns to “0” when it reaches the upper limit value and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is finished, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the interrupt processing (S105) is possible. The interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the end of the interrupt processing (S105) and before the start of the interrupt processing (S105) next, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is repeated To be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, and is started after the interrupt is permitted (S104).

[Interrupt process]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described using FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, an output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) or the like set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. Do. The command etc. output here includes information on the gaming state, the special symbol as a result of the determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the variation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information on the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information on the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, and a first big winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A detection signal detected by 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entrance gate sensor 27a and the like (see FIG. 5) is read, and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from the lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as "lower plate") is taken in, and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is the same process as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), This is performed both in the next interrupt processing (the period until the start of S105). In this way, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203), starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) described later, start entry ball processing (S205), general drawing operation processing (S206), special figure 1 operation processing (S207) Special processing 2 operation processing (S208), holding ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is ended. Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit) next, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, a command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting mouth sensor detection process]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) will be described using FIG. In the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then, the number of normal symbol holding balls (number of common drawing holdings, specifically, the number of common drawing holdings provided in RAM) It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the gate 28 (S301: NO), the process proceeds to S305.

  When it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol holding ball number is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol holding ball number (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition processing (S304) Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the random symbol counter for determining normal symbol suitability stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information, common drawing acquisition information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls in the common drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20 (YES in S305), the special drawing 1 holding ball number (the number of the first special view holding, specifically the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special views reserved provided in the RAM has reached four (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the special drawing 1 holding ball number has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the special drawing 1 holding ball number is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored special drawing 1 holding ball number (S307), and the special drawing 1 related random number acquisition A process is performed (S308), and it progresses to S309.

  Special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol pass / fail judgment stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of RAM, the random number for big hit classification The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (value of random number shown in FIG. 7A), and those acquired random values (acquisition information, special information The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space according to the current Tokusetsu 1 reserved ball number in the first Tokusetsu storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 21, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 21 (NO in S309), the processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21 (YES in S309), then, the special figure 2 holding ball number (the number of the second special figure holding, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of the second special view reserved provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the special drawing 2 holding ball number has reached 4 (YES in S310), the processing is ended. When it is determined in S310 that the special figure 2 holding ball number is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored special figure 2 holding ball number (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol suitability determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired and shown in FIG. The random number value) and the acquired random number value are stored in the address space according to the current special figure 2 holding ball number in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b.

[Process when starting ball entry]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the start-in ball-on process (S205) will be described. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs start-in-time processing (S205) following the start-up opening sensor detection processing (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start entering ball processing (S 205), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 holding ball number has increased by “1” (S 315). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number of balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the special view 2 holding ball number in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 holding ball number has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special view reserve storage unit is read ( S316). Subsequently, the acquired random number value which concerns on the read 2nd special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the read random number values, for the value of the random number counter for special symbol eligibility determination (special symbol eligibility determination random value), the big hit depending on the current gaming state (whether the low probability state or the high probability state) It is determined (predetermined) whether or not it is out of place, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (predetermined). In this determination (pre-judgment) in S317, a pre-judgment (so-called "pending ahead read") is performed prior to the pass / fail judgment in the special chart 2 pass / fail judgment processing described later. ") Is equivalent to

  It should be noted that prior determination of whether or not a big hit is a big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a big hit determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state) Then, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as other prior determination modes, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) The variation pattern information determination table of Then, in the prior determination, the predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (the value of the random symbol counter for special symbol suitability determination, etc.) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible. Then, it is possible to distinguish whether or not a big hit, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with a high big hit reliability is executed, and the like from the selected variation pattern information.

  Next, in S318, game information (pre-judgment information) relating to the result of the judgment in S317, specifically, information (big hit information) indicating whether or not the special symbol random decision value matches the big hit decision value, Information (big hit type information) indicating the value (random hit value for big hit type determination) of the big hit type determination random number counter, information (small hit information indicating whether the random value for special symbol suitability determination matches the small hit determination value Command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) etc. is generated as a special figure 2 start entry sphere command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). A part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub control board as the special figure 2 start entry command, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number The game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted without transmitting as it is.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, whether it is the information related to the big hit, the type of the big hit is the information related to the small hit The sub control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is any. Moreover, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number obtained by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command will be a big hit when it is determined in the high probability state, and It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit if it is judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub control unit 90 stores the received special view 2 start entering ball command as hold (effect hold information), and in advance determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines success or failure in the low probability state It is possible to determine whether or not effect holding information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, among the acquired random numbers read out in S316, the special symbol judgment random number is not transmitted to the sub control unit as it is, and the value of the other big hit type random number counter (big hit Command data including information indicating the type determination random number), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, It is possible to set

  Next, in S319, as in the case of the processing related to the above-mentioned Special Figure 2, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding ball number has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 holding ball number has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the special view 1 reserved ball number in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting opening. On the other hand, when it is determined in S319 that the number of special drawing 1 balls held is not increasing (NO in S319), the process is finished as it is. The processes of S321 to S323 are the same as those of S316 to S318 described above, which are performed for the special view 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special image storage section is read (S321), Prior determination is performed on the read out random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information relating to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). In addition, prior determination (pending pre-reading) of S322 is performed prior to the pass / fail determination in the special figure 1 pass / fail determination process described later.

[General operation process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a routine drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 next to the start-on-stroke process (S205). In the common drawing operation processing (S206), the processing relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four steps, and "common drawing operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these steps. . Then, if the "general drawing operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the "general drawing operation status" is "2" (S401) (NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal symbol variation processing (S404), and if "Popular movement operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), determine the normal symbol The process (S406) is performed, and when the "general operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, and S405 are all NO), the ordinary electric bonus processing (S407) is performed. The general drawing operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Normal pattern standby process]
Next, normal symbol standby processing (S402) will be described using FIG. In normal symbol standby processing (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of balls held for normal symbols is "0" (S501), and when it is determined in S501 that "0" (YES in S501), processing Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol suitability determination process described later is performed (S502) and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the variation time of the normal symbol is one second. Select a pattern variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), then the normal symbol fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds is selected as the normal symbol fluctuation time. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection processing (S503), an ordinary symbol random number shift processing described later is performed (S504), and then a normal symbol variation start processing is performed (S505), and the processing is finished. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process, in order to notify the sub control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol variation start command is set.

[Normal pattern success or failure judgment processing]
Next, the normal symbol suitability determination process (S502) will be described using FIG. In the normal symbol acceptability determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the random symbol counter for normal symbol acceptability determination stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the gaming state is the high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If the state B flag is ON in S602, that is, it is determined to be in the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not a hit is determined by the high probability general distribution judgment based on the values “0” to “238” (S604), and the process proceeds to the processing of S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random symbol counter for normal symbol suitability determination matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, when the state B flag is not ON in S602, that is, when it is determined to be in the low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit according to the low probability general drawing decision based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the common drawing equivalence determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per common drawing) (S605), and when it is determined that it is out (NO in S605) A normal symbol (generally out-of-figure symbol) is determined (S606), and the process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that the hit (per common figure) is determined (YES in S605), a stop symbol is displayed to determine a normal symbol (per common figure) (S607), and the common hit flag is turned on (S608) ), Finish the process.

[Normal pattern random number shift process]
Next, normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described using FIG. In the common symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol holding balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest pending storage in the popular drawing reserve storage unit, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth common drawing reserved is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general drawing hold is made to be digested in the holding order.

[Process during normal symbol change]
Next, processing during normal symbol variation (S404) will be described using FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol variation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO at S801) Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol variation stop command is set (S802), the common drawing operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol variation display is displayed, The other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or an off normal symbol) according to the determination result of the normal symbol suitability determination random number is performed (S804), and the processing is ended.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described using FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether a common drawing hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the common drawing hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the common drawing operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the general drawing hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether it is a high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the open pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The open pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an open pattern in which the open for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second start opening opening counter that counts the number of times the second start opening 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is opened for the states A and C (for low base state). The pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The open patterns for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) are, as described above, an open pattern in which 0.9 seconds of opening are performed three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second start opening opening counter. In S904, the general drawing operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing is ended.

[Normal electric role processing]
Next, the normal electric symbol processing (S407) will be described using FIG. In the normal motorized symbol processing (S407), first, it is determined whether the end flag per common drawing is ON (S1001). The end-of-round-drawing flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting opening 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If it is determined that the end-of-round-drawing flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003), and the open time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process is ended. When it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) If it is determined that the predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting opening (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is the closing time of the second starting port (YES in S1005), processing for setting the second starting port 21 in the closed state (closing) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port open counter Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether the value of a 2nd starting opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the processing is finished to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per common map for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end per common map flag is set ( S1010), finish the process. The second start opening opening counter becomes “0” when the opening of the second start opening 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during state B (high base state), and state A When the opening of the second starting port 21 is made three times also during the state C (low base state), the state becomes "0". On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per common drawing is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 is completed. The finish flag per common drawing is turned off (S1011), the common flag per common drawing is turned off (S1012), the common drawing operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the processing is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the normal symbol standby processing (S402) is executed again as the common drawing operation processing (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special drawing 1 operation processing (S207) next to the general drawing operation processing (S206). This special view 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process relating to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), the special symbol 1 during movement processing (S1104) is performed, and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 finalization processing (S1106) is performed, and when “Special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (S1101, S1103, S1105 together NO, S1107 YES), special electric as a big hit game The character feature process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the process ends. The special view 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, because small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol equality judgment, the special electric symbol processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation processing, but the small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol equality judgment You may In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric combination processing 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) will be described using FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls in the first starting opening 20 (i.e., the number of special drawing 1 balls held) is "0" (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0”, that is, there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on entering the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), , It is determined whether the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special view 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in play (NO in S1207), processing is taking the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the demonstration screen for waiting for customers) If it is determined that the standby screen is being displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process is ended.

  In addition, when it is determined in S1201 that the special figure 1 holding ball number is not “0”, that is, there is one or more storage of the random number counter value acquired based on entering the ball into the first starting port 20 (S1201 NO), special figure 1 pass / fail judgment processing (S1203) to be described later, special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, “special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in the display of variation (including the decision stop indication time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. It means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special figure 1 success or failure judgment processing]
Next, special view 1 pass / fail determination processing (S1203) will be described using FIG. In the special view 1 yes / no determination process (S1203), first, it is stored as a determination value in the lowermost area (that is, the first RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reserve) of the first special figure reserve storage unit 85a of the RAM. The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol propriety judgment (of the oldest memory) being read is read out (S 1601). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, it is determined whether the second special symbol is performing a variable display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special view 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display relating to the big hit, it is not determined whether it is a big hit or not in the judgment of the other special symbols. It is considered out of place (ie, it is not determined to be a big hit). It should be noted that since the first special symbol does not have a small hit as a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is performing a variable display pertaining to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol judgment whether to be executed during that time, It will all come off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the variation display relating to the big hit (NO in S1602), then the positive variation flag is ON or not, namely It is determined whether it is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is determined to be in the low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) Judgment determination is performed based on the table (the jackpot determination value is “3” and “397”) (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the big hit determination table for high probability state in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “337”, “397”, “449” , "503" is.

  In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is a "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined that a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the big hit type determination random number counter (label-TRND- AS) is read, and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (S1609). The big hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1610), and the process is finished. In addition, in the case of the success or failure judgment pertaining to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot classification determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the success / failure determination according to the second special symbol, for the second special symbol The big hit type determination table is used to determine the big hit type. Moreover, when it determines with a big hit by the yes-no decision of the 1st special symbol (special figure 1), either 4R 1st big hit and 4R 2nd big hit are performed. In addition, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit in the decision, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the missing symbol is determined (S1607), and the process is ended.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit variation flag, the first special symbol indicates that the variation display relating to the big hit (the variation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And the second big hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display (a variation display that will cause the big hit symbol to stop display) pertaining to a big hit, and the main control unit 80 The corresponding flag is set in the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of. In addition, as the small hitting fluctuation flag, the 2nd small hitting fluctuation flag which shows that the 2nd special design the fluctuation indication which relates to the small hitting (the fluctuation indication which the small hitting design becomes stop indication) is under execution A flag corresponding to the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. And, when the big hit fluctuation flag is set regarding one special symbol (that is, during the fluctuation indication which relates to the big hit), in the other special symbol equality decision, processing which decides whether or not it is a big hit Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player is given too much game profit in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) next to the special figure 1 yes / no determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special view 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), it is first determined whether the gaming state is the state A (whether it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702) and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to with reference to the condition A big hit table (a portion corresponding to the condition A and big hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected by the state A jackpot table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of holding balls (number of holdings) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first number of suspension table (the condition A out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of suspension) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to portions corresponding to 1 and 2). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second number of suspension table (FIG. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A and the part falling out of the fluctuation pattern table 9 and falling under the number 3 and 4).

  Thereby, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is short compared to when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2" There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening fluctuation according to the number of holding balls works, and the average fluctuation time becomes short.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not the state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then the gaming state is the state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is the state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is determined to be ON ( Yes in S1709), the state B jackpot table (part corresponding to the state B and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to, and fluctuation is performed based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) A pattern is selected (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special view 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (part corresponding to the state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Also, in S1708, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is the state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Then, it is judged whether the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON or not (S1712), and when it is judged that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the condition C and the part corresponding to the big hit in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special view 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C deviation table (a portion corresponding to the state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referenced. Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  In addition, in the state B and the state C, since it is a gaming state in which the game is played mainly with the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right or left), the first The variation display of special symbols is rarely performed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the state B and the state C is simple (the number is small and the fluctuation time is also short). In the state B, in the case of the big hit, the variation pattern P15 is set, and in the case of the deviation, the variation pattern P16 is set. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern P23 is selected, and in the case of a deviation, the variation pattern P24 is set.

  After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is finished. In the other processing (S1704), a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in a fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described using FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Then, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special view reserve storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special view reserve storage unit 85a consists of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003" , And the address "0000" (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the first special view storage unit 85 a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special view hold (when the upper limit number is stored) The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), while setting the special figure 1 operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Process during special symbol 1 change]
Next, processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation (S1104) will be described using FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 during fluctuation process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the variation time of the special view 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 variation suspension process is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special view 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special view 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed during state B (high base state) Is decremented by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to the process of S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the low probability high base state, the state shifts to the low probability low base state (normal state), and if the high probability high base state shifts to the high probability low base state (advantage state).

  In S1908, set the special figure 1 operation status to "3" (S1908), and stop the variation display of the special symbol by the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment random number and the random decision for jackpot type determination etc. Processing (S1909), and the processing ends.

[Special figure 1 change interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation suspension process (S1902) is during the fluctuation display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 It is the processing which restarts the measurement which was suspended when the measurement of the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted and the big hit game or the small hit game is over. Thereby, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game according to one special symbol, it is assumed that the success or failure determination processing or the variable display according to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special view 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described using FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON or not (S2901), and when it is judged that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), It is determined whether the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether the big hit game according to the special view 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON or not, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). If it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the processing is ended. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 The suspension flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is suspended (S2904), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  Also, if it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON or not Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special view 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to the special view 2 is still being executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special view 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then determined whether the special view 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special view 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to the special view 2 is still being executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game according to special figure 2 is ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is ended. Thereby, it is possible to resume the fluctuation display (time measurement of fluctuation time) of the first special symbol that has been interrupted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the suspension flag, a special figure 1 suspension flag (also referred to as a “first suspension flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol A flag corresponding to an interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80, which has a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a "second interruption flag") indicating that the variable display is being interrupted. Are set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106) will be described using FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit variation flag indicating that the big hit variation display according to the first special symbol is being turned off (S2002), The special figure 1 big hit flag which shows execution of the big hit game which relates to the special design is made ON (S2003), it moves to the processing of S2004. Thereby, in the special figure 1, it is possible to end the fluctuation display which relates to the big hit (confirm the big hit), it can indicate that it moves to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game (in the one-round opening mode, one round from opening of the big winning opening to closing) is set to "4" (S2004) In order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special view 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the processing is finished. In addition, the stop command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. In addition, it will be in the big hit standby state by this. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game starts, that is, it is a variable display relating to disconnection, so the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as a big hit flag, the result of the success or failure judgment concerning the first special symbol is a big hit, and the special figure 1 big hit flag (“first big hit showing that the big hit game according to the big hit is being executed. Flag) and the special figure 2 big hit flag (also referred to as "second big hit flag") showing that the result of the success or failure judgment concerning the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game concerning the big hit is being executed. , And when the big hit game is executed, the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, the result of the success or failure judgment pertaining to the second special symbol is a small hit, and a special figure 2 small hit flag indicating that the small hit game pertaining to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs of a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 4R first big hit, a display mode such as "2R △ 4R ▲ 15R △" (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off) is displayed. Next, the special view 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. However, in the special view 2 operation process (S211), the special view 1 operation process (FIG. In order to perform processing in the same flow as S206) and the like, the following description will be simplified.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special view 2 operation process (S208) performs processing in the same flow as the special view 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special view 2 operation process (S208) next to the special view 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute variable display in parallel with the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the special view 1 operation process and the special view 2 operation process. That is, digestion of the first special figure reserve and digestion of the second special figure reserve (“the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol”, “the first special symbol pass / fail judgment and the second special symbol It is possible to execute in parallel with the yes / no judgment and “)”. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the pass / fail judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail decision) based on entering the ball into the second start opening is the pass / fail decision based on the entrance into the first start port (the first special symbol hit / fail The player is more likely to be a big hit (a large amount of obtainable profits) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process regarding the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is in five stages. In each of these stages, "Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO at S1151, YES at S1153), perform the special symbol 2 change process (S1154), and if "Special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO at S1151 and S1153, both YES at S1155) ), Special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) is performed, and if “special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (S1151, S1153, S1155 both NO, S1157 YES), special electric as a big hit game Performs the character processing 1 (S1108), if the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 all NO), special electric character processing as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. The special view 2 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success or failure determination, the special view 2 operation process has the special electric combination processing 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special view 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric symbol processing 1 (S1108) is common to the special view 1 operation processing (S206) and the special view 2 operation processing (S211), and the special electric symbol processing 2 (S1109) is: The special figure 2 operation process (S211) is a process only. This is that although the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, the jackpot game and the first according to the first special symbol 2 because it is not possible to execute in parallel with the big hit game pertaining to the special symbol (only one of them can be executed). In addition, although a small hit is not included in the result of the first special symbol equivalence determination in the present embodiment, as another aspect, a small hit may be included in the result of the first special symbol equivalence determination. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game according to the first special symbol and the small hit game according to the second special symbol can not be performed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 success or failure judgment processing]
In the special figure 2 acceptance determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32, the process is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 acceptance determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, it is in the lowermost area (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one in the second special view reservation) of the second special view reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM. The special symbol pass / fail judgment random number counter value (label -TRND-A) stored is read out. In addition, because it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then, in S1305, the second special symbol equivalence judgment It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the processing is ended. The other processing is the same as that of the special view 1 yes / no determination processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, the detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the field corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) To select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, since the small special variation is determined to be the result of the second special symbol suitability determination, if it is determined that the small variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hitting table according to the gaming state.

  In addition, in the state B and the state C, the game is played with the variable display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol pass / fail judgment) as the main. Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation patterns of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played with the variable display of the first special symbol (the first special symbol success or failure judgment) as a main component. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern of a relatively long time. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is made simple (there are few types and a short time).

  After the variation pattern is selected in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), the other process (S1404) is performed to complete this process. In the other processing (S1404), a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern designation command is included in a fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special view storage unit 85b is shifted downward by one (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special view storage unit 85 b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special view hold (when the upper limit number is stored) The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255) is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), while setting the special figure 2 operation status to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started Do.

[Process during special symbol 2 change]
The special symbol 2 during fluctuation processing (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the processing (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 during fluctuation processing (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, the detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 change interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processes (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, the detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 finalization process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, the detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) is the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit variation flag Although the processing when it is determined that it is ON is different, it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric role processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric symbol processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric role processing 1 (S1108), first, a big hit game start processing to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process shifts to the processing of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is then determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots the game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is displayed on the big hit symbol and the decision is stopped and displayed as a big hit, the game ball is passed to the start gate, the big hit start flag is turned ON, and the big hit game progresses (round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the jackpot, the gaming machine is maintained in the jackpot standby state in which the jackpot can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take rest breaks such as a toilet, a drink and a telephone. Then, after the end of the break, the game ball can be fired at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the start gate 29 can pass the game ball, whereby the big hit game can be progressed. In addition, the big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) in the big hit game is all finished (big hit game is finished).

  When it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), it is then determined whether the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), not open (No at S2104), whether it is time to open the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, it is time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round Alternatively, it is determined whether it is time to start the next round (the next release) after the time interval between the rounds has passed (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the special winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process is ended. Thereby, the first large winning opening 30 is opened in accordance with the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of the big hit.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the maximum number of entering the special winning opening in the round is prescribed (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether it has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the number of entered balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is determined whether it is time to close the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30), ie, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the release of the key (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the predetermined number of balls entered (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is established, processing for closing the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the processing is ended to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the big hit ending command is set as the big hit end processing for ending the big hit game (S2116), the big hit ending period. Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is finished. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), it is determined whether the big hit ending period has elapsed (S2119) because the final round is finished. If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the gaming state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122) Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), the special view operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described. In the big hit game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether the big hit start flag is ON or not (S2151), it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state If (YES at S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES at S2152), the probability change flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transfer to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is set OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the big hit game, in order to control the low probability state and the low base state, the definite change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the big hit game (round game).

  If it is determined in S2152 that the positive variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the positive variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and when it is determined that the start gate has been passed (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (a round game is opened) The big hit start flag is turned ON (S2157), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the start gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. Thus, the gaming machine continues to be in the big hit standby state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the processing ends. Thus, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at any timing.

[Playing state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described. In the gaming state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time relates to a probability variation big hit (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are used as the big hit, and in S2201, the big hit game It is determined whether or not one of these five types is applicable. Then, if it is determined that the end of this time is the probability variation big hit (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the terminated big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203) . If it is determined in S2203 that the big hit game finished is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), "50" is set in the state B counter (S2205), and the process is performed Finish. As a result, after the end of the big hit game, a maximum of 50 high base states are set, and a high probability high base state is obtained.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the big hit game finished is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether the big hit game finished is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the big hit game finished is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is performed Finish. As a result, after the end of the big hit game, a maximum of 100 high base states are set, and a high probability high base state is obtained. If it is determined in S2209 that the terminated big hit game is not 2R sixth big hit, that is, 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. Leave the process. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes the high probability low base state.

  If it is determined in S2201 that the termination is not a definite big hit, that is, a low probability big hit (low probability big hit, usually a big hit) (NO in S2201), then the finished big hit game is the 2R seventh big hit Is determined (S2206). If it is determined in S2206 that the big hit game finished is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), "100" is set in the state B counter (S2208), and the process is performed Finish. As a result, after the end of the big hit game, a maximum of 100 high base states are set, and a low probability high base state is obtained. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the terminated big hit game is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state “50” is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is finished. As a result, after the end of the big hit game, a maximum of 50 high base states are set, and a low probability high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, special view operation status setting processing 1 (S2122) will be described using FIG. Special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) First, it is determined whether special figure 1 big hit flag is ON or not (S3001), special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game which occurred this time is special symbol When it is determined that it is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special view 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special view 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time relates to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 And the special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operational status is set to 1 (S3005), it ends processing. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric role processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric symbol processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In special electric combination processing 2 (S1109), it is determined first whether the small hitting end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) is all finished in the small hitting game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is determined whether it is time to open the special winning opening (second large winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has elapsed It is determined whether it is time to start the first opening operation, or it is time to start the next opening operation after the interval time between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303) . As for the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the fixed stop of the small hit symbol. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the jackpot game by the start gate, but can not arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the opening time of the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the second large winning opening 35 is opened according to the small hitting opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304), processing Finish. When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether the number obtained by adding all the game balls entered in the opening operation has reached a prescribed maximum number of balls entered (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the number of entered balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, after the special winning opening has been opened It is determined whether the open time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the opening operation of six times has reached the specified number of entering balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second big winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter 1 is decremented (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit release counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit open counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the processing is ended as it is to start the next open operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit open counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, the small hitting ending command is set (S2311), the small hitting ending period is started (S2312), and the small hitting end flag is set (S2313) as the small hitting finish processing for ending the small hitting game. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the opening of the big winning opening is made six times.

  If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), six opening operations have ended (or, a prescribed number of gaming balls have entered), so It is determined whether the small hitting ending time has elapsed (S2315), and when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hitting end flag is turned OFF (S2316), special drawing operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is ended. In the high probability low base state, by generating a small hit game, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the holding balls, to enhance the game interest. In addition, at the start of the small hit game, the positive change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, special view operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be described using FIG. In the special view operation status setting process 2 (S2317), it is first determined whether the special view 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), the special view 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the small hit game generated this time relates to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 And the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holding ball processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a holding ball number process (S209) next to the special view 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the holding ball number process (S209), first, the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number and the normal symbol holding ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Then, the data of the number of holding balls (the holding ball number command for transmitting the holding ball number information to the sub control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is finished.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) next to the number-of-held-balls process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, the presence / absence of the input of the power-off signal is determined (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power-off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is a definite change, whether or not a hit is being played, Data concerning the remaining number of times of fluctuation etc. is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared to the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And have a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol acceptance determination (first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”) A high probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on the jackpot symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode" and stopped and displayed), and a high probability state (a predetermined condition established) is established ( Benefits are to be ended.

  The process (gaming state setting process (S2121)) for giving the high probability state (benefit) can also be referred to as "benefit giving means". In addition, since the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the variable display and the stop display are performed to show the same result of the judgment of success or failure. , "Stop displaying special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) with big hit symbols" can be replaced with "stop displaying with the hit design symbols (specific display mode)" .

[Sub control main process]
Next, an operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (a control process by the sub control unit 90) will be described based on FIGS. The counter, the flag, the status, the buffer, the timer and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 included in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes a program of sub control main processing shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), setting of stack, setting of constant, setting of CPU 92, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time) and the like, various flags, reset of status and counter, etc. are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control substrate 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the content of the RAM is not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses and counter values are reset. The steps S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. Further, in the first embodiment, also in the effect control microcomputer 91, the same process as the power off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, data related to effect control at the time of power failure such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, unless the initialization of the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4003) is performed at the time of power on (at the time of power failure recovery) after recovery from power failure such as power failure, effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 State returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, the interrupt is inhibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For the random number for effect determination, the random number for change effect determination for determining the aspect (variation effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for advance announcement effect determination for determining the advance effect, the effect pattern determination for determining the effect pattern There are random numbers etc. The method of updating the random number can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. In addition, when updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added two by two instead of one by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) for notifying that there is a starting ball entry from the main control board 80 is transmitted, or a control signal for notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be set as, for example, when a change start command is transmitted, or when determining a change effect pattern to be described later. The storage place of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are compared with the image control board 100, the voice control board 106 and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board | substrate which becomes the corresponding command transmission destination among the board | substrates 107. FIG. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses the various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decoration member 14 etc.) according to the received command to perform various effects (Demonstration symbol game effect, a special game effect concerning a hit game, etc.) is executed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the reception interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is possible. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like performed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Also, lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, audio output control from the speaker, and the like can be performed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described using FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91 or not It is determined (S4101). When it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is ended. . The reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed prior to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described using FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) And drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described using FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a reception command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch status acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch status acquisition processing A switch process is performed to set the display content etc. of the display screen 7a based on the data (S4304). Thereafter, other processing such as preparation of lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) or updating of the effect determination random number is executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described using FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not the start entry ball command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and it is determined that the start entry ball command has not been received (NO in S4401) When it is determined that the start entering ball command has been received (YES in S4401), effect hold information storage processing (S4402) is performed, and the processing proceeds to S4403. The effect pending information storage process (S4402) is a variety of information (pre-judgment results, big hit type determination for random) included in the start entry ball command (special figure 1 start entry ball command or special view 2 start entry ball command) received in S4401. Game information such as numerical value and fluctuation pattern random number value) according to the special symbol holding number of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol) and start / stop command (when command is generated) In the shift memory format, it is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub control board 90. For example, if the received start entry ball command is a special view 1 start entry ball command corresponding to the number of holding balls “4” of the special figure 1, the prior determination result or hit type included in the special view 1 start entry ball command And the like are stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in an area corresponding to the number of hold 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect suspension information stored in this manner is used to execute various effects such as a fluctuation effect, an advance notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The stored contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special view hold storage unit (first special view hold storage unit, second special view in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. This matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the pending storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect suspension information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also "acquired information storage means".

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), fluctuation presentation start processing (described later) S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the change start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the change effect start process. At S4405, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is judged that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES at S4405), the effect pattern is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process of ending is performed (S4406). In the fluctuation effect end process (S4406), a fluctuation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect pattern 8 and ending the fluctuation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variation rendering end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the variation pattern 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to be varied. The stop display is made to end the fluctuation effect (render symbol game effect). On the other hand, when it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect end process. In addition, a fluctuation production refers to the various productions performed according to the fluctuation display of a special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing a hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of a big hit game (occurrence of a big hit) Opening command sent on the occasion of the round, round start command sent on the start of the round, round end command sent on the end of the round, ending command sent on the end of the big hit game, the first winning prize in the round game The 1st big winning a prize entrance entering command transmitted based on entering a ball to 30 and the 2nd big winning a prize entrance entering ball command etc. sent based on entering a second big winning opening in a small hit game correspond . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these big hit gaming related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) The processing pertaining to the execution of effects (big hit game effects, small hit game effects) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command specifying an opening effect according to the type of big hit specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command A round effect command for designating a round effect according to a round specified based on is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending for designating an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the rendering command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a large winning a prize entry command (first large winning a prize entrance command, a second large winning a prize entrance command), a special winning opening specified based on the command (first large winning entry An entry effect command for specifying an entry effect according to entry into the mouth 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands relating to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs opening effect or round according to the progress of the hitting game. The effect, the ball entering effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed to end the present process. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Change production start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the change production start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the variation production start process (S4402), first, a production determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various production determination random numbers such as a variation production determination random number, a notice production determination random number, and a production pattern determination random number. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), an aspect of the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) to be executed, an aspect of the advance effect effect (including the presence or absence of the advance effect effect), an effect pattern to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The change start command includes a change pattern specification command (information specifying a change pattern) for specifying a change pattern selected in the change pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the gaming state information specifying the current gaming state, the first special symbol judgment or the second special symbol judgment The result, the symbol information etc which designates the big hit classification etc are included (see Figure 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and the one corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, a production symbol game effect that is started this time It becomes possible to determine whether (the variation display of the effect pattern) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The fluctuation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information and the like can also be used in other processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to effect modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to effect mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to effect mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status "4" The mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E, corresponding to the effect mode D. It is possible to identify the current rendering mode by referring to the current mode status.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of effect based on the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, part or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the advance effect or the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.), appearing characters, items, background images, etc. It will be different. In addition, the production design game production can also be executed in a mode according to the production mode, and in the case of providing a plurality of game effects (such as advance notice effect or reach effect), it is possible to execute different game effects depending on the production mode It can be done. In this embodiment, the rendering modes A and B are executed when the low probability low base state is controlled, and the rendering modes C and D are executed when the high probability low base state is controlled, the presentation mode E Is executed when controlled to the low probability high base state and when controlled to the high probability high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player checks the effect mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, it is difficult to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-informing mode.

  Next, in S4504, the pattern of variation effects (variation effect pattern, effect pattern, controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90, which is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decoration member 14 and the like A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a game effect) and a notice effect determination table are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (the current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variation production pattern determination tables, and a plurality of advance presentation performance determination tables are provided, and based thereon, a predetermined variation production pattern determination table and a preliminary presentation performance determination table are set based on the gaming state (render mode) Do. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information designated by the received fluctuation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), a fluctuation presentation pattern determination table is used when a big hit corresponding to the current rendering mode A fluctuation presentation pattern determination table and a notice presentation determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (such as the variation pattern of the effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect, and a plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables (corresponding to the effect mode (mode status)) (Not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current rendering mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set out of the variation rendering pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random number for fluctuation presentation determination obtained in S4501 and the fluctuation performance pattern determination table set in S4504, a fluctuation performance pattern that matches the designated fluctuation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation aspect of the effect pattern 8 mainly displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (an execution aspect of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect symbol game effect, in the case of executing reach effect (reach effect effect symbol game effect) or in the case of executing character effect performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), reach effect or character When the effect is not executed (reach no effect pattern game effect) or the like is determined. In addition, with the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol equality determination indicates a big hit, all of the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are identical (Zoro eyes) Stop indication (temporary stop indication) with the symbol (the same effect pattern) in which two out of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R constitute the big hit mode when providing the following aspects (big hit aspect, specific aspect) Whether or not the remaining one rendering symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three same rendering symbols) that complete the big hit mode in a state where the remaining one is continuing the variable display (scroll display) It refers to the effect that shows. At this time, the game effect is executed using the predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect pattern, and whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose whether or not the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode It is also possible to show by the rendition of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot and to enhance the game interest.

  Further, in S4505, based on the random number for effect symbol determination acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") to be stopped is determined and set. The effect pattern 8 displayed as a stop as a result of the effect pattern game effect is the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment, and in the case of the reach presence or absence, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" At least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is another one when one of the production symbols is different from the other production symbols and the reach is out of reach It is considered to be a barrage eye that the production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed along with the fluctuation effect pattern (rendering symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, including the notice effect which is executed this also called production design game effect. This advance effect shows the possibility (during the variation display of the effect symbol) before the effect symbol is in the stop indication (confirmation stop indication) the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect in execution will be displayed in the big hit mode. It is an announcement effect). In S4506, based on the random number for advance announcement effect determination obtained in S4501 and the advance announcement effect determination table set in S4504, an advance announcement effect conforming to the designated fluctuation pattern and the determined fluctuation effect pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variation effect start command for starting the effect pattern game effect etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), end the fluctuation production start processing. When the change effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines a change effect pattern specified based on the change effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern set in step is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the fluctuation effect or the like by the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the variable display (flashing display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production pattern game production effect]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect pattern game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect pattern 8, a effect pattern game effect (change effect) is configured.

  In principle, the variable display of the production symbol 8 scrolls the symbols vertically in the order (ascending order) of “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” Vertical scrolling is performed, and when “9” is reached, the process returns to “1” again to repeat vertical scrolling. The mode of the fluctuation display of such an effect pattern 8 is defined by the fluctuation production pattern stored in the above-mentioned fluctuation production pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to vertical scrolling, various forms of variable display, such as horizontal scroll display (horizontal scroll) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched without scrolling It is possible to provide an aspect as a fluctuation presentation pattern. Moreover, it is also possible to provide an aspect in which the symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the mode of the variable display depending on the effect mode or the game state.

  In addition, fluctuation display of production design 8 is done according to fluctuation time which becomes settled with fluctuation pattern of special design, it stops fluctuation display with the elapse of fluctuation time, but when stopping fluctuation display with this execution example As a mode, it has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns). Specifically, as the main stop mode, the stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the symbols (1) effect symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol) and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) in which middle symbol → right symbol ”and (2) stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is“ left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol ” Stop mode (also referred to as “second stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are approximately the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”) and (2) “second stop mode” And (4) there is a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped thereafter. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect pattern game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S 4505 determines which stop mode the variable display is to stop in It has become a thing. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation production pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process selection / determination (setting) of the variation production pattern and selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The first stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as the "first stop symbol", and the second stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as the "second stop symbol", and the third stop order is the stop symbol. Is also referred to as the "third stop symbol" or the "final stop symbol".

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), mainly in the effect mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is “small This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is performed based on the fact that it is a hit.

  The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) is (1) Mainly in (1) effect mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment is "out" or "big hit" When the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed based on the fact that (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol equality determination is "out of line" or "big hit" When the fluctuation display of the production design 8 is performed in the fluctuation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach fluctuation") or in the fluctuation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal fluctuation"), and (3) effect mode C, In the D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol equality determination being "displacement" or "big hit" In the stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display That.

  The third stop mode (all symbol simultaneous stop) is mainly under (1) the situation where the function of the shortening fluctuation according to the number of special figure holding balls works at the time of the start of the movement in the effect mode A, B (state A) When the special figure 1 reservation ball number of is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment becomes "displaced", and the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed by normal fluctuation based on this , (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed in the normal change based on the result of the second special symbol equality determination being "out of place" or "small hit" In the case (3) when in the effect mode C, D (state C), the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed by normal change based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is "off", And (4) in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  The fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) mainly means that the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment is "outside" or "big hit" when in presentation mode D (state C) This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is performed based on the reach fluctuation based on the change display.

  As described above, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 may be provided in accordance with the effect mode (playing state) or the mode of the variable display based on the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment, the result (stop display mode) Therefore, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the situation of the game. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 stops, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to guess the kind of special game which can be performed, the execution existence, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to feel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

  In addition to the above-described first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop mode in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect pattern 8 is "right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol" (fifth stop mode And various stop modes such as the stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same and the right symbol is stopped thereafter, and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the aspect is implemented are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be defined variously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the rendering symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect mode A, B), “7” of the odd symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and other odd symbols “1”, “3” , “5” and “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue” It is also referred to as "design". On the other hand, in the states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), the odd symbols “3”, “5” and “7” are red symbols, and the other odd symbols “1” and “9” Is a green symbol, and even symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols.

  The correspondence relationship between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be taken, and the kind of color is not limited to the present embodiment. Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it is also possible to determine by an element other than the color. For example, with a type of character when a character is attached to a production symbol, a numeric symbol when it has a production symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to a production symbol (number symbol) representing a number The character type may be determined by the character pattern, or the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd number pattern and the even number pattern.

  The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above, The result of the variable display is informed. In the present embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the "full baraque eyes" ("124" etc.) where all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are different symbols ("124" etc.), and rendering symbols 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number) and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others. ) Is a mode (non-specific mode) which does not become an execution opportunity of the hit game. On the other hand, "Zoro eyes" ("777" etc.) in which all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same are used as a big hit aspect (specific aspect) that triggers execution of 4 R or more big hit games (see Fig. 6). There is.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, "reach barrage eyes" among barrage eyes are also used as a 2R big hit mode which becomes an execution trigger of the 2R big hit game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the number of winning balls (winning balls number) that the player can obtain is smaller than that of the 2R big hit game, 4 R or larger big hit game (4R big hit game, 15R big hit game), or state C (high It is a special game that is a trigger for setting the state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball (small ball increase) in a small hit game as compared with the certain low base state). This is because the special game has a relatively low degree of advantage (amount of profit). In addition, among the loose eyes, "completely loose eyes" is also used as a small hit mode that is an opportunity to execute a small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in state B, since the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, the small winning large winning opening (the second winning port located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21) It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely (immediately close to zero) to be able to obtain a small hit profit (substantially equivalent to losing). Furthermore, among the loose eyes, the "specific loose eyes" described later is used as a small hit mode that is an execution trigger of a small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high probability low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific barrage order) is also referred to as the “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (Zoro order) is also referred to as the “second display mode”. Among the eyes), the reach barrage eye is also referred to as the "third display mode", and the out-of-the-round mode (complete barake eye, reach barrage eye) is also referred to as the "fourth display mode".

  In addition, since the state A (low probability and low base state) is a gaming state where it is basically based on playing a left-handed game, the first special symbol pass / fail determination (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Because it is rare that the second special symbol equivalence judgment (the second special symbol fluctuation display) is performed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol equivalence judgment under such circumstances is In the case where it is performed, the variable display of the corresponding design symbol 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and only the variable display (and the stop display) is performed by the display 102. There is. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high probability low base state) are gaming states basically based on the right-handed game, the second special symbol success or failure determination (second special) Such situation because it is rare that the variation display of the symbol is performed and the first special symbol judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed while the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. When the first special symbol equivalence determination is performed below, the variation display of the corresponding production symbol 8 is not performed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the presentation indicator 102 ( And stop display). However, when the special symbol right or wrong judgment against the current gaming state (left hit game, right hit game) is performed and the judgment result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit judgment in state C is And if one or more of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 display effects indicating the occurrence of the big hit Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the line is performed in parallel with the fluctuation display of the main special symbol. It becomes possible to inform the player that the result of the variation display of the special symbol to be played is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not notice the occurrence of the big hit, for example, stops the game and misses the opportunity of profit acquisition.

[State A game effect]
Next, a game effect to be performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is an effect pattern game effect (varying effect) performed in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol based mainly on the result of the first special symbol success or failure determination. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect of state A is performed under the situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, setting and transition of the rendering mode in the state A are automatically performed in accordance with a predetermined mode control condition under control of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for rendering control). . Therefore, the player can not be involved in setting of the effect mode in the state A.

  Moreover, in the state A, as the effect pattern 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "3" and "5" consisting of green symbols The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (pattern data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display 7. To be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54 under the effect mode and symbol type, when the change display of the effect pattern 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)), the change display is basically the second stop mode (Stop left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) and stop (Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and special figure 1 The shortening fluctuation according to the number of balls held When the function works (see FIG. 9 and S1707 in FIG. 24), the operation is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (render symbol 8L) and the right symbol (render symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is realized (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (render symbol 8C) changes display Reach production is performed by an image display device etc. until it stops. In the reach effect, an effect is developed that mainly indicates whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped with the same symbol as the symbol stopped earlier (whether or not the big hit mode is displayed). The same applies to the states B and C with regard to the reach establishment and the reach effect.

  In this way, when the variation pattern of the effect pattern 8 is performed, if the effect pattern 8 is displayed with the open side (completely open side or reach wide area) as a result of the variable display, it becomes "displaced". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 But, it changes to the big hit game production for 4R big hit concerning the 1st special symbol. And, when the big hit game concerned is something which relates to “4R 1st big hit”, the game state after the big hit game end becomes state C (high probability low base state), it relates to “4R 2nd big hit” If so, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes the state B (low probability high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[State B game effects]
Next, the game effect to be performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state B (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) will be described. The high probability high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in state C (high probability low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect pattern game effect (varying effect) performed in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol based mainly on the result of the second special symbol success or failure determination. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect of state B is performed under the situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting of the rendering mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed along with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer for effect control 91). Therefore, the player can not participate in setting of the effect mode E.

  Moreover, in the state B, as the effect pattern 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1" and "9" consisting of green symbols and red The symbols "3", "5" and "7" consisting of symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). The image control microcomputer 101 reads out the image data (pattern data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display 7. To be executed. In the present embodiment, the state (design) of the effect pattern 8 differs between the state A and the state B.

  As shown in FIG. 55 under the effect mode and symbol type, when the variation display of the presentation symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically the third stop mode It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because, in the state B, the second special symbol time short function and the high base generation function are activated, so it is possible to progress the game smoothly by absorbing the out-of-reach fluctuation and the small hitting fluctuation without reach in the shortest possible time It is for. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it is immediately apparent to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game), so that the player's sense of expectation I will not go to the house. On the other hand, when outlying fluctuation or big hit fluctuation (that is, "reach fluctuation") with reach is performed or "reach outlier fluctuation" (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach) which is actually normal fluctuation to seem to be reach fluctuation When being displayed, the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (e) f) see).

  In this way, when the variation pattern of the effect pattern 8 is performed, the effect pattern 8 is "off" when it is displayed as a result of the variation display as a result of the variation pattern (open eye). On the other hand, if the display pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a are cut into big hit game effects Instead, round effects etc. are performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit aspect of Zoro eyes in the state B relates to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", as a big hit game effect, 15R third A big hit game effect for 3 big hit or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hit is performed. And, the game state after the big hit game end becomes state C (high probability low base state) (see Figure 6).

  In addition, when the production design 8 is displayed with 2R big hit mode (reached open) as a result of fluctuation display, with the start of the big hit game, the display contents on the display screen 7a are cut to big hit game production for 2R big hit. It changes. And, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the gaming state after the big hit game ends becomes high probability high base state (state B), When the big hit game relates to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends becomes low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6) ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment in state B is a small hit, and the variation display of the rendering symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and is stopped in the third stop mode Ru. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect pattern 8 is displayed with a completely discolored eye (disappearing mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When it becomes a small hit in the state B, a small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a remain the same as the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed state), and a special hit during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equal to the removal. And, the game state after the small hitting game ends, state B remains as long as it does not overlap with the transition timing of the game state based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  In the low probability high base state which is the state B, the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without occurrence of a big hit. The game state transitions to state A (low probability low base state) when the variable display (outside fluctuation) of the predetermined number of times ends (stops), and the effect mode transitions from "E" to "A" or "B" Do. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without occurrence of a big hit in the high probability high base state which is the state B, The game state shifts to state C (high probability low base state) when the variable display (outside change) of the predetermined number of times ends (stops), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D" .

[State C game effects]
Next, a game effect to be performed when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high probability low base state) will be described. The game effect to be performed in the state C is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol equivalence determination, the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) to be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and small hit occurrence It is an effect (small hit game effect) accompanying. The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific game state) in which it is possible to expect many small balls to be won by the small hit in the large hit interval by frequently causing the small hit until the next big hit occurs. From this, in state C, it is decided to perform a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked. Details on this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the game effect of the state C is performed under the situation where a background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the rendering mode and the like in the state C is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) as in the above-mentioned state A and state B, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later The player can select the effect mode by operating the first effect button 63a, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. Moreover, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect pattern 8, the blue symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" and the green pattern "1", "9" The symbol “3”, “5” and “7” consisting of red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In the present embodiment, the modes (designs) of the effect pattern 8 are the same in the state B and the state C.

  Here, in "reproduction mode C" and "reproduction mode D" in state C, the contents (specification of presentation) of the game effect developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are largely different. . So, below, it divides into "production mode C" and "production mode D", and explains the game production in each production mode.

[Effect mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the effect mode C, the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect pattern 8 as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed facing each other. These characters are also displayed when the variable display of symbols is not performed. The ally character and the enemy character each have a plurality of types of characters, and one ally character (also referred to as "friend character") and one enemy character (also referred to as "enemy character") are included in effect mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a mode that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character receives an attack from the enemy character. Such effects by the character (character effect) is performed as a change effect based on the change effect pattern (when it is performed along with the change display of the identification information) and when the result of the change display is a small hit, a small hit game There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (when it is performed with a special game after the end of the variable display).

  In the upper right part of the display screen 7a, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing a right-handed display is displayed, and in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a, the winning prize ball number (earned profit amount) is displayed. A winning ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of the present embodiment is composed of an image (numeric image) capable of displaying 5-digit numbers from "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt". The prize ball count image C1 mainly indicates the number of prize balls (winning balls number) earned by the player in the big hit game, the small hit game, etc., and the gaming state after the big hit game is the state B or the state If it is C, then it indicates the number of winning balls (so-called number of winning balls during the consecutive period) until the gaming state returns to state A (except during a big hit game) . In addition, since state C (high probability low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur (the small hit game execution frequency increases), the winning balls are earned (small balls increase) in small hit games. In order to produce an effect, it is decided to display a prize ball count image C1. That is, as the small hitting game effect, it is decided to perform the effect display (the ball entering effect) by the winning ball count image C1. Details of the effects accompanying the small hit occurrence will be described later.

  The basic flow of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8 in the effect mode C of such a screen configuration will be described using FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, partial display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol), right-handed pointing image M, background, and the like are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, since the second special symbol time-shortening function is activated, it is possible to digest the out-of-reach variation without reach in a short time as much as possible, and to advance the game smoothly. When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear for the player that there is no possibility to execute the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (a turning effect) for enhancing the player's sense of expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when reach change (out or big hit) or reach outlier change is performed, the change display of the effect pattern 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern) (FIG. 57 (FIG. c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In addition, when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol suitability determination being "small hit", the variation display of the production symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → Stop at the right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the variation pattern of the effect pattern 8 is performed, the effect pattern 8 is "off" when it is displayed as a result of the variation display as a result of the variation pattern (open eye). On the other hand, if the display pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a are cut into big hit game effects Instead, round effects etc. are performed according to the progress of the big hit game. Since the big hit game when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit aspect of Zoro eyes in state C is because it relates to "15R third big hit" or "4R fourth big hit", in this case, for 15R third big hit A big hit game effect for a big hit game effect or 4R fourth big hit is performed. And, the game state after the big hit game end becomes state C (high probability low base state) (see Figure 6).

  In addition, when the production design 8 is displayed with 2R big hit mode (reached open) as a result of fluctuation display, with the start of the big hit game, the display contents on the display screen 7a are cut to big hit game production for 2R big hit. It changes. In this case, as a big hit game effect, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display of the contents showing the end of the advantageous state where the small hit frequently occurs, is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. And, when the big hit game started is related to "2R fifth big hit" or "2R sixth big hit", the gaming state after the big hit game ends becomes high probability high base state (state B), When the big hit game relates to "2R seventh big hit" or "2R eighth big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends becomes low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6) ).

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol equality judgment is a small hit in the effect mode C (state C), and the change display of the effect pattern 8 based on this is performed, the change display is performed with the normal change and the first It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect pattern 8 is displayed with a specific loose eye (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols among the three symbols are the same and the remaining one is different ("335", "355") , “557”, etc., as the specific loose eye (small hit form). Although the symbol combination which constitutes a specific loose eye pattern (small hitting form) does not become reach establishment, because adjacent two symbols constitute the combination which becomes the same symbol (number), it is such a symbol combination Is also called "reach arrangement".

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up the specific loose eye (the first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute the specific loose eye in state A Although it is a green symbol (the first symbol type) which can not be done, in the state C, it is a red symbol (the second symbol type) which can constitute a specific loose mesh (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the game state. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the symbol type (in this example, the type of color in this example) of the effect pattern, and to attract interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) to be green symbols in the state A are selected in the state C, and the specific scattered eyes (the first one) Although it is considered as a red symbol which can constitute display mode, for example, a part of the effect symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) to be blue symbols in state A is made red symbols. Or, the effect design ("2", "4", "6", "8") that is blue in state A and the effect design ("1", "3", "5") that is green It is also possible to make part of each of “9” and “9” (eg “4” and “5”) into a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C which does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific scattered particle (first display mode) may be configured by a symbol belonging to this dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) may be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect pattern that is a green symbol in the state A may be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to further highlight the symbol types that can constitute the specific loose eye, and to make it easy to attract the attention of the player. Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are green symbols (the first symbol type) in state A, are red symbols (the second symbol type) in state C, but in this case In the state A, the symbol “7”, which has been a red symbol (the second symbol type) from the beginning, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5", which are red symbols (the second symbol type), are used as symbols that can constitute a specific loose eye, and the symbol "7" is the gold symbol (the third symbol type). Can be made into a 15R big hit aspect (Zorome of "7") corresponding to 15 R 3rd big hit among big hits. In this way, the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific loose eye (small hit form) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific zoroid (15 R big hit aspect) can be clearly distinguished, It becomes possible to show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the first stop mode (left symbol → which can not appear in other effect modes) at the time of derivation display (stop of fluctuation display) of the small hitting mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C. In the middle symbol → the right symbol stop order), the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is to be stopped. Therefore, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) but also the stop mode of the variable display, which is the trigger for the small hit mode to be displayed, attracts the player's attention. Furthermore, in the effect mode C, effect display is performed to emphasize the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) at the time of the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the fluctuation display). Specifically, a line image extending laterally (horizontally) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red pattern) constituting the small hit mode, and the circumference of each pattern An effect image E (rendering effect image) is displayed, which is composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating the image. This makes it possible to highlight and display the small hit mode display (small hit game being executed) when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effects of The mode of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other modes can be adopted.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game which is executed triggered by the display of the small hit aspect, the winning ball indicated by the winning ball count image C1 for each ball entered The number (numeric image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, since the winning balls based on entering the second big winning opening 35 are considered to be 10 winning balls for one entering ball, the winning prize indicated by the winning ball count image C1 The number of balls is added in units of ten. Furthermore, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the friend character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a along with the execution of the small hit game. It is assumed that the effect display (character effect) by the second character is performed. Specifically, the effect display (also referred to as the "first effect") is performed in which one of the friend character and the enemy character (for example, the friend character) attacks or plays an attack on the other (for example, the enemy character). And The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include the later-described battle effect depicting the confrontation scene of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small hit large winning opening (second large winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hit game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character effect and the character effect to be performed as the fluctuation effect described later have relevance to each other, and from the fluctuation display During the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity between the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the additional display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanied by the small hit is a sub-second large winning prize entry ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. The character effect display according to the small hit is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, based on the small control opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 being received by the sub control unit 90. Since being performed, these effects all correspond to small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). The effect of additionally displaying the number of winning balls (the amount of obtained profit) indicated by the winning ball count image C1 is also referred to as "first profit effect".

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect pattern 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red pattern) occur with high frequency, and accordingly the small hit game The addition display of the award ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed with high frequency, so the cooperation between the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) and the small hit game effect strongly generates a small hit to the player. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for winning a prize ball (increase in holding balls) by frequent occurrences of small hits, and to enhance the fun of the presentation mode C (state C). In addition, the character effect display accompanied by the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second big winning opening entrance ball command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character effect is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the ball entering the second large winning opening 35 when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 It becomes possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, the contents (representation mode) of the effect display in the case where the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach overrun fluctuation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, with the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, the effect pattern game effect (variation display of the effect pattern 8, etc. ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (a)). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (out or big hit) is performed, and when the reach overturn fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (Refer to FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the fluctuation display of the production design 8 is started based on the fluctuation presentation pattern of the reach fluctuation or the out-of-reach fluctuation, then the left design (production design 8L) is stopped first according to the second stop mode. However, when the left symbol (the first stop symbol) is stopped, the effect display depicting a scene in which either the friend character or the enemy character displayed in the background mounts an attack on the other party (see FIG. 57C). (First effect) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (render symbol 8R, the second stop symbol) is stopped. The first effect is roughly divided into a pattern in which an ally character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an ally character (" There are two patterns (also referred to as “first effect pattern B”), and further, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns each defining the content (type) of the attack to be set and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is suggested that information (big hit reliability, details of effects that can be executed later, etc.) relating to the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) by the effect contents when the first effect is performed. It is assumed that (preliminary) will be made. The first effect is an effect in which one of the ally character and the enemy character ends with an attack on the other, and does not include the battle effect described later.

  For example, if the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as the "first effect pattern") is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which the ally character starts attacking), at least the 2R big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the variable display. In other words, it indicates that there is no big hit as an opportunity to end state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur. In this case, in the change, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed appearance (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach out-of-range fluctuation), but although the reach formation has been developed to reach production, finally the middle symbol stops with a symbol different from the left and right symbols and the representation symbol 8 is displayed in reach reach (outlying manner) (Rich out-of-reach fluctuation) or, after the reach effect, the effect pattern 8 is displayed in Zoro eyes (big hit mode) (big hit fluctuation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (pattern in which the enemy character attacks) opposite to that, the 2R big hit mode which becomes an end trigger of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, in the change, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without reaching reach, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed appearance (disengagement mode). Ruka (reach out-of-range fluctuation), but although the reach formation has been developed to reach production, the middle symbol finally stops with a symbol different from the left and right symbols and the representation symbol 8 is in the reach open area (outside mode or 2R big hit mode) Whether it is displayed (reach out fluctuation or 2R big hit fluctuation), or, after the reach effect, the production design 8 is displayed in Zoro eyes (big hit mode) (big hit fluctuation). In this way, the first development performed by stopping the left symbol (the first stop symbol) causes the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether the reach is established, whether the development is advantageous for the player, etc.) It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous for the player to be developed later than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of patterns according to the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided what to do.

  In this way, after the left symbol (production symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after execution of the first effect), the right symbol (production symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. When the right symbol to stop at the moment becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, reach will not be established, and then the middle symbol (render symbol 8C, third stop symbol) will stop and the variation display will end, and the symbol symbol 8 is It is displayed with a completely loose eye (outside manner). In this case, the change is a out-of-reach change (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol stopped following the left symbol is the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, reach will be established. At this point, the change is called reach change (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. For the second effect, after reach is established (after the first effect is executed), the effect (characters friendly, enemy characters) performed with the middle symbol (render symbol 8C, third stop symbol) still fluctuating In the present embodiment, it is performed as a battle effect that depicts a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that has been displayed as a background. In this second effect (battle effect), if roughly classified, a pattern in which the ally character wins the confrontation (also referred to as “second effect pattern A”) and a pattern in which the ally character loses the confrontation (battle) There are three patterns (also referred to as “second effect pattern B”) and a pattern that ends the battle (a battle called “second effect pattern C”) without determination of victory or defeat. There are a plurality of patterns that define the type of character, which of the ally character and the enemy character attack first (type of character to be attacked first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (big hit reliability etc.) concerning the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) by the contents of the effect when the second effect (battle effect) is performed. There is.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as "second effect patterns"), the allied character makes a first strike attack on the second effect pattern A (allied victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins first, and a pattern in which the teammate character finally wins. In addition, in the second effect pattern B (friend-losing pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the friend-character defeats. Furthermore, in the second effect pattern C (a winning and losing pattern), a pattern in which an ally character makes a first strike but the enemy character takes the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character resists the attack There is. The second effects (battle effects) based on these second effect patterns will all start from the first strike of the allied characters or enemy characters, and the contents of the effects until the confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear A scene etc.) is predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variation effect pattern, and the second effect (a battle (a battle) of any of a plurality of types of patterns is made according to the variation effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided what to do.

  In the present embodiment, if the reach change in the effect mode C is performed as a big hit change based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol equivalence determination is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit), that is, the change When the effect pattern 8 is displayed as a result of the display in Zoro eyes (big hit mode), before the display of the big hit mode (before derived display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (allied victory pattern) Production is performed. In this case, a big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state C (high probability low base state) again after the big hit game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) where the small hit frequently occurs again after the big hit game. As described above, since the player can continue playing the game in the state C after the big hit game, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the ally characters win.

  Also, when reach change in the effect mode C is performed as out-of-out change (reach out-of-out change) based on the result of the second special symbol suitability determination being deviated, that is, as the result of the change display When it is displayed by the eyes (displacement mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (the winning and losing undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the deviation mode (before the derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the stop of the variable display (after the display of the deviation mode). As described above, since the game in the state C continues, the second effect pattern C is a pattern for ending the confrontation (battle) without determination of the outcome.

  Furthermore, if the reach change in the production mode C is performed as a 2R big hit change based on the result of the second special symbol suitability determination being a 2R big hit (any of 2R 5th to 8th big hits), ie, a change When the effect pattern 8 is displayed as a reach open pattern (2R big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derived display), a second effect based on the second effect pattern B (friendly loss pattern) (Battle production) will be performed. In this case, a big hit game of 2R is performed after the change display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes state B (high base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur is ended with the occurrence of the 2R big hit. As described above, since the gaming state is shifted from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the allied character loses.

  Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the contents in which the ally character makes a first strike are the second effect pattern A (allied victory pattern) and the second effect pattern C (comprehensive or lost pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, battle rendition (second rendition) is started, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle rendition is the first strike of the ally character If one starts from an attack, then it can be inferred at the moment that there is at least the possibility of a 2R big hit, ie the possibility of the termination of state C. On the other hand, in the pattern including the contents in which the enemy character makes a first strike, all of the second effect patterns A to C correspond (see FIG. 64A), and the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If a battle rendition (second rendition) is started after establishment and the confrontation (battle) in the battle rendition starts from the first strike of the enemy character, the possibility of 2R big hit at that time (possible termination of state C Gender) can not be excluded. Then, after the first strike of the enemy character, when the ally character is defeated and the battle rendition is finished, the pattern of the battle rendition (second rendition) is the second rendition pattern B, so the variation is 2R big hit As a result, the game in state C ends. On the other hand, when the teammate character finally wins after the first strike of the enemy character and the battle effect is ended, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A, The change is a big hit change of 15R or 4R, and when the battle character is ended by ally character attacking the first strike of the enemy character, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern C. As a result, the change is an out-of-order fluctuation, and in any of these cases, the game in state C can continue to be performed. As described above, in the reach change in the production mode C, by performing the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur is continued (winning, undecided) ) It is possible to obtain a stage effect that stirs the player's expectation and anxiety, such as whether to do or to end (defeat). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the fluctuation effect (character effect) from the first effect to the second effect (battle effect), and it is possible to enhance the game interest of the effect mode C (state C) It becomes.

[Demonstration mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the effect mode D, the effect pattern 8 is at the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a smaller size (reduced size) as compared to other effect modes such as the effect mode C. It is displayed (also referred to as “reduced display”), and a main image X imitating a fighter is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D which takes such a screen configuration, usually, while performing the change display of the effect pattern 8 at the upper right of the screen, the effect display showing mainly the situation that the fighter is flying is developed on the display screen 7a It has become a thing. Then, when reach change is performed, the rendering pattern 8 is largely displayed in the approximate center of the screen as in the above-described effect mode C, and after reaching the reach, a predetermined reach effect (development effect etc.) is substantially the entire display screen It is made useable and possible. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but it is also possible to display an image having a motif other than this as the main effect image. It is possible. Further, in the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, the right-handed instruction image M and the winning ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8 in the effect mode D of such a screen configuration will be described using FIG. In addition, also in FIG. 58, for convenience of explanation, a part of display contents such as effect hold (hold symbol) is omitted. First, in the effect mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is usually displayed. This moving image is also displayed when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. When the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal change (out or small hit) It is stopped (see FIG. 58 (b)). The reason for stopping in the third stopping mode is the same as the effect mode C described above. In addition, in the effect mode D, the mode of the variable display in the case where the variable display of the design symbol 8 is performed at the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are switched sequentially without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out or big hit) or the reach out fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect pattern 8 which has been displayed small in the upper right of the screen (reduced display) is displayed The screen 7a is largely displayed at the center of the screen 7a, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58C). After that, the variable display of the production symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). In addition, when the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (left / right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect pattern 8 is largely displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. At the timing, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped substantially simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be variably displayed (scroll display).

  In this way, when the variation pattern of the effect pattern 8 is performed, the effect pattern 8 is "off" when it is displayed as a result of the variation display as a result of the variation pattern (open eye). On the other hand, 4R or 15R big hit game is executable when the display pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) as a result of the variable display, and 2R big hit game is executable when displayed in the 2R big hit mode (reach open) It becomes. The effects during the big hit game and the gaming state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, so the detailed description is omitted here.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol equality judgment is the small hit in the effect mode D (state C), and the fluctuation display (small hitting fluctuation) of the production symbol 8 based on this is performed, the fluctuation display is in the upper right of the screen It is performed by normal fluctuation and is stopped by the 3rd stop mode (simultaneous stop) (refer to Drawing 58 (b)). At this time, as the result of the variable display, the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a specific loose-eye pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the variation display accompanying a small hit is stopped in the first stop mode which can not appear in other effect modes, or the effect image E (rendering effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop, etc. , The display of the effect pattern 8 was mainly shown to emphasize the occurrence of small hits. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, by displaying the effect pattern 8 at the upper right of the display screen 7a with a specific loose eye (small hit mode), the notification of the occurrence of the small hit by the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is considerable Although it is supposed to be performed in an inconspicuous mode, at that time, it is possible to display another effect image different from the effect pattern 8, and the player may indicate (notice) the occurrence of a small hit by the display of the effect image. It is assumed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y substantially at the center of the display screen 7a as the small hitting fluctuation starts. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second large winning opening 35 in one small hit game, and in the present embodiment, it is approximately 2 for one small hit game. Since it is designed (gauge configuration) that three to three game balls can enter the second big winning opening 35, corresponding to this, three target images Y are displayed. The display of the target image Y is based on the fluctuation effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect pattern game effect), and the fluctuation effect pattern including the display of the target image Y in S4505 described above (small for the effect mode D When the hit variation representation pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed upon execution of the variation representation. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can estimate that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, it can be said that the target image Y is also a preview effect image for previewing the occurrence of a small hit. Note that the display of the target image Y may not be included in the variation rendering pattern, but may be included in the preview rendering pattern set in S4506 described above.

  And, when the small hit fluctuation (the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8) is stopped and the small hit mode ("355" etc.) is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning to be opened in the small hit game When the game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as "destruction effect") is performed (see FIG. 59 (b)) showing how the target image Y is destroyed for each ball entered. The destruction effect is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning entry ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to a small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect represents the destruction of the target image Y by the missile attack from the fighter (main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on entering the second big winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The presentation from the start of the small hit fluctuation to the small hit game is the basic effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D, but in addition to this, in the effect mode D, as the effect relating to the small hit, It is assumed that the effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called "prediction read effect" is performed. The reserved advance presentation effect (also referred to as “small hit advance presentation effect”) related to this small hit is realized by the small hit advance presentation process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, when the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) starts variable display (varying effect) of the effect pattern 8 in the effect mode D, it performs the small hit pre-reading effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, the small hit pre-reading effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed at the time of setting (S4505) of the change effect pattern in the above-mentioned change effect starting process (S4402).

  In small hit pre-reading effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C), and is specified During the period, special renditions are made for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), the present processing ends without performing the processing in S5002 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is held as a second special symbol hold currently stored (second special view hold). It is determined whether a hold (also referred to as "small hit hold") in which the determination result is a small hit is stored (S5002). This determination is performed with reference to the storage contents of the presentation suspension information (predetermined result etc.) stored in S4402 described above, that is, the storage contents of the presentation suspension information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub control board 90. It is determined whether there is a small hit suspension including the second special view suspension corresponding to the fluctuation display (also referred to as "the fluctuation") of the effect pattern 8 to be started from now (S5002). Incidentally, the small hit pending is also referred to as "specific acquisition information".

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit retention (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the processing ends without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit retention (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined (YES in S5002), it is determined whether small hits occur three or more times consecutively as a result of the variable display, including the fluctuation (variable display starting from now) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, including the second special view reservation corresponding to the change (S5003). This determination can also be performed with reference to the effect holding information (the storage content of the effect holding information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hit reservations are not continuously stored (NO in S5003), the present processing is ended without performing the processing in S5004 and subsequent steps. In this case, the small hit prefetching effect (small hit continuous notice) based on the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the change is a small hit change corresponding to a small hit retention, as described above, a change effect pattern including display of the target image Y is set as a change effect pattern related to the change, In the said fluctuation | variation (small hitting fluctuation), the fluctuation production accompanied by the display of a plurality (three in the present example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59A). That is, three target images Y may be displayed as an effect (the change advance notice) indicating the occurrence of a small hit in the change.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are stored continuously (YES in S5003), it is determined whether to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period in which a special effect is performed as an effect relating to a small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in a row, it is determined that a small hit is derived as a result of each of three or more consecutive variable displays. If it is (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) performs a start lottery for a specific period (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period, and the start lottery When the player is elected (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 is performed to start the specific period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specific period is satisfied if the two conditions of (1) three or more small hit retentions are continuously stored and (2) the winning lottery for the specific period is satisfied. Is started. That is, the two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions of the specific period.

  When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is set (S5007) . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit reservations determined in S5003 is set. In the present embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by one each time the fluctuation display (small hitting fluctuation) stops (ends) thereafter. In addition, the specific period flag is a flag indicating that it is in the specific period, mainly at the start of the fluctuation effect (S4404, S5001 etc.) and the second special view reservation occurrence (special figure 2 start entering ball command reception ) Is a flag that is referred to at the time of storage of effect suspension information based on (S4402) or the like. The specific period flag is turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero after it is turned on in S5006.

  In the present embodiment, small hit retention is stored continuously three or more (YES in S5003), and when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the small hit prefetched effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of a positive determination. In this way, when three or more small hit retentions are stored continuously, it is possible to provide a case where small hit pre-reading effects are performed and a case where they are not performed, so that diversification of effects can be achieved. Become.

  When the small hit advance effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variation effect start command for starting a small hit advance effect based on the set effect pattern along with the effect symbol game effect is displayed on the image control board 100. It is transmitted, and by this, a small hit advance read-out effect is started with the effect pattern game effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit pre-reading effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. 61, along with the start of the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 (first small change). The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is not displayed, and the characters “Continuous GET !!” are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  After that, a specific period display area T for displaying a winning ball count image C2 indicating the number of winning balls in a specific period along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” etc.) by stopping the variable display The second display section) appears on the left side on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numeric image) capable of displaying 3-digit numbers "000" to "999" and a character image of "pt". Then, every time one game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed in response to the display of the small hit mode, the number of award balls to be paid out to the one entered ball An award ball number image S showing 10 (in the present embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the display period T for a specific period (see FIG. 61C), and the number of award balls indicated by the award ball number image S is It is displayed in addition to the winning balls count image C2 (the number of winning winning balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). In addition, during the specified period, also when the game ball enters the 3rd starting opening 26 as well as the 2nd big winning opening 35, the winning a prize ball which is paid out for every entering the ball (every time you enter 1 ball) An award ball number image S indicating a number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the number of award balls indicated by the award ball number image S is an award ball count image It is displayed in addition to C2 (the number of winning balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). As a result, during the specific period, the display of the winning ball number image S and the addition display of the winning ball count image C2 become easy to be performed, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by these entering effects. The effect of additionally displaying the number of winning balls (the amount of obtained profit) indicated by the winning ball count image C2 is also referred to as "second profit effect".

  The display of the award ball number image S and the addition display of the award ball count image C2 are transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the third starting opening sensor 26a or the second big winning opening sensor 35a. It is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving a ball command (special figure 2 start entering ball command, second big winning prize entering ball command) (S4407, S4408). It should be noted that since entering the third starting opening 26 may occur other than during a small hit game, the display of the award ball number image S based on entering the third starting opening 26 and the addition of the award ball counting image C2 The display can also be executed as an effect in the variable display between, for example, the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game. In addition, during the specific period, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 displayed on the lower right portion of the screen (the first display unit) is not performed. This shows the number of winning balls during a specified period (small hitting consecutive period) during which a small hitting game is played continuously three times or more, separately from the number of winning balls obtained by a small hitting game when it is not a specific period. It is for.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit retentions stored at the start of the specific period (three or four small hit retentions in this embodiment) Small hit variation and small hit game corresponding to) is performed until the game is completed. Then, when the small hit fluctuation and small hit games corresponding to all small hit holdings are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T which has been displayed is erased from the screen. The prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the number of winning balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is the lower right of the screen (first display unit) The effect display is performed in which the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball count image C1 displayed on is added (summed) (see (e) in FIG. 61). According to the effect based on such a small hit pre-reading effect pattern A, a change is given to the display mode of the number of award winning balls (the amount of obtained profit), and the effect of the profit effect (the first profit effect, the second profit effect) It is possible to enhance the effect. Incidentally, the mode of the effect display (character image, display period such as specific period display area T, award ball number image S, size, shape, etc.) based on the small hit prefetched effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is displayed as a horizontally-long display near the upper left portion on the display screen 7a, and the award ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T, for example. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as

  On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetched effect pattern B is performed, along with the start of the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) of the effect pattern 8 A plurality of target images Y (see FIG. 59A) described above are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening in the number of small hit games corresponding to the number (3 or 4) of small hit reserves stored at the time when the variable display is started. Displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in the present embodiment, three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59A), and effects based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect) In this case, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. That is, the number of display of the target image Y (representation aspect of the predetermined effect) is different depending on the stored number of small hit retention. By such display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display continuously performed plural times (three times or four times in this example) including the variable display becomes small hit (specific display result) (small It is possible to suggest the player a continuous occurrence of a hit). After this, while a small hit game is performed for the number of times corresponding to the small hit reserve number at the start of the effect based on the small hit pre-read effect pattern B, every time the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 The destruction effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetched effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y as in this embodiment or the destruction effect of the target image Y. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter directly indicating the number of small hit reservations stored is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is entered into the second large winning opening 35 A predetermined character image is displayed over a period of time during which effects based on updating based on small hits and small hits based on small hits are held, and the display mode (character movement etc.) of the character image is to the second large winning opening 35 It is possible to set various effects such as effects that change based on entering the ball as predetermined effects. In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit prefetched effect pattern B, and select and set any of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit preview effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56 (b)), the small hit frequently occurs, and the ball enters the second large winning opening 35 Since effects based on (1st profit effect, 2nd profit effect) can also be executed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the effect relating to the small hit, and to improve the game interest. In particular, under a situation where there are a plurality of small hit retentions ("3" or more in this embodiment), when a specific period is started as a kind of small hit pre-reading effect and a specific period display area T is displayed, Since the display of the number-of-balls image S and the addition display of the number-of-balls count images C2 (second profit effect) are performed until the specific period is completed, the display of the number-of-balls image S and It becomes possible to secure the execution opportunity of the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and to increase the certainty of the display being performed. Then, after the end of the specific period, the number of winning balls indicated by the winning ball count image C2 (the number of winning balls during the specific period) is originally displayed on the lower right of the screen (first display section). The ball count image C1 is added (summed) to the winning prize ball number. Also, under a situation where there are multiple small hit reservations ("3" or more in this embodiment), multiple target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a type of small hit prefetching effect even if the specific period is not started. The effect (small hit pre-read effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (the number of displayed target images Y in this embodiment) differs depending on the number of small hit retention memories. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the rendering (small hitting preview rendering, the first profit rendering, the second profit rendering etc.) to be executed along with the small hit, and to enhance the game entertainment of the rendering mode D (state C) Become.

  Next, the contents (rendering mode) of the effect display in the case where the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach overrun fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Variable display etc. are performed (see FIG. 56 (b) and FIG. 58 (a)). Moreover, when reach change (out or big hit) is performed, and when reach overrun change is performed, the main image X becomes non-displayed after the start of the change display of the effect pattern 8, and so far in the upper right of the screen The effect pattern 8 being displayed is displayed largely at the approximate center of the screen, and variable display is performed by vertical scroll, and thereafter, the change display of the effect pattern 8 is the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth Stop in the stop mode (left and right symbol simultaneous stop → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and the following). At this time, when the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (refer to FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined result is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display) Reach production is performed. The reach effect is executed based on the change effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the change effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as the “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is the same as the second effect executed as the reach effect in the effect mode C described above, in which the friend character and the enemy character are It is a battle effect (confrontation effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and a plurality of patterns of different effects of the battle effect are provided in a plurality of third effect patterns. That is, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), also regarding the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D, if roughly classified, the pattern (also referred to as "third effect pattern A") that the ally character wins, and the allied There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character loses (also referred to as “third effect pattern B”), and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is finished without determination of victory or defeat (also referred to as “third effect pattern C”). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of enemy character, the type of character to be attacked first, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. Note that the third effect pattern A (allied victory pattern) is also referred to as a "first variation effect pattern", and the third effect pattern B (allied defeat pattern) is also referred to as a "second variation effect pattern", the third The effect pattern C (a winning and losing pattern) is also referred to as a “third variation effect pattern”. In addition, in the third effect (battle effect) pattern, a pattern with strong attack power (“type of weapon used in attack, type of technique, etc.”) And a weak pattern (also referred to as a “weak pattern”). In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which the ally character attacks the enemy character, the strong pattern (also referred to as the “ally strong pattern”) is capable of winning the ally character over the weak pattern (also referred to as the “ally weak pattern”). It is considered to indicate high sexuality. In addition, among the patterns in which the enemy character attacks the ally character, a strong pattern (also referred to as an "enemy strong pattern") is more likely to be won by the enemy character than a weak pattern (also referred to as an "enemy weak pattern"). It is meant to indicate that. By these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the player the development and results of battle rendition.

  In addition, when reach change or reach overrun change is performed in the effect mode D, an image (also referred to as "notice image") foretelling the contents of the subsequent game that may be executed after the reach effect in the change is performed. Is configured to be displayable (see FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a type of notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in S4506 described above according to the fluctuation effect pattern in effect mode D set in S4505 described above, and is provided in advance. When the notice effect (the notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by the display of the notice image is selected (set) based on the effect determination table (not shown), the fluctuation display (variation effect) is performed on a predetermined basis. The notice image of is displayed. The display start timing of the advance notice image has various timings such as the start time of the variable display, the reach establishment time, the after reach establishment time, etc., and this timing is also set in accordance with the mode (notice effect effect pattern) of the advance notice effect. However, the display start timing of the advance notice image in the reach overrun change is determined from the start of the change over display until the reach is not established (the reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol is stopped) . It is because reach can not be established in out-of-reach fluctuation. In this embodiment, the display start timing of the advance notice image in the out-of-reach fluctuation is the start time of the fluctuation display. The display of the advance notice image enables the player to infer the development of the game that can be executed after the change. In addition, it is also possible to include the display of the advance notice image in the variation effect pattern set in the above-described S4505 instead of using the advance effect pattern. Further, it can be said that the preliminary announcement image is "information on the game after the end of the variation display", and the effect of displaying the preliminary announcement image is also referred to as "information display effect".

  In the present embodiment, when a preview image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65A, the lower part of the display screen 7a is set as the preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (rendering symbol 8L) and the right symbol (rendering symbol 8R) stopped by reach formation are displayed smaller on the upper left and right of display screen 7a, respectively, and reach effect is mainly achieved at the center of the screen. The state to be performed (reach state) is shown. As a notice image that can be displayed in the notice image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first notice image for giving notice (proposing) occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for giving notice (indication) the continuation of the effect mode D (state C), and giving notice (proposing the transition to the effect mode E (state B) It has three types of preview images with the third preview image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of display of the advance notice image (start of information display effect), at least two types of advance notice images can be displayed in the advance notice image display area U. Such display of the advance notice image enables the player to make an alternative guess regarding the later game development, and therefore, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the content (type) of the notice image displayed. Become. In addition, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are contents based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), display of such notice images enables the effect mode D (state C) to be displayed. It is possible to predict (suggest) the game development after setting the game in) and to enhance the game interest of the effect mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65. For example, the preview image display area U of horizontally long shown in FIG. Of the notice image display area U at the top of the display screen 7a, and the first to third notice images in the notice image display area U in the vertical direction (up and down direction). It is possible to adopt various modes, such as arranging and displaying.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continue”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters “mode E”. Be done. In the present embodiment, when the notice image is displayed, two types of notice images are displayed, but the display pattern (combination of notice images), that is, the “first notice image 501 shown in FIG. And a second display pattern for displaying the "second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503" shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying "first preview image 501 and third preview image 503" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are three types of preview images, for example, when 15R third big hit and 4R fourth big hit are divided (differentiated) in advance, or when there is a type of big hit. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing a preview image according to the type of the jackpot. Also in this case, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern (preliminary effect pattern) of the preview image can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which notice image is to be displayed among the first notice image 501, the second notice image 502, and the third notice image 503 is determined by the type (notice effect pattern) of the notice effect set in S4506 described above. For example, in the case where out-of-reach variation is performed (reach out-of-range variation presentation pattern), the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502 (first display pattern) or the second preview image 502 and the second preview image 502 from the start of the variation. The third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the preview image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is displayed by stopping the left symbol (render symbol 8L) and the right symbol (render symbol 8R) It is performed until reach failure is decided. Then, after the start of display of the advance notice image (after start of the information display effect), when reach non-establishment is determined, the advance notice image which has been displayed until then is erased from the screen. In this case, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 is ended (stopped) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern in the case of displaying the advance notice image can be made by using the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 which is referred to when setting the advance notice effect by the display of the advance notice image in S4506; It is assumed that it is performed based on the display pattern determination random number which takes a value in the range of 99. The practicability of each display pattern is determined in accordance with the selection rate of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the out-of-reach variation, both the display of the preview image by the first display pattern and the display of the preview image by the second display pattern are executable, and in the present embodiment, the former The latter has higher feasibility than the latter (selectivity "30%" of first display pattern, selectivity "70%" of second display pattern).

  On the other hand, when the reach change is performed (reach change production pattern), the change is a big hit change based on the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) When it is performed as a result of the variation display, that is, when the representation pattern 8 is displayed in the Zorome (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display (big hit change presentation pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit mode is displayed (before derived display). A third effect (a change effect based on a first change effect pattern) based on the pattern A (an allied victory pattern) is performed. In addition, since the big hit game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the third effect pattern A (first change effect pattern) is performed since the game in the state C can be continued thereafter. It is a pattern that allied characters win. And in the said fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), a notice image is displayed (information display effect) at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as the start of the fluctuation or the reach establishment. Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be performed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. Among them, when the display of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player is at least at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be inferred that there is no possibility that the 2R big hit will occur, that is, the possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), the player generates a 2R big hit at that time. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the advance notice image in the case where the third effect (battle effect for allied victory) based on the third effect pattern A is executed by the big hit change is the first display of the second display pattern. The possibility of execution in the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the notice image by the first display pattern is more likely to be displayed in the big hit mode, that is, the expectation of the allied victory in the battle effect, that is, the display pattern 8 is displayed It can be said that the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) in which the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In addition, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “friendly pattern” in the big hit change, the display possibility of the preview image by the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

  In addition, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the “friend-friendly pattern” and the display of the advance notice image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of the display of the advance notice image (for example, allied characters and enemies The first notice image 501 (big hit) may be displayed larger than the beginning of the display in the notice image display area U at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the beginning of the confrontation of the character, etc. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the preview image is based on the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above, and when the preview effect pattern including the enlarged display of the preview image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the preview image is displayed. To be done. Further, along with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed smaller than at the beginning of the display or is deleted (in the present embodiment, deletion). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed may be due to the ally strong pattern, or a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the change (battle effect). It is possible to indicate to the player that the player is high, and to increase the player's sense of expectation, sense of security, and the like. When the first preview image 501 is enlarged and the second preview image 502 is deleted, the display may be used to give notice of a big hit decision (big hit decision notification). In addition, after the first preview image 501 is enlarged and the second preview image 502 is reduced and displayed, the first preview image 501 is further enlarged, the second preview image 502 is deleted, and the like, and so on. The display mode of the preview image displayed on U may be changed stepwise. In addition, as a change in the display mode of the advance notice image, for example, the character of "big hit" in the first notice image 501 is made "super win" to indicate 15R big hit, the character of "big hit" and the background color are The characters, colors, shapes, etc. that make up the preview image may be changed, such as changing to the color of. Furthermore, the change of characters and the like and the change of display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “friendly pattern”, that is, the “weak pattern”, the “strong pattern” or the “weak pattern” In any of the three patterns, the enlarged display of the first preview image 501 is not performed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the advance notice image in the advance notice image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. In addition, even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “friendly pattern”, the enlarged display of the first notice image 501 is possible, and in this case, in the case of the “friendly pattern”. The practicability of the enlarged display (display mode change) may be reduced compared to the case of FIG. This makes it easy to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the advance notice image.

  Moreover, when reach change is performed (reach change production pattern) and the change is performed as out-of-out fluctuation (reach out-of-out fluctuation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is out, ie, If, as a result of the variable display, the effect pattern 8 is displayed as a reach-baraked eye (displacement mode) (reach-out fluctuation presentation pattern), the third effect pattern C (unsold and lost) before the display of the deviation mode (before the derived display) A third effect (a change effect based on a third change effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. In addition, since the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the display of the deviation mode), the third effect pattern C (third change effect pattern) is a battle without determination of victory or defeat It is a pattern to finish the Then, in the change (out-of-reach change), the first notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 and the first notice image in the change before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as the start of the change or the reach establishment. 2 Display of the preview image 502 (first display pattern) or display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the display of the notice image according to the first display pattern is performed, the player is not likely to generate at least a 2R jackpot as a result of the change (battle effect) (the possibility of ending the state C). It can be guessed. On the other hand, when the display of the notice image according to the second display pattern is performed, the player may have at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the change (battle effect). You can guess that. In the present embodiment, the first display pattern and the second display of the notice image are displayed when the third effect (battle effect of undecided victory and defeat) based on the third effect pattern C is executed due to the reach out fluctuation. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same as the pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, since the display (big hit or continuation) of the advance notice image by the first display pattern is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, the game in the state C is ended. It does not give the player the fear that it will end up. On the other hand, the display of the notice image by the second display pattern (continuation or effect mode E) can not exclude the possibility that the 2R jackpot will occur, and the game in state C can not be continued. Because it also contains sex, it gives the player such anxiety. The display of the advance notice image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such reach-out change is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, at a predetermined time during confrontation or end of confrontation of friendly characters). , And the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are erased (the display mode change of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that the big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) does not occur as a result of the change (battle effect), and the game in state C continues to be played. Can. As described above, the display of the notice image in which only the second notice image 502 (continuation) finally remains in the notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variation display.

  In the out-of-reach variation, there is no display of a big hit mode (a big hit will occur) as a result of the variable display, so the first preview image as described above in the display of the preview image by the first display pattern There is no enlargement of 501. Moreover, after reaching the first display pattern or the display of the preview image according to the second display pattern in the out-of-reach fluctuation, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executable. The second preview image 502 is a preview image for previewing (suggesting) continuation of the state C in which small hits occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 does not provide the player with a benefit due to the occurrence of a big hit. Since it is predicted (suggested) that the possibility of continuation of the state C is high, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  Moreover, it is a case where reach change is performed (reach change production pattern), and the change is based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol equivalence determination is 2R big hit (any of 2R fifth to eighth big hit) When it is performed as a 2R big hit variation, that is, when the rendering pattern 8 is displayed as a reach open (2R big hit variation pattern) as a result of the variable display (2R big hit variation production pattern), before the 2R big hit variation is displayed (before the derivation display) The third effect (the variation effect based on the second variation effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (the allies defeat pattern) is performed. In addition, after the stop of the variable display (after the display of the 2R big hit mode) 2R big hit game is played, the game state after the big hit game becomes state B (high base state), continue the game in state C Since it can not be done, the third effect pattern B (second variation effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character loses. Then, in the change (2R big hit change), the second preview image 502 and the second notice image 502 and the second change image at a predetermined time before the start of the third effect (battle effect), such as the start of the change or the reach establishment. The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player infers that there is a possibility of occurrence of the 2R jackpot (the possibility of ending the state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the advance notice image is not performed in the first display pattern when the third effect (a battle effect of ally defeat) is executed in the 2R big hit variation based on the third effect pattern B, It is assumed that the second display pattern is executed (see FIG. 66). Although this is the display of the notice image by the first display pattern (the notice effect indicating the relatively advantageous game development), the game in the state C is ended by the occurrence of the 2R big hit (relative The game development is disadvantageous to the player). In this way, when the display of the advance notice image and the third effect (battle effect) are coordinated, and the advance image display (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect) are executed, the player feels uncomfortable or distrusted. It becomes possible to make it not to have a feeling etc.

  After this, the display of the advance notice image according to the second display pattern in the change (2R big hit change) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, at a predetermined time during confrontation or completion of the friendly character and enemy characters) Only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second preview image 502 (continuation) is erased (display mode change of the preview image). As a result, the player can recognize that 2 big hits (one of 2R 5th to 8th big hits) occur as a result of the change (battle effect), and the game in the state C reaches the end. it can. Thus, the display of the notice image in which only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the notice image display area U is performed until the end of the variation display.

  In this manner, in the effect mode D, when reach change or reach overrun change is performed, the content (game development) of the game that may be executed after the change is notified (suggested) based on the change effect pattern related to the change The notice image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the notice image display area U). In this notice image, a first notice image 501 (first information) to notice (indicate) the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) that becomes a setting opportunity of the state C (high probability low base state) , And the second notice image 502 (second information) for giving notice (proposed) continuation of the state C, and giving notice (suggested end of the game in the state C) that the gaming state shifts to the state B triggered by the 2R big hit The third preview image 503 (third information) to be displayed, and the display pattern of these preview images includes a first display pattern consisting of a combination of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502, and a second preview image There is a second display pattern consisting of a combination of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503. The display of the advance notice image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is the third effect from the start of the change in the reach fluctuation before the reach failure establishment is determined from the start of the change in the out-of-reach change. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (the battle effect) becomes clear (before the battle effect or the end of the change), the condition C (the advantageous state in which the small hit frequently occurs) continues (the victory occurs) It is possible to obtain a rendering effect that stirs the player's expectation and anxiety, such as whether the player is undecided) or ended (defeats). In addition, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the aspect of the third effect (battle effect) (allied strong pattern, ally weak pattern, etc.) in the variation, the third effect is executed after the display of the advance notice image is started. At a predetermined time of middle (during battle effect), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest in the displayed preview image and suggests that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player at an early stage before the end of the fluctuation, or It is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation, sense of security and the like.

[Mode selection period]
Next, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high probability low base state), either of the rendering modes C and D is set, and selection of the rendering mode to be set Can be performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be performed at a predetermined time when a big hit as a setting trigger of the state C (high probability low base state) occurs. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, "4R 1st big hit", "15R 3rd big hit" and "4R 4th big hit" are big hits that trigger setting of the state C (high probability low base state) (see FIG. 6) ), It is possible to select the effect modes C and D at predetermined times when these big hits occur.

  In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period in which it is possible to select one of the two effect modes C and D after the big hit game is over is generated. The generation timing (generation timing) of this mode selection period is different between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. Note that control processing relating to presentation mode selection, such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of a presentation mode based on the operation of the first presentation button 63a during the mode selection period, is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for presentation control) It is executed under control, and specifically, is executed by a hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left hitting game) and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as the first hit, and the state A big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and "4R 4th big hit" occurs, that is, mode selection when "4R 4th big hit" occurs as a consecutive hit. A period occurs at the ending period after all the rounds of the 4R big hit game are over. Here, as described above, when the final round of the big hit game is finished (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the big hit ending command. (S2116), the big hit ending period is started (S2117). When the sub control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”, etc. It is provided according to the kind of big hit. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time has elapsed. In this embodiment, the ending time for 4R big hit game is “15 seconds”, and the ending time for 15 R big game is “5”. It is said to be seconds. Note that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications, game characteristics and the like of the gaming machine.

  When receiving the ending command, the sub control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an ending effect is performed. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, the mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as an ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 (hereinafter referred to as “mode C selected image”) indicating “effect mode C” and an image 702 (hereinafter referred to as “mode D selected image”) indicating “demonstration mode D”. Are arranged side by side, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as a "button image") imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right. The display of such a mode selection screen 700 informs the player that the mode selection period is in progress.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, the image 701 (mode C selection image) and the image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. It is assumed that the image which is emphasized and displayed (that is, the effect mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b)). In this embodiment, the mode selection image (effect mode) in selection is displayed (highlighted) as a mode surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed dark (displayed in dark). There is. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, and selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high probability low base state) can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (the start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started on the upper side of the button image (FIG. 62 (c)) reference). The countdown display is performed in a mode in which the numeral image 704 is displayed by subtracting one by one such as “3” → “2” → “1”. This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). Shortly after the number image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the mode selection image highlighted (enclosed in a thick frame) is displayed as a selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, an effect display (not shown) indicating transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) thus selected is set as the effect mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected) Under the effect symbol game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state B or C (right-handed game) and "15R third big hit" occurs, that is, "15R third big hit" occurs as a consecutive hit. The mode selection period in the case of having made is generated in a predetermined round game during the 15R big hit game. Specifically, in this embodiment, of the 1R to 15R, the mode selection period is from the start time of 14R to the middle of 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. The sub control unit side can recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

  The sub-control unit 90 responds to the start of the round game of one before the 14R (predetermined round game) which is the start round of the mode selection period, ie, the "13R start command" specifying the start of the 13R. The round effect command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a round effect of 13R is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and part of the round effect screen 800 (in the present embodiment, the upper left side of the screen). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By the display of the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (in the present embodiment, 14R) (notification start before the start of selection period, first notification means). As described above, in the novel mode, the effect mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started) in advance, and then the generation mode start period is started (started). Selection is possible. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the presentation mode selection.

  In addition, on the round effect screen 800, a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, an award ball count image C1 and the like are also displayed. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each entering ball on the basis of the entry into the first large winning opening 30 during the big hit game (reception of the first big entry winning entry command). Is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and the first big hit in the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game and the big hit game thereafter Addition is also displayed by entering the winning opening 30. Therefore, the winning ball count image C1 displays the total number of winning balls during the consecutive period from the first hit.

  Next, when receiving the “14R start command” that designates the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). Do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a round effect of 14R is executed. In the round effect of 14R, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and part of the round effect screen 800 (in the present embodiment, the upper left side of the screen). Mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R big hit game described above, and is a mode selection screen 700 reduced. There is. By the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress (notification period during selection, second notification means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (up and down replacement of the mode selection image) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, the detailed description about presentation mode selection in 14R is omitted. The screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from a part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed in the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode of the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, when the sub-control unit 90 receives a “15R start command” that designates the start of 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the image control board 100 (image control unit Send to). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a round effect of 15R is executed. In the round effect of 15R, as shown in FIG. 63C, the round effect screen 800 of 15R is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (upper left side in the present embodiment) Mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display is started with the start of 15R. This countdown display is similar to the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62C), and the number image is “3” → “2” → with the progress of 15R. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). With this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (informing before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), whereby the mode selection period ends.

  After this, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800 until the end of the 15R, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected rendering mode (C or D) is set as a rendering mode of state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in state C, the rendering mode (C or D) set (selected) Under the effect symbol game effect is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs that becomes a setting trigger of the state C (high probability low base state), the effect mode of the state C is “play mode C at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. Or a mode selection period to select from among the “effect mode D” occurs. Regarding the generation time (start time) of this mode selection period, the case where the 4R first big hit occurs in the state A (left-handed game) and the 15R third big hit in the state B or C (right-handed game) The occurrence time is different depending on the case. That is, the generation timing of the mode selection period differs between the first hit in state A, which is a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played, and the consecutive hit in state B or C, which is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is performed. It has become a thing. In addition, if you take another way, the type of big hit game to be executed (type of big hit), that is, 4R big hit game (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit) or 15R big hit game (15R third big hit) The occurrence time of the mode selection period is different depending on whether For this reason, depending on the type of gaming state (first hit or continuous hit) when the big hit occurred, and the type of big hit game to be executed, the time when the presentation mode can be selected may be different, or the presentation mode selected It is possible to make the aspect different.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 4R big hit game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games are over, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the mode selection period occurs (starts) halfway from 14R to 15R (final R) in the big hit game, but in the 13R before the generation of the mode selection period (before the start) Then, a notification screen 810 notifying that the mode selection period is started from the next round is displayed (notification start before the start of selection period, see FIG. 63A), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 The message is displayed (informing during selection, see FIG. 63 (b)), and in 15R, a countdown is displayed (informing before end of the selection, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). Thus, in the 4R big hit game, the player is given the opportunity to select the presentation mode after the end of all round games, and in the 15R big hit game, the player has the opportunity to select the presentation mode until all round games are finished. Given to As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  In addition, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the 4R jackpot generates a mode selection period using the ending period. ing. For this reason, it is possible to wipe out the negative image for the player as much as possible such that the number of rounds (acquisition winning balls) is small compared to the 15R big hit and the execution period of the big hit game is short, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Become.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is urged to select the effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in the present embodiment). There is. For this reason, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the presentation mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from the start to the end of the mode selection period, notification according to the effect mode selection (selection period Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, notification before the end of the selection period are performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity of the rendering mode selection without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of image display device]
Next, the arrangement aspect of the image display apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the three image display devices (display means) of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Of the three image display devices, the first image display device 7 has its display screen 7a (display surface) facing the opening provided substantially at the center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are respectively provided on the front side and the left side of the front frame 51 (see FIG. 1).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the front surface 51 of the gaming board 2 is in front of the gaming machine (on the front side of the gaming board) in a state where the front frame 51 is closed (closed state). The visual recognition window 51a (visual recognition part) which makes visual recognition possible from) is provided. The visual recognition window 51 a is formed of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically-long, substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the upper side of the bat-feeding plate 61. The player uses the visual recognition window 51a (glass plate) to display the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 disposed on the back side of the game board 2 (display contents ) Etc. can be viewed. Further, as described above, the front frame 51 is pivotally supported by the frame hinges 56 and 56 provided at upper and lower corner portions on one side end side (left side in this embodiment) of the front side frame 51 (pivotable) There is.

  In the present embodiment, a second image display device 71 is provided on the front of such a front frame 51 and on the upper side of one side end (left side) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. A third image display device 72 is provided on the upper side of the other side (right side) opposite to the end (left side) (see FIG. 1). Each of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is composed of a liquid crystal display device smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and has a rectangular display close to a substantially square. It has screens 71a and 72a. In the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the front display frame 51 is maintained while the display screens 71a and 72a are substantially straight in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in front view. It is configured to be inclined to the side of the visual recognition window 51 a (inside of the front frame 51). The degree of inclination of the display screens 71a and 72a is, as shown in FIG. 1, a range in which the angle between the display screen 71a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is obtuse The predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees) which is inside is set so that the player who plays this pachinko gaming machine 1 can view the display screens 71a and 72a from the front (front side) of the gaming machine ing. As described above, since the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 can be viewed through the viewing window 51a. For a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the display screen 7a (display content), visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a (display content) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 with a small movement of eyes. Is possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

  The first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 (inside the gaming area 3) is also referred to as "panel-side display means" or "first display means". The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the outside are also referred to as “frame side display means” or “second display means”, and the second image display device 71 is referred to as “first frame It is also referred to as a side display means or a left display means, and the third image display device 72 is also referred to as a “second frame side display means” or a “right display means”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, of the frame display means, the second image display device 71 (first frame display means) is provided at the upper front of one side end (left side) of the front frame 51. The front frame 51 is rotatably supported by the hinge 75 for the second image display device. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame display means) is not pivotally supported like the second image display device 71, but the other side of the front frame 51 (right side It is fixed to the front upper part of). As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured such that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51) (arrangement) However, since the second image display apparatus 71 can be horizontally rotated about the axis of the second image display apparatus hinge 75, the second image display apparatus 71 is in an inclined state (initial state, first state And the state (tilted state, second state) which is further inclined toward the viewing window 51a from that state. That is, the angle between the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the visual recognition window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees). Can take an initial state (first state) to be considered and a tilted state (second state) to be a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 degrees to 100 degrees) whose angle is smaller than the first angle It has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle between the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is predetermined. It is being fixed in the state made into an angle (for example, 130 degrees-150 degrees).

  Thus, the second image display device 71 is configured to be rotatable so as to be able to take the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) for the following reason. That is, on the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to lend a gaming ball (ball lending) based on value information recorded on a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card. A card unit 135 (game ball or the like lending device) is provided, and the card unit 135 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control substrate 110) are connected (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the card unit 135 is positioned on one side end side (left side) on which the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When the front frame 51 is opened or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened, the front frame 51 is an axis of the frame hinges 56 and 56 at one side end (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Centering on the card unit 135 side (the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). At this time, when the frame side presentation means such as the frame side display means or the frame side movable combination is provided on one side end side (the front side on the left side of the front face frame 51) on which the front face frame 51 etc. is pivotally supported The frame-side effect means may come into contact with the card unit 135, which may hinder the opening of the front frame 51 and the like (rotation to the card unit 135 side). In this respect, as in the present embodiment, if the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) to the viewing window 51 a side facing the card unit 135, the front frame 51 can be obtained. When the second image display device 71 is tilted toward the viewing window 51 a (when the second image display device 71 is in a tilted state) when opening the second image display device 71, the presence of the second image display device 71 interferes with the opening of the front frame 51 etc. As a result, it is possible to open the front frame 51 and the like without any problem.

  Further, in a state where both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operation unit of the card unit 135 is operated to record on the card (recording medium). When receiving the payout of the ball based on the held ball information or taking out the card (recording medium) from the card unit 135, assuming that the operation position and the card taking out position are in the vicinity of the second image display device 71 Also, by tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state), it is possible to smoothly perform the operation, the removal, and the like. In view of the opening of the front frame 51 and the like, the operation to the card unit 135, and the like, the second image display device 71 is made rotatable. Thus, the second image display device 71 (first frame display means, left display means) is provided as frame side display means on one side end side (left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt such a novel arrangement aspect, and it is possible to make the appearance of the gaming machine feel novelty which has not been achieved conventionally. In particular, as in the present embodiment, not only one side end side (the left side of the front side frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported but also the other side end side facing the one side end side (the front side frame 51 Also on the right side, by providing the third image display device 72 (second frame display means, right display means) as frame side display means, the front face frame 51 that constitutes the front (front face) of the gaming machine is novel The appearance of the gaming machine is more novel. Such novelty in appearance is effective to inspire the player to play the game.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mechanism (maintenance means) for maintaining the second image display device 71 capable of taking an initial state and a tilting state in the initial state. Specifically, as a means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in the initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) urging the second image display device 71 to one side end (left end) of the front frame 51 Is provided in the vicinity of the hinge 75 for the second image display device. The second image display device 71 is kept in the initial state by the biasing force of the torsion coil spring (biasing means). Therefore, in order to set the second image display device 71 in a tilted state, for example, the back surface side (surface opposite to the display screen 71a) of the second image display device 71 is manually pushed to make a torsion coil spring (biasing means) The second image display device 71 can be tilted (turned) toward the viewing window 51 a by applying a force against the biasing force of the second image display device 71 to the second image display device 71. In addition, when the front frame 51 or the like is opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 contacts the card unit 135, the second image display device 71 receives the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 due to the contact. It will tilt (turn) to the visual recognition window 51a side. On the other hand, when the force (the force against the biasing force of the torsion coil spring) for tilting (turning) the second image display device 71 to the viewing window 51 a side is released, the second image display device 71 It returns to the original initial state by the biasing force of the biasing means. Thereby, under the situation where the front frame 51 is in the closed state, the second image display device 71 can be maintained in the initial state, and good visual recognition of the display screen 71 a (display content) of the second image display device 71 It is possible to secure the sex. In addition, the second image display device 71 tilted to the viewing window 51a automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released, so that the second image display is performed without any special operation or treatment. The apparatus 71 can be reliably brought into the initial state.

[Display contents of image display device]
Next, the display contents of the three image display devices provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the image display devices (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72) included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, effect symbol game effects (variation effects), notice effects (indication effects), Various effect displays such as a big hit game effect and a demonstration effect are executable (effect display executing means). In the following, the display contents of the image display device will be described focusing on the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) and the advance effect effect (indication effect) when the gaming state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state) .

[Displayed contents of the effect pattern game effect]
First, the display content of the image display device when the effect symbol game effect is executed in the state A will be described. The effect display relating to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). In the state A, as described above, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode, so the background image corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7. The variation pattern of the effect pattern 8 is displayed on the display screen 7a under the background display. Then, depending on the change effect pattern or the notice effect pattern set at the start of the change display of the effect pattern 8, the effect display according to the reach effect or the notice effect etc. is added to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) There are also cases where the process is also performed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). That is, in the case where the effect display is performed supplementary on the display screen 71 a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72 a of the third image display device 72 mainly with the effect display on the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7. There is. From this, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also referred to as "main display device" or "main liquid crystal", and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72 a) is also referred to as “sub display device” or “sub liquid crystal”.

  In the present embodiment, as the variation mode (variation presentation pattern) of the rendering pattern 8, a variation mode with no reach (normal variation) and a variation mode with a reach (reach variation) are provided, and as a type of reach presentation, Normal reach production and super reach production (also referred to as "SP reach") are provided. For this reason, when reach change is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the change pattern designation command and the change effect pattern determination table in S4505 described above. And when super reach production is performed, compared with the case where normal reach production is performed, it is set up so that possibility (big hit reliability) of becoming a big hit will become high.

  When the sub control unit 90 receives a change start command from the main control unit 80 based on the specification of such change effects (S4403), the first image is displayed based on the change effect pattern set accordingly. Fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variation display start means). If the fluctuation display is normal fluctuation without reach, reach fluctuation due to normal reach production (also referred to as “normal reach fluctuation”), and reach fluctuation due to super reach production (also referred to as “SP reach fluctuation”) In the case of SP reach fluctuation excluding SP reach fluctuation, the effect display such as the fluctuation display or the reach relating to the fluctuation is the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a from the start to the end as shown in FIG. 67). And the second image display 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display 72 (display screen 72a) are not performed. However, as described later, the notice effect (indication effect, indication display) relating to the variable display and the subsequent variable display (variable display based on the special view suspension) is the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third. It may be performed on one or both of the image display devices 72 (display screen 72a). FIG. 67 shows an example of normal change without reach. In addition, the effect display related to reach effect (normal reach fluctuation, SP reach fluctuation) is also referred to as “specific display”.

  Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is usually displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display execution means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 on which the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed, and the background common to the effect modes A and B This is an image, and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not perform effect display relating to a fluctuation effect, a notice effect, or the like. From this, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also referred to as "main background" or "main background", and the background image displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a is "sub-background" Also called "sub-background". In FIG. 67 and the like, background images (sub-background and sub-background) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the secondary background is displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 71a thereof (left The display means) displays a fluctuation number image 710 (predetermined display) indicating the symbol fluctuation number. The fluctuation number image 710 indicates the number of times the fluctuation display of the special symbol (and effect design) is performed until the next big hit occurs (the number of fluctuation), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed once. The number of times of change indicated by the number of times of change image 710 is added and displayed for each (every time in the present embodiment, the end of the change display). The display of the fluctuation number image 710 is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) based on the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 80 (predetermined display execution means). On the other hand, on the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the auxiliary background is displayed, an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) indicating the current effect mode is displayed. The effect mode image 720 shows the name of the effect mode indicating the type of effect mode currently set in the state A (for example, the モ ー ド mode corresponding to the effect mode A, the モ ー ド mode corresponding to the effect mode B, etc.) The display is performed based on the mode status set under the control of the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) (predetermined display execution means).

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect pattern 8 to be executed is a specific SP reach variation among the SP reach variation, in this embodiment, as the execution mode of the variation display (effect display) according to the specific SP reach variation. There are two major modes. Specifically, one of the modes is the reach state from the start of the change display related to the specific SP reach change, and the reach effect (specific SP reach effect) related to the change is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) And the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) (also referred to as a "first embodiment"). In another mode, at the start of the variable display related to the specific SP reach change, the effect display related to the change is executed only on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and after the reach is established, the effect content is When developing to SP reach, the effect display relating to the variation is added to the first image display device 7 and either of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) It is an aspect (it is also called "the 2nd aspect") performed by one or both.

  In the present embodiment, the contents (rendering mode) of the specific SP reach effect executed in the state A (rendering mode A or B) is a big hit if the ally character and the enemy character confront each other and the ally character wins. It is said that the content will be out Such specific SP reach effect is also referred to as "specific effect". As this specific effect, the first specific effect (effect display based on the first mode) executed based on the above-mentioned first mode (three-screen display from the beginning) and the above-mentioned second mode (initially the one-screen display) And a second specific effect to be executed based on the two-screen display or the three-screen display). Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), variable display (specific SP reach fluctuation) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 The second specific effect A, which is also executed by the second image display device 71 later, is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and then executed by the third image display device 72, The “specific effect B” and the “second specific effect C” that is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and then executed also by the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 ing. Therefore, when the specific SP reach change is executed, one of the specific effects (the first specific effect, the second specific effects A to C) is the change pattern designation command and the change in the above-described S4505. It is set based on the effect pattern determination table, and the set specific effect is executed (specific display execution means, effect display execution means).

  Next, the display content of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state in which reach is established on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 from the beginning of the start of the variable display (effect display) (reach state And an effect display indicating the start of confrontation between the teammate character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left symbol (render symbol 8L) and the right symbol (render symbol 8R) in reach state are respectively displayed small on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, and effect display showing the start of confrontation on the entire display screen 7a (See the middle part of FIG. 68). Further, at this time, the sub-character on the side of the teammate character involved in the battle (battle) related to the specific effect is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 instead of the sub (Also referred to as “sub character”) is displayed on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, in place of the sub-background and effect mode image 720, the sub character on the enemy character side involved in the confrontation (battle) pertaining to the specific effect. A character (also referred to as an "enemy sub character") is displayed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Then, along with the progress of the variable display, the confrontation scene between the friend character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the process of the progression, "the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the friend character "Display effect" or "Effective display in which the enemy sub character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Allied sub character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins in the confrontation (friend character side) An effect display, an effect display in which the enemy sub characters displayed on the display screen 72a move to the display screen 7a and are added to the confrontation (the enemy character side), and the like are performed.

  After that, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, the effect display (friend victory scene) in which the friend character side (friend character, friend sub character) beats the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is lined. If it is said, the said fluctuation | variation will be a big hit fluctuation, and the production | presentation pattern 8 will be displayed by Zorome (big hit aspect) (stop display) (refer FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (friend loss scene) in which the friend character side (friend character, friend sub character) loses to the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the fluctuation is out of fluctuation (reach out fluctuation). As a result, the effect pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) with a reach open (disengagement mode) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect display of the final determination scene (the allied victory scene or the allied defeat scene) showing the end of the confrontation in the specific effect (the first specific effect, the second specific effect A to C) is mainly the display screen 7a. It is executed by (main liquid crystal). Then, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C described later, when the ally winning scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the display screen 71a on the left side. The words "win" are displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the characters "win" are displayed on the two sub liquid crystal display screens. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C to be described later, when the ally defeated scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the display screen 71a on the left side. The characters "North" are displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the characters "Loss" are displayed on the two sub liquid crystal display screens.

  Further, when the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and thereafter, when the reach is established, The left symbol (render symbol 8L) and the right symbol (render symbol 8R) stopped (temporarily stopped) by reach establishment are displayed small on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, respectively, An effect display indicating the confrontation start of the enemy character is performed, and subsequently, an effect display indicating the confrontation scene of the allied character and the enemy character is started. During this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, a secondary background etc. is displayed without performing special effect display related to the variable display (described later) Except for the case where the notice effect of Up to this point, the display contents common to the second specified effects A to C are.

  Then, when the second specified effect to be executed is the second specified effect A (display screen 7a → display screen 7a, 71a), as shown in FIG. 71, the effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a. If the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 is displayed soon, the display area of the secondary background displayed on the display screen 71a gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the ally sub character is displayed in the decreasing area. The effect display (friend sub character appearance effect) that appears appears. When an ally sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a after the ally sub character appearance effect, thereafter, along with the progress of the variable display, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a. , "Effective display in which the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character" or "Effective display in which the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and is added to the confrontation (friend character side)" Etc. If the effect display (allied victory scene) in which the allied character side (allyd character, ally sub character) wins over the enemy character is performed in such a second specific effect A, the change is said to be a big hit change, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stop display) with the eye of the eye (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (the ally defeat scene) in which the ally character side (the ally character, the ally sub character) loses to the enemy character is performed, the variation is said to be a outlier (variation in reach), and the production symbol 8 Is displayed (stop display) in a reach-barre order (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  It should be noted that although the ally sub character appearance effect has been started on the display screen 71a, the ally sub character appearance effect ends before the ally sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a, and the entire display area of the display screen 71a is a secondary background. It is also possible to provide a pattern back to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide a sergeant sub character appearance effect of Gasse. In this case, it is called SP reach effect in which the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  Further, when the second specified effect to be executed is the second specified effect B (display screen 7a → display screen 7a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 72, the effect display of the confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a. When the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 is displayed soon, the display area of the secondary background displayed on the entire display screen 72a gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the enemy sub character is gradually reduced in the area. The effect display (Enemy sub character appearance effect) that appears appears. When the enemy sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a after the enemy sub character appearance effect, thereafter, along with the progress of the variable display, the confrontation scene between the friend character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, "Effect display in which the enemy sub character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Effect display in which the enemy sub character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and is added to the confrontation (enemy character side), etc. Is done. In such second specific effect B, when the effect display (army victory scene) in which the ally character wins on the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is said to be a big hit fluctuation, and the effect pattern 8 Is displayed (stop display) with the eye of the eye (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when a representation display (a loss of ally scene) is performed in which an ally character loses to the enemy character side (amy character, an enemy sub character), the variation is a variation (a variation in reach) and the rendering pattern 8 Is displayed (stop display) in a reach-barracing manner (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the enemy sub character appearance effect has been started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub character appearance effect ends before the enemy sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a is a secondary background It is also possible to provide a pattern back to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide an enemy sub character appearance effect of Gase. In this case, it is called SP reach effect in which the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  Furthermore, when the second specified effect to be executed is the second specified effect C (display screen 7a → display screen 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 73, the effect display of the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a. Shortly after the start, the display areas of the secondary background displayed on the entire display screens of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 gradually decrease. An effect display (sub character appearance effect) in which the silhouette of the ally sub character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub character (display screen 72a) appear is performed in the decreasing area. When a sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this sub character appearance effect, a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses, and the "display screen The effect display in which the ally sub character displayed in 71a supports the ally character, the "effect display in which the enemy sub character displayed in the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", and the ally sub character displayed in the display screen 71a is displayed Moving to 7a, effect display added to confrontation (friend character side), "effect display to which enemy sub characters displayed on display screen 72a move to display screen 7a and added to confrontation (enemy character side), etc. are performed . If the effect display (Allied victory scene) is performed in which the Allied character side (Allied character, Allied sub character) wins over the Enemy character side (Embedded character, Enemy sub character) in such second specific effect C, the fluctuation is a big hit change As a result, the effect pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) with the eyes (big hit form) (see the display screen 7a of FIG. 69A). On the other hand, when the effect display (friend loss scene) is performed in which the friend character side (friend character, friend sub character) loses to the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character), the variation is out of variation (reach out variation). As a result, the effect pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) with a reach open (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  It should be noted that although sub character appearance effects have been started on display screens 71a and 72a, sub character appearance effects in which friend sub characters and enemy sub characters are displayed on the entire display screen are ended, and the display area of display screens 71 a and 72 a It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the whole returns to the display of the secondary background. In other words, it is also possible to set up a sub character appearance effect of the cassette. In this case, it is called SP reach effect in which the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  The big hit reliability of such second specific effects A to C is highest in terms of the big hit reliability of the second specified effect A (friendly character, friendly sub character vs. enemy character) in view of the fact that it will be a big hit in the allied character victory. The jackpot reliability is set in the following order: second specific effect C (friend character, friend sub character vs enemy character, enemy sub character), second specific effect B (friend character vs enemy character, enemy sub character) It is set to be low.

  As mentioned above, although the effect pattern game effect which can be performed in state A was illustrated, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is equipped with various change effects (varying effect patterns) in which display contents (render mode) differ in addition to this, Needless to say, this can also be performed using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In particular, with regard to the effect display (specific display) related to the reach effect, as in the first specific effect and the second specific effect described above, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display By providing an aspect that is performed using one or both of the devices 72, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect.

  As described above, when the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) is executed in the state A, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is mainly used as the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the first An effect display in which one or both of the three image display devices 72 (display screen 72a) are added can be executed. Therefore, after the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is started in the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 or the third image is added to the first image display device 7 regarding the effect display relating to the variation. The display device 72 can also draw the player's attention, and a wide range of display can be made over the inside and outside of the game area. As a result, it is possible to make an effect display with an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display to enhance the interest.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variable display based on the specific SP reach fluctuation is performed, that is, when the specific effect (the first specific effect, the second specific effect A to C) is performed, the variable display If there is an aspect (first aspect) in which effect display is executed by three image display devices from the beginning of the start, the effect display is executed by the first image display device 7 at the beginning of the start of the variable display. There is also an aspect (second aspect) in which the effect display is executed by one or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from becoming uniform, and to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

  Also, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is initially started by the first image display device 7, and after that, reach is established and the effect display showing the confrontation scene between the allied character and the enemy character Is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of the auxiliary background of one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 gradually decreases, and the reduced display The area is changing to the display area of the sub character appearance effect. That is, an effect is performed such that the display area of the effect display relating to the variation gradually expands from the first image display device 7 to either one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 It is possible. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when variable display including the second specific effect is performed.

[Display contents of notice production]
Next, the display contents of the image display device when the advance notice effect is executed in the state A (low probability low base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the notice effect is produced based on the effect hold information (predetermination result etc.) stored in S4402 and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52). It is possible to execute (indication effect, indication indication) (indication indication execution means). In this embodiment, in the state A (low probability and low base state), as a preview effect that can be executed using the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72). , Have multiple types of preview effects. In the following, among the preliminary effects, five types of first preliminary effects to fifth preliminary effects will be described. In addition, in the notice effect described below, the notice effect (the notice of the change) which indicates the possibility that the display result of the change display (the change) which is currently being executed becomes a big hit (the specified display result) There is a notice effect (pending advance notice) which suggests that the display result of the variable display executed based on the special map reservation may become a big hit (specific display result).

  First, the first notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) It is an advance notice effect (also referred to as "effect hold advance notice") by the display mode of 9a. The first advance notice effect (effect hold advance notice) is executed as a hold ahead read notice. Since the state A is a low probability low base state, normally, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In response to this, in the state A, the suspension notice is executed based on the result of the prior determination (S322) of the acquisition information (the first special view reserve) acquired based on entering the ball to the first starting port 20. It has become possible. The control relating to the execution of the first notice effect (effect hold advance notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), while the preliminary determination result of the first special view hold is the sub control unit 90 (effect control The sub control side can be recognized by referring to the effect holding information stored in S4402 by the microcomputer 91).

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the presentation suspension notice is performed by the display color of the first presentation suspension 9a. From this, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is provided with a normal color corresponding to the case where the effect hold advance is not performed, and a notice color corresponding to the case where the effect hold advance is performed. There is. The normal color is one type of "white", and the preview color is three types of "blue", "green" and "red". The sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines whether or not to execute a production hold notice triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 20 (generation of the first special view reserve). When the determination result to execute is obtained, the effect suspension notice is executed. For example, at least one first special figure hold is stored as a condition for performing the production hold notice (the special figure 1 hold ball number 1 1) and the first special figure hold stored at that time In the case where the effect suspension notice is not performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined execution lottery and determine that the lottery is to be won. In addition, the execution condition of the production suspension notice is not limited to this, and, for example, it is further conditioned that 2 or more first special view reservations are stored, or even if the production suspension notice is performed. It may be possible to execute a holding notice.

  When the presentation suspension notice is executed, the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for presentation control) executes the display color (announcement color) of the first presentation suspension 9a, that is, the execution pattern of the presentation suspension announcement (first preview presentation pattern To determine). This determination is made on the basis of the effect hold notice determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b), which is a kind of advance notice effect determination table, and the effect hold notice determination random number having a value in the range of 0-99. The sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) selects the first special view pending to be the target of the effect pending notice based on the preliminary determination result (effect pending information), and the first special view pending is "off Specify the display color (the first notice effect pattern) of the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the hold 1 "," off hold 2 "," off hold 3 ", or" big hit hold " , The decision is made (selected) with reference to the effect pending notice decision table. Here, the “off hold 1” is a first special view hold in which normal fluctuation (out) is performed, and the “out hold 2” is a first special view hold in which normal reach fluctuation (outly movement) is performed. “3” is a first special view reservation in which SP reach change (disengagement) is performed, and “big hit hold” is a first special view reservation in which a big hit change is performed. In the present embodiment, the big hit reliability when the display color of the first effect hold 9 a is “red” is set to be the highest, and thereafter the big hit reliability in the order of “green” and “blue” Is set to be low (see FIG. 74 (b)). In addition to the color of the effect hold, for example, the effect hold advance notice can be performed depending on the difference in shape (design) or size of the effect hold, and each element such as color, shape, size, etc. It is also possible to carry out by the combination of In addition, the execution timing of the effect suspension notice is various timings such as when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (when the first special view is suspended) or during the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

  The second preview effect is executed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the preview effect by the display mode of the fluctuation number image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a (also referred to as "number display preview" ). As described above, when the effect display such as the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed by the first image display device 7 and the auxiliary background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a is displayed. , The fluctuation number image 710 is displayed (see FIG. 67 and the like). The second preview effect (prediction of the number display) uses the fluctuation number image 710 (display of the fluctuation number), and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 being executed by the first image display device 7 The display result of is executed as the fluctuation notice that suggests that the possibility that the rendering pattern 8 will be displayed (displayed in the big hit mode) is higher than usual.

  The control concerning the execution of the second notice effect (the number display notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), and when the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8 is started, the second image When the sub-background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the number display advance notice with reference to the result of the determination about the variation display to be started, the variation mode (variation effect pattern), etc. Perform lottery etc.). And when performing the number display notice, by setting the second notice effect pattern (the number display notice pattern) as the notice effect relating to the change display (S4506), the change display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a At the same time, it is possible to execute the number display notice on the display screen 71a. The notice of the number display is set so that the possibility of SP reach fluctuation (outlier) or jackpot fluctuation is higher than that in the case where the fluctuation display that triggers the execution is normal fluctuation (outlier). ing. In this embodiment, the display color of the fluctuation number image 710 is normally set to “white”, and the display color number is changed to “red” to perform the number display advance notice. In addition, the mode of the number display advance notice is not limited to the change of the display color of the fluctuation number image 710, and may be, for example, the size of the number display, the method (alphanumerics, Chinese numerals, etc.), and the change of the position.

  The third advance presentation effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and is executed as the change advance notice and as a pending read advance notice. It may be executed. This third notice effect is a notice effect (also referred to as "firework notice") with a fireworks display as a motif, as shown in FIG. 75, and when variation display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a, As a result, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, and the background of the display screen 71b becomes a background of a starry sky, and then it is an effect display that depicts how fireworks are flipped on the display screen 71b. And the color of the fireworks suggests a big hit reliability. In the present embodiment, four colors of "white", "blue", "green" and "red" are provided as the color of the fireworks, and among them, the "red" is the highest in the big hit reliability. It is set so that the big hit reliability becomes low in the order of "blue" and "white".

  The control relating to the execution of the third notice effect (firework notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), but when it is executed as the hold pre-reading notice, the above-mentioned first notice effect (effect hold notice In almost the same way as), it is possible to execute fireworks notices. That is, when the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started, the type of the first special figure hold that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice with reference to the first special view hold (effect hold information) stored at that time For example, display is made by specifying (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (firework notice pattern) according to the specified type by specifying the above-mentioned off-hold 1 to 3 and big hit hold etc.) It is possible to execute a fireworks notice on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a together with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the screen 7a. In this case, the firework notice is executed each time the variable display is started until the notice target hold that is the trigger for the firework notice (hold advance read notice) is digested.

  Moreover, when performing fireworks notice as the said change notice, when starting the change display (the change production) of the effect pattern 8, refer to the result of the determination of the yes / no according to the change display to start, the change mode (the change production pattern), etc. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (firework notice pattern) (S4506), the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a are displayed together with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to carry out firework announcements. In addition, the determination (selection) of the third notice effect pattern (firework notice pattern) can be performed, for example, by referring to the fire notice notice determination table (not shown) as described in the above-mentioned effect hold notice. .

  The fourth advance presentation effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), and may be executed as the change advance notice or may be executed as the hold ahead read advance notice. This fourth advance notice effect is a notice effect (also referred to as a “chance zone advance notice”) in which the characters “chance zone” and the background are displayed on the display screen 72a as shown in FIG. 76, and the fourth advance notice effect (chance When zone advance notice is executed, it is started with the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the effect mode (notice effect effect pattern) of the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) is set to one type (character display of the chance zone). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of modes, such as the above-mentioned first notice effect (effect suspension notice) and the third notice effect (firework notice).

  The control relating to the execution of the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), but at least the variation display of the effect pattern 8 is performed when executed as a hold prior notice. Under the condition that two or more first special drawing reservations are stored when starting, it is possible to execute chance zone advance notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a It has become. In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold that is the trigger of the execution of the chance zone notice (the hold advance notice) is digested. For example, when three first special drawing reservations are stored, and chance zone advance notice is executed for the third first special drawing reservation, a rendering symbol based on the third first special drawing reservation The characters "chance zone" continue to be displayed on the display screen 72a until the variable display of 8 is performed. In addition, when the chance zone advance notice is executed as the change advance notice, the fourth notice effect pattern (chance zone advance notice pattern) is made as the advance notice effect relating to the change indication when starting the change indication (the change indication) of the effect pattern 8. By setting (S4506), it is possible to perform chance zone advance notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. Even if the chance zone advance notice is executed as a pending look-ahead advance notice or when given as a change advance notice, the first special view reserve or change indication that triggers the execution is a normal change (outside), In the case of SP reach fluctuation (outside) or big hit fluctuation, it is set to be more likely to be practicable.

  The fifth preview effect is executed using all of the first image display 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display 72 (display screen 72a). , And it is executed as the change notice associated with the big hit change. In other words, it is a notice effect of the big hit decision. In the present embodiment, as a mode (variation effect pattern) of the variation display of the production pattern 8 performed as a big hit variation, soon after the start of the variation display of the production pattern 8, the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R There is a full rotation effect in which the low speed fluctuation is performed in a uniform state, and the fifth preview effect is an effect ("full rotation advance notice") for giving notice (indication) the execution (occurrence) of the full rotation effect.

  The control relating to the execution of the fifth notice effect (full rotation advance notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), and when the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern 8 is started, the fluctuation is In the case of the effect mode including the jackpot fluctuation and the full rotation presentation, it is possible to execute the full rotation announcement by setting the fifth advance presentation effect pattern (full rotation advance notification pattern) (S4506). In the present embodiment, since all rotation effects are positioned as so-called "premium effects", the feasibility of all rotation notices and all rotation effects is extremely low.

  The fifth notice effect (full rotation advance notice) of this embodiment is “all” on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) with the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8, as shown in FIG. The characters "turn" are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the characters "turn" on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively, and a display located inside the game area 3 A character displaying "total rotation" is displayed by three display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal) positioned on the left and right of the display screen 7a and outside the gaming area 3 with the screen 7a (main liquid crystal) It has become. After a while from the execution of the full rotation advance notice (display of the characters "full rotation"), one of the display symbols of the same number is displayed on each of the three display screens, and these three display screens display Zoro eyes (big hit) Aspect is displayed. That is, in front view, the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal), the left symbol (render symbol 8L), the middle display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), the middle symbol (render symbol 8C), the right display screen 72a (right sub The right symbol (render symbol 8R) is displayed with the same number on the liquid crystal). This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. After that, in a state where the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed by the three display screens are aligned with each other, the screen is slowly scrolled from the upper side to the lower side of each screen ("111" to "999" in ascending order) Changes slowly)). After this scroll display (full rotation), after any combination of “111” to “999” is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, the three effect designs 8L, 8C, 8R are final Is displayed on the display screen 7a in a big hit manner (confirmed display).

  The first to fifth notice effects described above may be executed alone, and a plurality of notice effects are simultaneously performed, provided that the image display devices used for the execution of the notice effects do not overlap. There is also something to do. As a mode which performs a plurality of preliminary announcement effects at the same time, for example, while executing the first preliminary announcement effect (production suspension preliminary announcement) on the first image display device 7, the second preliminary announcement effect (number of times display on the second image display device 71) 4th notice effect (chance zone notice) on the third image display device while executing the third notice effect (firework notice) on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71. There is an aspect to execute.

  As mentioned above, although the notice effect (indication effect, indication indication) which can be performed in state A was illustrated, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, various notice effects (notice effect pattern) in which display contents (representation mode) differ also in others These can also be performed using one or more display devices of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In addition to the state A (rendering mode A, B), the first image display device 7, the first previewing effect that can be executed in the state B (rendering mode E) or the state C (rendering mode C, D) It is possible to carry out using one or more display devices of the two-image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Furthermore, a part or all of the first to fifth preliminary effects described above may be executable in the state B (effect mode E) or the state C (effect mode C, D).

  As described above, the first image is displayed when the preliminary display effect (indication effect, indication display) on the fluctuation display is executed while the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Not only in the display device 7, but also in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), advance notice effects can be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first image display 7 (display screen 7a) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) and the left side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) Image display of one or more of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) positioned and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) positioned on the right side of the front frame 51 (outside the gaming area 3) Since the advance presentation effect can be performed by the device, a wide range of display can be made over the inside and the outside of the game area 3. As a result, it is possible to make an advance notice effect with an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation of the notice effect and enhance the interest. Among all, in the full rotation notice (the fifth notice effect) for giving notice of execution of the full rotation effect, the characters "total rotation" are displayed by the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a of the first to third image display devices. After that, one full digit of the same design symbol is displayed on each of the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and all the rotation effects are performed in a state in which the zoro eyes are maintained, among "111" to "999". After any one of the combinations is stopped and displayed by the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, the rendering symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) is finally stopped displayed (confirmed display) in a big hit manner on the display screen 7a. Ru. Thereby, the variation of the display of the stop production design is increased and the stop production design is displayed mainly regarding the stop display (display of the stop production design) of the production design 8 performed mainly on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) It is possible to enhance the interest when

  In addition, on execution of the first to fifth notice effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of advance notice effects are made simultaneously (in the same variable display) on condition that the used image display devices do not overlap. It is possible to carry out. In this case, since the preview effects in different modes are executed in the respective image display devices, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the preview effects executed in combination. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect pattern game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect are normally executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal, and when a specific change effect and the notice effect are performed, the sub One or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 corresponding to liquid crystal are used. Then, when such a specific change effect or advance notice effect is not executed, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 display the auxiliary background or change frequency image 710 and the effect mode image 720. (See FIG. 67 etc.). In the present embodiment, various information can be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in addition to the variation frequency image 710 and the effect mode image 720.

  For example, on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), it is possible to display information on the setting of the gaming machine while playing a game or waiting for customers. Examples of information related to the setting of the gaming machine include the volume of a sound effect (rendering sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (brightness) of the display screens 7a, 71a and 72a, and the appearance ratio of predetermined fluctuation effects and advance notice effects. There is information about the production environment, etc. In the present embodiment, on the upper left side (the left side of the first effect button 63a) of the bat supply tray 61 (upper plate), operation means such as an operation lever or the like operable by the player separately from the first effect button 63a. Information on the above-mentioned effect environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) by operating the operation means while waiting for a customer (in standby) or playing a game. It is supposed to be The player can operate the operation means of the effect environment based on the displayed information to make the setting according to his / her preference. The operation means provided on the upper left side of the ball supply tray 61 (upper plate) is operated by operating the firing handle 60 provided on the lower right portion of the front of the gaming machine with the right hand during the game. Because the player's right hand is closed and the left hand is vacant, it is usually considered that the player's right hand is closed. In this way, by performing the setting relating to the effect environment using the operation means positioned on the left side from the center of the gaming machine and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), Even during the operation), it is possible to improve the convenience by enabling the operation relating to the setting without any problem.

  Further, for example, on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), information regarding specifications such as the jackpot probability and probability change ratio (probability change inrush ratio) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed while waiting for a customer It is possible. By displaying the information about the spec on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51 in this manner, for example, for those who select a gaming machine (model) playing a game in the gaming hall The front of the gaming machine, even without looking into the front of the gaming machine (main liquid crystal) provided on the back of the gaming board (inside the gaming area) of the gaming machine in the customer waiting state (standby state) It becomes possible to confirm the specs simply by looking at the display screen of the image display device (outside the game area) projecting to the side. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easy to select a model to play in the gaming hall. The information on the specification may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

  As described above, when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not execute the effect display relating to the specific variation effect or the advance effect, the secondary background or the secondary screen or the like is displayed on these display devices (display screens 71a and 72a). It is possible to perform other display (predetermined display) that does not interfere with the effects performed by the first image display device 7, such as the fluctuation number image 710, the effect mode image 720, information on setting of the gaming machine, and information on specifications It has become. As a result, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be effectively used.

[Specific reach production]
Next, a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 which is an aspect of the reach effect possessed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment in terms of specifications and control aspects such as the success / failure determination probability, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the specific reach production 149, during the execution of the reach production (may be from the beginning of the reach production execution, may be from the middle of the execution of the reach production), always the specific production design ("7" in this embodiment) Reach production at is executed. Therefore, when the specific reach effect 149 is executed and it becomes a big hit, the big hit symbol of the specific effect pattern will be stopped and displayed. In addition, a big hit (big hit type) when this specific effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol is considered as a big hit (specific big hit) which is advantageous for the player. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit game ends is a big hit (first specified result) in which the gaming state after the big hit game is a low probability high base state. Therefore, when the specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 occurs, it is possible for the player to increase the sense of expectation for the generation of the advantageous big hit and to enhance the game interest.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of reach effects (game effects) with different execution modes (render modes), including a specific reach effect (Thunder reach) 149 as a reach effect (game effect). ing. In addition, depending on the reach effect (game effect) to be executed, there is a possibility that the production symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (the result of the fluctuation display of the production symbol becomes the big hit), that is, the big hit reliability differs. It is assumed.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows a scene where variable display of the effect pattern 8 has been started. 78 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 78 (a), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect pattern ("7"), The scene which became a reach aspect is shown. In addition, production | presentation symbol "7" is also called 1st specific symbol 146 (specific symbol). If the first specific symbol 146 is a big hit (“777”), the second specific symbol 147 (non-specific symbol) is a big hit (for example, “444”), a big hit advantageous to the player is executed Be done. If the first specific symbol 146 is a big hit, the big hit is a big hit (first specific result) which is advantageous for the player who reliably generates a high probability low base state after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with the second specific symbol 147, the big hit will be a disadvantageous big hit (second specific result) which may not cause a high probability low base state after the big hit game is over (may be).

  FIG. 78 (c) shows that the character A appears as a reach effect (game effect) during execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 78 (b) "Thunder reach (specific reach effect, specific game effect) Shows the scene where "was performed. As shown in FIG. 78 (c), reach type display section 141 (game effect type display section) indicating the type (name) of reach effect to be executed is displayed in the upper center of display screen 7a, and "Thunder reach" is displayed. Is displayed. Further, a character A which performs a predetermined motion during the thunder reach is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a. In addition, on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, a rendering symbol (first specific symbol 146) of "7" which is a reach symbol (reach effect symbol) is displayed. In addition, when the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) is displayed on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, the size is smaller than the case where the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows the execution mode of the Thunder Reach (specific reach effect) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 78 (c). Specifically, it is an effect of throwing the lightning pattern 145 against the middle effect pattern 8L in which the character A 144 is variably displayed, and stabbing the lightning pattern 145 into the predetermined middle effect pattern 8L. And, if the lightning symbol 145 is pierced in the same inside effect symbol ("7") as the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146), it becomes a big hit, and in the inside effect symbol different from the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) It will come off when stuck. In FIG. 78 (d), a scene in which the lightning symbol 145 is stuck in the same middle effect symbol ("7") as the reach symbol (the first specific symbol 146) (that is, a scene in which the determination of the big hit is informed to the player) It shows.

  FIG. 78 (e) shows a scene in which a big hit has been decided as a result of the Thunder Reach, with all the left middle right directing design symbols being stopped and displayed (fixed stopping display) by the first specific symbols 146 (“7”). FIG. 78 (f) shows that the lightning symbol 145 is in the middle of the execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 78 (c), and is pierced in the middle effect symbol ("6") different from the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146). (Ie, a scene in which the player is informed of the disconnection). FIG. 78 (g) shows, as a result of the Thunder Reach, the stop display (confirmed stop) with the first specific symbol 146 ("7") and the middle effect symbol different from the reach symbol ("6"). Show a scene where the release has been confirmed. As described above, in the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach), the effect pattern always becomes the reach mode with the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and the reach effect is executed. Then, in the case of a big hit in the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach), it is always a big hit in the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and a relatively advantageous big hit for the player is executed.

  Next, another execution aspect of the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach) will be described using FIG. FIG. 79 (a) shows a scene where variable display of the effect pattern 8 has been started. 79 (b), during the execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 79 (a), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same effect pattern (“6”) ( The middle effect design continues the fluctuation display), the scene which became the reach feature is shown. In addition, production | presentation symbol "6" is also called 2nd specific symbol 147 (specific symbol). In the case of a big hit (“666”) with this second specific symbol 147, the possibility that the player will be given a less favorable (unfavorable) big hit than if it is a big hit with the first specific symbol. Is high. Specifically, a jackpot with a low degree of advantage for the player may be executed, or a jackpot similar to that when a jackpot with a low degree of interest is executed or when the jackpot in the first specific symbol occurs It may be done.

  FIG. 79 (c) shows a scene in which "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is executed as reach effect (game effect) during execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 79 (b). There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is also achieved when the second special symbol 147 is the reach mode even when the effect pattern 8 is the first specific symbol 146 and the reach mode. Both are considered as reach effects (game effects) that can be performed. However, in the case of "Sander reach (specific reach effect)", if the rendering design is always the first specific symbol (specific symbol) and it is a reach mode, and "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is a big hit, it is always the first A special symbol (specific symbol) is a big hit, and a jackpot relatively advantageous for the player is executed.

  79 (d) to 79 (f) show the reach symbol ("6") from the second specific symbol 147 ("6") during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (c). The scene which performs symbol change production 148 (change production) which changes to 1 specific symbol 146 ("7") is shown. In FIG. 79 (d), the left and right reach symbols ("6") displayed at the first positions 142 (first display area) at the upper left and right of the display screen 7a enlarge and shake the symbols and display The scene which moves to the 2nd position 143 (2nd display field) under the center part of screen 7a is shown. By displaying the reach symbol in an enlarged manner and moving it to a position closer to the central portion of the display screen, it is possible to surely inform (visualize) the occurrence of the symbol change effect 148 (change effect itself) to the player Become.

  79 (e) and (f) show an execution mode (rendering mode) in which the second specific symbol 147 ("6") changes to the first specific symbol 146 ("7") in the symbol change effect 148. There is. FIG. 79 (g) shows a scene where the reach symbol (“7”) after change is displayed in the symbol change effect 148 in a state of being enlarged and displayed at the second position 143. In this way, the player is surely notified that the reach symbol in "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" has changed from the second specific symbol 147 ("6") to the first specific symbol 146 ("7"). It is possible to Thereby, the player enhances the game interest. Further, FIG. 79 (h) ends the symbol change effect 148 and moves and displays the changed reach symbol (“7”) from the second position 143 to the first position (returns to the original position) as well as the reach It shows a scene in which the symbol is displayed in a reduced size (return to the original size).

  After this, with the reach symbol as "7" of the first specific symbol 146, "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is started. Since the execution mode after FIG. 79 (h) is the same as that of FIG. 78 (d) to (g) described above, the description will be omitted. In addition, during execution of “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)”, it may have a time to display the left and right effect design symbols only on the second display screen 71 a and the third display screen 72 a. That is, in the specific reach effect, the time to display all of the left and right middle effect symbols on the display screen 7a and the left effect symbol are displayed on the second display screen 71a outside the game area, and the right effect symbol is the third outside the game area And the time to be displayed on the display screen 72a. In this way, by displaying a part or all of the effect design on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a outside the display area, the character effect is made more noticeable in the display screen 7a, and the player is given specific reach effect It is possible to make

  Further, in the second embodiment, the specific reach effect 149 is a game effect that can be executed in a specific game state among a plurality of game states. Specifically, the specific reach effect is a game effect that can be executed in the low probability low base state (normal effect mode described later), and the other gaming states (low probability high base state, high probability low base state, high probability high In the base state, the specific reach effect is not set. That is, the specific reach effect in which the character A appears is a game effect that can be performed only in the normal effect mode, and the super effect mode (first super effect mode, second super effect mode), first count effect mode, second It is not executed in the count effect mode. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the game effects that can be performed in each game state (depending on the effect mode in execution), and to prevent the boredom of the game.

[Notice effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the notice effect provided to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) can be a big hit (displayed with the big hit symbol) in conjunction with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) Execute a notice effect indicating the nature (big hit game play possibility). In the second embodiment, there are four types of notice effects (the fourth notice effect, the fifth notice effect, the sixth notice effect, the seventh notice effect) shown in FIG. 80. Along with the display, it is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. Moreover, these advance notice effects differ in the big hit game play possibility (it is also called "big hit reliability") which the said advance notice effects show. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the fourth notice effect <the fifth notice effect <the sixth notice effect <the seventh notice effect is set, and the jackpot reliability of the fourth notice effect is the lowest, 7 The jackpot reliability of the preliminary production is set the highest.

  As a result, it is difficult to increase the game interest because it is difficult to expect a big hit if the fourth notice effect or the fifth notice effect is executed along with the variable display of the effect pattern, but it is difficult to raise the sixth notice effect. When the seventh preview effect is executed, the degree of expectation for relatively big hit is high, so it is possible to enhance the game interest. Therefore, the player plays the game in anticipation of the execution of the sixth advance notice effect or the seventh advance notice effect as the advance notice effect during the change display of the effect pattern.

  Specifically, in the fourth preliminary announcement effect 151, the big hit reliability is set to 2%, and it is an effect mode in which a character B 152 imitating a boy appears at a predetermined timing. In the fifth preliminary announcement effect 153, the big hit reliability is set to 4%, and it is an effect mode in which a character C154 imitating a fish appears at a predetermined timing. In the sixth preliminary announcement effect 155, the big hit reliability is set to 33%, and it is an effect mode in which a character D156 imitating a silhouette of a human who runs at a predetermined timing and a character E157 imitating a south island appear. In addition, the sixth notice effect 155 (the first game effect) is set to a big hit reliability of 33%, and the fourth notice effect 151 (the second game effect) and the fifth notice effect 153 (the second game effect) In comparison, it is considered to be a notice effect that is highly likely to be a big hit.

  Further, among the plurality of characters (characters D and E) appearing in the sixth advance notice effect 151, the character D (specific character) represents a specific character in a silhouette mode, and a game profit (prize ball) acquisition effect described later Is also a character that appears in The character D (specific character) appears in common in a situation where the possibility of becoming advantageous to the player is relatively high (when the game effect is executed) or a situation advantageous to the player. In addition, although the character D (specific character) is set to appear commonly in a plurality of scenes, this may be used in common with the same character data, and the data used differs depending on the appearance scene The character may be a character having the same shape (look from the player) or may be a character having a similar shape having the same shape but different sizes. In addition, as long as characters having the same shape (including similar shapes) are included, other characters (decoration) may be added to other parts. Also, the colors may be different. It is sufficient if the characters appearing in a plurality of scenes are similar to the extent that the player can recognize that they are similar characters (all are characters in the shape of a running human silhouette).

  In the seventh preliminary announcement effect 158, the jackpot reliability level is set to 45%, and a plurality of (multiple) appearances of a character F159 imitating a bird appear. The seventh preliminary announcement effect 158 is set to a jackpot reliability of 45%, and is considered to be a preliminary announcement presentation having a considerably high possibility of a big hit as compared with the fourth preliminary announcement effect 151 and the fifth preliminary announcement effect 153.

  Also, the execution mode of the fourth preliminary announcement effect 151 to the seventh preliminary announcement effect 158 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) shows a scene where variable display of the effect pattern 8 has been started. FIGS. 81 (b) to 81 (e) are respectively different variable displays, and after any of FIGS. 81 (b) to 81 (e) from the scene of FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (f). Move to the reach mode of). In addition, since the big hit reliability differs depending on the notice production, the result of the reach mode shown in FIG. 81 (f) can be a big hit depending on which notice production has passed and then the scene of FIG. 81 (f) is transitioned. Sex (expected degree) is different.

  FIG. 81 (b) shows a scene in which the character B152 of the fourth announcement effect 151 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81 (c) shows a scene in which the character C154 of the fifth preview effect 153 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81 (d) shows a scene where the character D156 and the character E157 of the sixth notice effect 155 are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as FIG. 81 (a). There is. FIG. 81 (e) shows a scene in which the character F159 of the seventh preview effect 158 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81 (a).

[Game profit acquisition direction]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the game profit acquisition presentation of the second embodiment will be described. The game profit acquisition effect is an effect that indicates how much game profit has been acquired in the specific state when the gaming state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called continuous state (continuous period), and in the low probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state again from when it is a big hit Up to (except the jackpot gaming state) state. This is an effect that indicates the amount of gaming profit acquired in this specific state.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a big hit (4R first big hit) in a low probability low base state, and a big hit game (4R first big hit game) pertaining to the big hit is being displayed on the round display portion 161 As it is, it shows the execution scene of the fourth round game, which is the final round ((F) indicates the final round). That is, it is a big hit that occurred in a low probability low base state (normal state), and is a so-called first hit. And a specific state starts from this big hit (big hit game). In the lower central part of the display screen 7a, an acquired profit display portion 166 showing the amount of game profit (number of winning balls) acquired in the big hit game is provided, and by the display of "00550pt", about 550 balls of game profit It is shown that the (prize ball) has been paid out. Since the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (a) is the first big hit game in the specific state, the obtained game profit displayed on the obtained profit display portion 166 is the total obtained game profit in the specific state (specific period). Become. Therefore, the acquired profit display unit 166 shown in FIG. 82 (a) is also referred to as a total acquired profit display unit 164.

  Further, in the approximate center of the display screen 7a in the big hit game, a big hit game effect 163 in which the ally character and the enemy character fight is displayed. Then, in FIG. 82 (a), since the effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed, it is possible for the player that the game state after the end of the big hit game shifts to the game state relatively advantageous for the player. It is shown. In addition, when the effect that the allied character defeats the enemy character is displayed in the big hit game effect, the game state after the big hit game end is a game state (high probability low base state) relatively advantageous for the player. When a transition is made and an effect is shown that the enemy character defeats the ally character, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shifts to a gaming state relatively low for the player (low probability high base state). Also, when transitioning to the high probability high base state (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit), the effect that the enemy character defeats the ally character is displayed, and once it is shifted to the disadvantageous gaming state, the player It is reported that the game is in an advantageous state when the number of times the variation display of the rendering symbol (special symbol) reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the big hit game.

  FIG. 82 (b) shows the ending period after the end of the final round (four rounds) of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) shown in FIG. 82 (a). On the display screen 7a, that the big hit game is over, the gaming state after the big hit game is transitioned to the state C (high probability low base state) advantageous to the player, the earned gaming profit in the big hit game is "00600 pt" It is shown that it was. FIG. 82 (c) shows a scene where the state is shifted from FIG. 82 (b) to state C, and variable display of the rendering symbol (special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 82 (c), the specific state (continuous state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and “T: 00650 pt” is displayed on the total acquired profit display portion 164 shown at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the above-mentioned jackpot game and the total acquired game profit in the subsequent state C are “650 pt”. In the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the earned game profit not only in the jackpot game but also in the state C. In the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, a launch direction display unit 162 is provided, and the launch direction of the game ball is notified to the player. In addition, the effect for the state C is displayed in a predetermined display mode at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

  In (d) of FIG. 82, after executing the variation display of the rendering symbol (special symbol) a predetermined number of times from FIG. 82 (c), the result of the variation display of the predetermined rendering symbol (special symbol) becomes a big hit and the big hit symbol ( "777") shows the scene which stopped and displayed. FIG. 82 (e) shows the execution scene of the second round of the round game while the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (d) is being executed. At the upper center of the display screen 7a, there is provided a total earned profit display portion 164 indicating the total earned gaming profits in a specific state (specific period), and at the lower center of the display screen 7a, a running big hit game (15R) An acquired profit display section 166 is provided which indicates the currently acquired game profit in the third big hit game). In the approximate center of the display screen 7a, a big hit gaming effect 163 is displayed while the ally character and the enemy character are fighting.

  FIG. 82 (f) shows a scene in which the round game has progressed to the 15th round, which is the final round, in the same big hit game as FIG. 82 (e). The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 is increased to “02050 pt”, and accordingly, the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 is increased to “02750 pt”. In addition, since the effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed as the big hit game effect of the final round, the game state after the big hit game is relatively advantageous for the player (state C, high probability) The player is shown to shift to the low base state).

  FIG. 83 (g) shows the ending period after the end of the last round (15 rounds) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) shown in FIG. 82 (f). On the display screen 7a, that the big hit game is over, the gaming state after the big hit game is transitioned to the state C (high probability low base state) advantageous to the player, in the big hit game (15R third big hit game) It is shown that the acquired gaming profit is "02 200 pt" and the total acquired gaming profit in the specific state is "02 900 pt". FIG. 83 (h) shows a scene where the state is shifted from FIG. 83 (g) to state C, and variable display of the rendering symbol (special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 83 (h), the specific state (continuous state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and “T: 03500 pt” is displayed on the total acquired profit display portion 164 shown at the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display is made, and it is shown that the total earned gaming profit in the state C executed between and in the plurality of jackpot games described above is “03500 pt”.

  FIG. 83 (i) shows the predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) after a predetermined number of big hit games after the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times from FIG. 83 (h) The result of the variable display is a big hit, and the big hit symbol ("777") shows the scene displayed stopped. Also in FIG. 83 (i), the specific state (continuous state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues. FIG. 83 (j) shows the execution scene of the round game of the twelfth round while the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 83 (i) is being executed. The display of the acquired profit display unit 166 is “01850 pt”, and the display of the total acquired profit display unit 164 is increased to “09950 pt”.

  FIG. 83 (k) shows the same twelfth round in the same big hit game as FIG. 83 (j) and a predetermined time has passed since FIG. 83 (j). As shown in FIG. 83 (k), the acquired gaming profit in the running big hit game is “01900 pt”, and thereby, the scene in which the total acquired gaming profit in the specific state is “10000 pt” is shown. In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the fact that the total earned gaming profit is "10000 pt" is considered to be an indication that the specific state continues for a long period of time and a large amount of gaming profit (winning balls) can be obtained. That is, the situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to indicate the advantageous situation to the player, the specific profit display portion 167 is provided in the approximate center of the display screen 7a.

  The specified profit display section 167 is provided according to the obtained profit displayed in the total acquired profit display section 164 becoming "10000 pt", and the amount of the total acquired game profit exceeds the specified amount in the specified profit display section 167. Display “10000ptOVER” to indicate that the specified amount has been reached. Further, the specific profit display portion 167 displays the character D 156 (specific character) together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, the player is able to obtain a large amount of gaming benefits while the player continues to be in the specific state (continuously-running status), that is, having acquired "10000 pt" as the earned benefit is a situation advantageous to the player. Is easily recognizable.

  As described above, the character D 156 (specific character) is a character that is used as a notice effect with a relatively high hit probability, and the display mode also mimics the silhouette of a running person similar to the notice effect. Because of the display mode, the player can easily recognize that the character is the same. In this way, by using the same character as the character (specific character) used in the game effect with high reliability in the big hit, the current game situation, that is, the situation where the game profit of "10000 ptOVER" is obtained is It is possible to easily grasp that it is an advantageous situation. Although all the characters appearing in the sixth preview effect 155 may be used, only the character D is used as the common character in the present embodiment. That is, it is sufficient if at least some of the characters are common to both scenes.

  In addition, in order to cause the player to reliably recognize the display mode ("10000 ptOVER" and the specific character) of the specific profit display portion 167, a specific time ("4 s" in this embodiment) is reached from the time when the total earned gaming profit reaches 10000 pt. ) Continue to display. In the meantime, even if the display of the total earned profit display section 164 exceeds “T: 10000 pt”, the display mode of the specified profit display section 167 is maintained at “10000 ptOVER” (the specified character continues the display as well) To do). In addition, the amount of profit (“10000 pt”) displayed on the specific profit display portion 167 is displayed on the total earned profit display portion 164 so that the player can reliably recognize the display mode of the specific profit display portion 167 Display in a larger size than "10000 pt"). Further, the amount of profit (“10000 pt”) displayed in the specific profit display portion 167 is displayed in a size larger than the amount of profit (“01900 pt”) displayed in the acquired profit display portion 166.

  In addition, the specific amount (“10000” pt) that triggers the display of the specific profit display portion 167 is set to an amount that can not be acquired in one big hit game even if it is a big hit game that can obtain the most game gain. . Further, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to increase the earned gaming profit even in the state C, it is possible that one big hit game and the state C continue for a long period of time (that is, generate a small hit game many times). Although it is possible to obtain a specific amount of gaming benefits, usually, by generating a plurality of jackpot games, it is possible to obtain a specific amount of gaming benefits. Therefore, although it is impossible to obtain a specific amount of gaming benefits only with the gaming benefits obtained by one jackpot game, it is not possible to obtain a specific amount of gaming benefits by generating multiple jackpot games. It can be said that it is possible.

  Further, in FIG. 83 (k), the case has been described where the amount of the grossly acquired gaming profits exceeds a specific amount (“10000 pt”) during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, it is not in the big hit game but in a specific state, which is a specific state, and is totally obtained in the non-big hit game state (high probability low base state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state) In some cases, the amount of gaming profit exceeds a specific amount (“10000 pt”). FIG. 83 (l) shows such a scene, and when the gaming state after the big hit game is in the state C, the amount of the total earned game profit is a specific amount ("10000 pt") by the occurrence of the small hit game. Shows a scene beyond As shown in FIG. 83 (l), a total earned profit display portion 164 is provided at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and "T: 10000 pt" is displayed, and the total earned gaming profit is "10000 pt". It is shown that.

  Further, in response to this, as in FIG. 83 (k), the specified profit display portion 167 is provided at the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Then, on the specific profit display portion 167, “10000 pt OVER” is displayed to indicate that the amount of total acquired gaming profits exceeds the specific amount (becomes the specific amount). Further, the specific profit display portion 167 displays the character D 156 (specific character) together with the display of “10000 ptOVER”. As a result, the player is able to obtain a large amount of gaming benefits while the player continues to be in the specific state (continuously-running status), that is, having acquired "10000 pt" as the earned benefit is a situation advantageous to the player. Is easily recognizable. In addition, even when the total earned gaming profit becomes "10000 pt" in the state C, the player is made to recognize the display mode ("10000 ptOVER" and the specified character) of the specified profit display portion 167 in the same manner as during the big hit game. Therefore, the display is continued for a specific time ("4s" in the present embodiment) from when the total earned gaming profit reaches 10000 pt.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by displaying the common character in a plurality of advantageous situations, the situation where the big hit reliability is high or the situation where a large amount of gaming profits can be obtained, etc. It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of the character (specific character) appearing in a situation advantageous to the player. Also, by causing the specific character to appear in a plurality of advantageous situations in this manner, the player who has seen the particular character in one scene can experience the other scene from the experience of seeing the particular character in the previous advantageous situation. When looking at a specific character at, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the current situation may be an advantageous situation. As described above, in the gaming machine provided with a wide variety of game effects, the player can efficiently display the meaning (big hit reliability, advantageous degree, etc.) of the game effect by making the specific character appear in an appropriate scene. It is possible to inform (recognize). This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the gaming machine and to enhance the fun of the game.

[Transition mode of production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, an effect mode (effect mode) executed in each gaming state will be described. The type of the big hit, the type of gaming state to be shifted after the big hit, etc. are the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6 etc.). The gaming state in the initial state after power-on is a low probability low base state, and the effect mode is set to the “normal effect mode 181 (third specific effect mode)” shown in FIG. 86 (a). The means for setting a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of effect modes is also referred to as "effect mode setting means". In the second embodiment, the “effect mode setting means” is provided in the sub control unit 90.

  During the execution of the game (special symbol hit / fail determination, special symbols / reproduction symbol variation display etc.) in the normal effect mode (low probability low base state), the result of the special symbol hit / fail decision (first special symbol hit / fail decision) is a big hit Then, the big hit special symbol (big hit effect symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit game is executed. As described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment similarly emits the game ball to the left gaming area in the low probability low base state, and displays the first special symbol variation display (the first special symbol success or failure judgment). Has become the main gameplay, high probability high base state · high probability low base state · low probability high base state, the game ball is fired in the right gaming area and the variable display of the second special symbol (second special It has become a game that is mainly based on the judgment of the design success or failure.

  The jackpots as a result of the first special symbol pattern judging that may occur in the normal effect mode (low probability low base state) are the 4R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot. As a result of the first special symbol success or failure judgment, at a predetermined rate when it becomes 4R first jackpot (for example, 50% when it becomes 4R first jackpot), when the jackpot becomes or / and during the jackpot To the player that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game will be the super effect mode (high probability low base state) (proposed) “1st bonus (4R 1st big hit game)” is To be executed. When the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player after the big hit game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security It becomes possible. That is, when the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed in conjunction with the big hit game, after the big hit game is over, it always shifts to the super effect mode (high probability low base state). Incidentally, the effect mode of the super effect mode is two types (plural types) shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c).

  In addition, as a result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment, a predetermined ratio (the remaining ratio, for example, 50% when becoming the 4R first big hit) when the 4R first big hit becomes, and the 4R second big hit When it becomes, "the second bonus (4R first big hit game)" is executed. In the second bonus (second bonus effect), the effect mode (playing state) after the big hit game shifts to the counting effect mode (low probability high base state) when the big hit becomes or / and during the big hit game. An effect of notifying (proposing) the player that he or she is to perform the game is performed. However, even if the second bonus is executed, if the result of the first special symbol equivalence determination is the 4R first big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is not the count effect mode , Transition to the super effect mode (high probability low base state). In addition, an effect mode of the count effect mode (first count effect mode) that can be shifted from the first special symbol equivalence determination is an aspect shown in FIG. 86 (d).

  That is, when the second bonus (second bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game transitions to the super effect mode (high probability low base state) ( There is a case where the 4R first big hit) and a transition to the count effect mode (low probability high base state) (when the 4R second big hit). Further, when transitioning from the second bonus to the super effect mode, it is possible to perform promotion effect indicating transitioning to the super effect mode at the time of the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game, and to enhance the game interest. . Therefore, even when the second bonus effect is executed, the player can maintain high game interest for a long time without losing expectation of the advantageous gaming state, expecting the generation of the promotion effect. It becomes.

  In the super effect mode executed in the high probability and low base state, a plurality of effect modes are provided as in the first embodiment, and the player performs one of the effect modes at a predetermined timing such as during a big hit game. It is possible to select using the effect button (see FIG. 86 (f)). Further, as a selectable effect mode, there are a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode) and a second super effect mode 183. During the execution of these super effect modes, the gaming state is set to the high probability low base state, and as described in the first embodiment, a game in which the amount of acquired gaming profits can be increased by the small hitting game It is a game state advantageous to the person. Also, the super effect mode (high probability low base state) continues until the next big hit (first bonus, third bonus, or fourth bonus) occurs.

  The first count effect mode (count effect mode, second effect mode) executed in the low probability high base state is not a big hit until the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished The game state shifts to the normal effect mode. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (the gaming state most disadvantageous to the player). As described above, in the super effect modes 182 and 183 (high probability and low base state) and the first count effect mode (low probability and high base state), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short and the game ball is in the right game area It becomes playability which makes the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (the 2nd special symbol success or failure judgment) the main by firing.

  Then, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, when the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is the 15R third big hit, the "third bonus (15R third big hit game)" is executed Ru. The third bonus is a jackpot most advantageous to the player, in which the highest obtainable game profit is obtained and the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the super effect mode. Therefore, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize transition to a game state (super effect mode, high probability low base state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game Because it is possible, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of security. That is, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, after the big hit game is over, it always shifts to the super effect mode (high probability low base state).

  In addition, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, when the result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment is the 4R fourth big hit, the "first bonus (4R fourth big hit game)" is executed Ru. Since the 4R fourth big hit game and the 4R second big hit game are similar big hit games (number of opening of big winning opening, opening time, etc.), the first bonus effect of the same effect mode is executed. Further, as described above, since the first bonus effect makes it possible to easily recognize transition to a game state advantageous to the player after the big hit game, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security.

  In addition, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, as a result of the second special symbol equivalence judgment, 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit In the case, "the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game)" is executed. In the fourth bonus (the fourth bonus effect), the effect mode (playing state) after the big hit game shifts to the counting effect mode (low probability high base state) when the big hit becomes or / and during the big hit game. An effect of notifying (proposing) the player that he or she is to perform the game is performed. However, even if the fourth bonus is executed, if the result of the second special symbol equivalence determination is 2R fifth big hit or 2R sixth big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game is over, Once it shifts to the count effect mode (second count effect mode), but if the variation display of the special symbol (effect pattern) has passed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if it does not make a big hit during that time), the effect The mode shifts to a super effect mode (high probability low base state, second specific effect mode). That is, when the count effect mode is executed in the high probability high base state and the count effect mode is the second count effect mode, then the gaming state shifts to the high probability low base state and the effect mode is super It shifts to production mode (the 2nd specific production mode). Note that “50 times” or “100 times”, which is the number of times of shifting the effect mode described above, is also referred to as a specific number of times.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol qualification judgment is 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (second count effect mode) When the variation display of the special symbol (render symbol) passes a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if it does not make a big hit during that time), the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode (low probability low base state) Do. That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the low probability high base state, and then the game state shifts to the low probability low base state, and the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode. In addition, the effect mode of the count effect mode (second count effect mode) which can be shifted from the second special symbol equivalence determination is an aspect shown in FIG. 86 (e).

  In addition, in the super effect mode, when it becomes the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit), the second count production always after the big hit game In order to shift to the mode (and further, because the amount of game profit that can be acquired is also small), the fourth bonus is considered to be a disadvantageous jackpot as compared to the first bonus and the second bonus. Conversely, the third bonus and the first bonus are considered to be advantageous jackpots, because they always shift to the super mode after the jackpot game (in addition, the amount of game benefits that can be obtained is also large, particularly the third bonus is large). .

  Here, the first count effect mode 184, which shifts based on the result of the first special symbol pass / fail determination, shifts only to the normal effect mode based on the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, the second count effect mode 185, which shifts based on the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination, shifts to the normal effect mode 181 based on the variable display of the special symbol (effect pattern) a predetermined number of times. And the super rendering modes 182 and 183 are different from each other.

  On the other hand, the effect modes of the first count effect mode 184 (the first specific effect mode) and the second count effect mode 185 (the first specific effect mode) are both common to the effect mode display section 171 and the effect mode name And the background character 172 also displays a common character (cloud background). The difference is that an image (display unit) different from each other is provided in a partial area of the display screen 7a. Specifically, in the second count effect mode 185, at the upper right of the display screen 7a, a remaining number display unit indicating the remaining period of the count effect mode is provided. The display modes of the two rendering modes are different in that the first count rendering mode 184 is not provided with such a display unit. As described above, since the difference between the display modes of both effect modes is small, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the effect modes. Thereby, even when the player is in the first count effect mode 184, the player is expected to shift to the super mode to maintain high game interest for a long time, or when the second count effect mode 185 shifts to the super mode. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to enhance the game interest.

  In addition, “count mode (184, 185)” which is an effect mode in which names of effect modes are common to each other is referred to as “first specific effect mode”. That is, the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 correspond to the “first specific effect mode”. The effect mode after the end of the big hit game is set to "count mode". The count mode (the first specific effect mode) is switched to another effect mode when the number of times the variation display of the effect pattern reaches a predetermined number (predetermined number) without the result of the special symbol suitability determination becoming a big hit. Do. The effect mode to which the transition is made without becoming a big hit includes a normal effect mode (third specific effect mode) and a super effect mode (second specific effect mode). More specifically, when the count mode under execution is the first count effect mode, only the normal effect mode is entered. Further, when the count mode under execution is the second count effect mode, there are cases of transition to the normal effect mode and transition to the super effect mode.

  As described above, when the count mode (first specific effect mode) is set based on the result of the first special symbol suitability determination, the count mode is the first count effect mode (first specific effect mode), and 2) When the count mode (first specific effect mode) is set based on the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the count mode is a second count effect mode (first specific effect mode). In addition, as described above, in the first count effect mode, the normal effect mode (the first time the number of times of variation display of the effect pattern reaches a predetermined number (100 times) without the result of the special symbol equality determination being a big hit 3) Move to the specific effect mode). In the second count effect mode, the normal effect mode (third time) is performed when the number of times of variation display of the effect pattern reaches a predetermined number (50 times or 100 times) without the result of the special symbol equality determination being a big hit. There are two cases: transition to the specific effect mode) and transition to the super effect mode (second specific effect mode).

  That is, when the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is set to the count mode (the first specific effect mode), the count mode is super based on the fluctuation display of the effect pattern (identification information) of the specific number of times The possibility of shifting to the effect mode (second specific effect mode) differs depending on the game state. Specifically, the possibility of transition from the count mode to the super effect mode (without going through the big hit game) is the second gaming state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state, or high) The result of the special symbol equivalence judgment in the certain low base state) is a big hit (specific result) and a big hit game is executed, and the first game state (low certainty) is set when the count mode is set after the big hit game is over In the low base state) the result of special symbol equality determination becomes a big hit (specific result) and a big hit game is executed, and it is higher than the case where it is set to count mode after the big hit game ends.

  This is a pachinko gaming machine, in the second gaming state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state), it is considered as a game mainly based on the second special symbol success or failure determination, In the gaming state (low probability low base state), it is because it is considered as a game mainly based on the first special symbol success or failure determination. Therefore, the possibility that the effect mode shifts from the count mode to the super effect mode (without going to the big hit game) is a big hit in the second special symbol judgment, and a big hit game is executed, and counting after the big hit game is over If the mode is set, it can be said that the result of the first special symbol equivalence judgment is a big hit (specific result) and the big hit game is executed, and it is higher than the case where the count mode is set after the big hit game is over. .

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, all count modes set by the result of the first special symbol equality determination are the first count effect mode, and there is a possibility of shifting to the super effect mode (without going through the big hit game), It is set to "0". Instead of such a mode, it may be possible to shift to the super effect mode (without going through the big hit game) also from the count mode set by the result of the first special symbol equality determination. Even in such a case, the count mode set based on the result of the second special symbol equality determination is more effective than the count mode set based on the result of the first special symbol equality determination ((big hit game The possibility of shifting to the super rendering mode can be increased. Furthermore, as another aspect, the count mode set based on the result of the first special symbol equality determination is more than the count mode set based on the result of the second special symbol equality determination ((big hit game The possibility of shifting to the super rendering mode may be increased.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the bonus effect and the effect mode shown in FIG. 84 are executed according to the transition of the game state, and the game effect is diversified and diversified to prevent the boredom of the game, the game It makes it possible to add interest.

[Game production of each production mode]
Next, game effects (reach effects and character effects) executed in each effect mode will be described using FIGS. As shown in FIG. 85, the normal effect mode 181 (third effect mode), the first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode), the second super effect mode 183, the count effect mode (second effect mode, In the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185), the game effect is different in the effect mode (display mode). Also, in the normal effect mode 181, four types (multiple) of game effects (reach effects) can be executed, and a big hit reliability is set for each of these four types of game effects. The jackpot reliability indicates that, when the corresponding game effect (for example, Thunder Reach) is executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) variably displayed along with the game effect may be stopped and displayed with the symbol. In other words, it indicates the possibility (the possibility of playing a big hit game) of becoming a big hit (first bonus or second bonus).

  In addition, each game effect executed in the normal effect mode mainly based on the first special symbol success or failure determination allows appearance of different characters, a character S in S reach, a character T in T reach, and a character A in thunder reach 78 (c), (d) etc.), the character Y is made to appear in the full rotation reach. By looking at these appearing characters and presentation modes, the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability of the game presentation to be executed. Of course, in these game effects, other characters common or different may be displayed (appear) other than the characters shown in FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85, different game effects can be executed in the first super effect mode 182, the second super effect mode 183, and the count effect modes 184 and 185 mainly based on the second special symbol qualification determination. Here, the reliability of the game effect in these effect modes is referred to as "favorable big hit reliability". This is different from a mere "big hit reliability" and is an advantageous big hit, that is, the possibility that the super mode will be the third bonus or the first bonus (15R third hit or 4R fourth hit) ) Is shown. In the super effect mode, there is little obtainable game profit, and the big hit where the effect mode after the big hit game ends shifts to the count effect mode is a big hit which is disadvantageous for the player even if it is a big hit. As the "big hit reliability", it indicates the possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit excluding these disadvantageous big hits as "the advantageous big hit reliability".

  Specifically, the character A confrontation reach 191 which can be executed in the first super effect mode 182 is a game effect of an effect mode in which the character X and the character A appear and confront, and the advantageous big hit reliability is the first super effect Among the game effects that can be executed in the mode 182, it is the lowest "1%." That is, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed in the first super effect mode 182, the possibility of the result of the variable display of the effect pattern being a big hit is very low. Therefore, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed, the player does not become a large offensive jackpot than to expect a big hit, that is, it is expected that the result of the special symbol eligibility judgment is out, the game Do.

  In addition, the character G confrontation reach 192 is a game effect of the effect mode in which the character X and the character G appear and confront each other, and the advantageous big hit reliability is set to “10%”. Further, the character H confrontation reach 193 is a game effect of the effect mode in which the character X and the character H appear and confront each other, and the advantageous big hit reliability is “30%”. In addition, character I confrontation reach 194 is considered as the game production of the production aspect where character X and character I appear and confronts, the advantageous big hit reliability is the highest in the game production which can be executed with 1st super production mode 182 "50%" of the In addition, the above-mentioned confrontation reach becomes an advantageous jackpot if the allied character X defeats the enemy character A, G, H or I. If it loses, it will be a big jackpot, and in the case of a draw, the result of the special symbol judgment will be lost, and the gaming state will continue. The first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 execute common game effects. This makes it more difficult to determine which count effect mode to use. In each effect mode, game effects (prediction effects, prefetch effects, reach effects, character effects) other than those set in FIG. 85 may be provided.

[Demonstration mode of each production mode]
FIG. 86A shows an effect mode of the normal effect mode 181. As shown in FIG. In the normal effect mode 181, a character resembling a mountain and a tree is displayed as the background character 172. In the normal effect mode, the effect mode display section 171 indicating that the normal effect mode is not provided. Therefore, since there is no background character and the effect mode display section 171, it is grasped that it is the normal effect mode. FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first super effect mode 182 when the player selects the first super effect mode 182 in the super effect mode. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the sun is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the “first super mode” on the effect mode display section 171, the effect mode to be executed for the player is clearly indicated. There is.

  FIG. 86C is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second super effect mode 183 when the player selects the second super effect mode 183 in the super effect mode. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating a month is displayed as the background character 172, and the effect mode display unit 171 displays the "second super mode" to clearly indicate the effect mode to be executed for the player. There is. Further, FIG. 86 (d) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first count effect mode 184 when the effect mode is set to the first count effect mode 184. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating a cloud is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying “count mode” on the effect mode display section 171, an effect mode to be executed for the player is shown.

  Further, FIG. 86 (e) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second count effect mode 185 when the effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the same (common) cloud as the first count effect mode 184 is displayed as the background character 172, and in the effect mode display section 171, the same “count” as in the first count effect mode 184 "Display of mode" is done. This indicates the effect mode to be executed for the player. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7a, the remaining number of times display portion 173 in the first count effect mode 184 is provided, and indicates the remaining period of the second count effect mode 185. The execution period of the first count effect mode 184 (as the longest period when a big hit does not occur) is a period in which the number of variation display of special symbols is fixed at 100 times, but the execution period of the second count effect mode 185 (As a longest period when a big hit does not occur), there are a plurality of periods of 50 times and 100 times of the variable symbol display of the special symbol.

  Therefore, in the second count effect mode 185, such a display unit is provided in order to show the remaining period to the player in an easy-to-understand manner or to increase the remaining period to enhance the game interest. Such a difference in display mode is the difference between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, and the other configurations, appearing characters, executable game effects and the like are common. Therefore, when the effect mode is set to the count mode, the player with a short period in contact with the pachinko gaming machine identifies whether the count mode is the first count effect mode or the second count effect mode. It is difficult to do.

  Also, FIG. 86 (f) shows that, when the rendering mode is set to the super rendering mode, the player can select one of the rendering modes from the first super rendering mode 182 and the second super rendering mode 183. An effect mode selection screen 186 is shown. An effect mode selection period is provided at a predetermined time during the big hit game before the effect mode is set to the super effect mode (similar to the first embodiment).

[Game effect of the specific effect mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a game effect (reach effect) in a specific effect mode (specifically, the first super effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes possessed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. A presentation mode (execution mode) of the character presentation) will be described. When the gaming state is set to the high probability low base state, any of the plurality of effect modes (first super effect mode, second super effect mode) by the effect button operation of the player (player's selection) The rendering mode can be selected. As described above, in these effect modes, game effects differ depending on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to prevent boredom of the game or to enhance the fun of the game by selecting an optional rendering mode or switching to a different rendering mode in accordance with the preference of the player. .

  As shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 87 etc., in the first super effect mode 182, game effects of characteristic effect modes different from those in the other effect modes are executed. Specifically, four types (a plurality of) game effects (reach effect) of the character A confrontation reach, the character G confrontation reach, the character H confrontation reach, and the character I confrontation reach (these are generally referred to simply as the "confrontation reach") ) Is possible. In these game effects, whether an ally character (character X) and an enemy character (character A, G, H, or I) confront each other, and whether the result of the confrontation results in a determination result advantageous to the player Indicates whether or not. That is, it indicates whether or not the gaming state after the big hit game is to be executed the big hit game (first bonus or third bonus) which is advantageous to the player set to the super effect mode by the game effect to be executed.

  Further, in each game effect, an option display section 179 indicating the result of the confrontation is provided in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the result of the confrontation becomes any of the results displayed on the option display section 179. There are three types of options displayed in the option display section 179: [victorious], [continuation], and [defeated], and when the result of confrontation reach is [victorious] (in the result display unit 178 (If victory is displayed), a jackpot advantageous to the player is made, the third bonus or the first bonus (big hit game) is executed, and the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is set to the super effect mode. The gaming state in the super effect mode is a high probability low base state advantageous to the player.

  When the result of confrontation reach becomes [Continuation] (when [Continuation] is displayed on result display section 178), the result of the special symbol suitability determination is out, and the big hit game is not executed, and the said The first super effect mode continues even after the confrontation reach end. And after that, in the first super effect mode, the fluctuation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is continuously executed. If the result of confrontation reach is [Loss] (if [Loss] is displayed on the result display section 178), it is a big hit against the player, the fourth bonus (big hit game) is executed, and the big hit game is over The subsequent effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. As described above, the gaming state in the second count effect mode includes the low probability high base state and the high probability low base state.

  Also, a plurality of game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 185 are set, and among the plurality of game effects, the game effect that can be displayed as an option of [defeated] on the option display section 179 is an enemy character Only the character A confrontation reach 191 (first special game effect) in which the character A appears is considered. That is, in the situation where the game is executed in the first super effect mode 185, the ongoing effect mode is shifted from the first super effect mode 185 to the second count effect mode 185 without passing through the character A confrontation reach 191. There is nothing to do. Therefore, in the first super effect mode 185 in the high probability low base state, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed when it is the 2R seventh big hit and the 2R eighth big hit which are the jackpots which are disadvantageous to the player. The character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed also in the 2R fifth big hit and the 2R sixth big hit, which can be promoted from the second count effect mode to the super effect mode. That is, in the first super effect mode, the fourth bonus (see FIG. 84) is executed, and the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed when the effect mode after the big hit game shifts to the second count effect mode.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a scene in which the character A confrontation reach effect 191 (first special game effect) is executed along with the change display of a predetermined effect pattern in the first super effect mode 185. FIG. On the left portion of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun is displayed, which indicates that the effect mode in progress is the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a character X174 of an ally character and a character A144 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed. Moreover, the production | presentation design of a reach aspect is displayed on the right-and-left upper part of a display screen (the production | presentation design "2" of the left and right which comprises a reach aspect is displayed). Further, at the upper part of the display screen, an option display section 179 is provided, and options which can be the result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the character A confrontation reach effect, "continue" and "defeat" are displayed as options in the option display section.

  In the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is always displayed as an option. Also, [Win] is not displayed as an option. Therefore, the character A confrontation reach effect is considered to be a reach effect indicating a situation that is quite disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game in anticipation that the "continuation" is displayed on the result display portion 178, that is, the result of the special symbol acceptance determination is out and the first super effect mode continues. Although not shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, although [winning] is not displayed as an option, after [defeating] is displayed as a confrontation result, a reverse effect is performed to give an advantage to the player. It also has a jackpot effect.

  In addition, as another mode of the second embodiment, in the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), there may be a case where the option of “win” is displayed or the case where “defeat” is not displayed. In addition, even if 3 options of [Win], [Continue], and [Debate] are displayed, or only 1 option is displayed (in this case, it is decided by the displayed option) Good.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [Continuation] is displayed on the result display unit as a confrontation result of character A confrontation reach effect ing. In addition, in the central portion of the display screen, the off reach production effect design [232] is displayed, and it is shown that it is off as a result of the reach operation. In addition, a character [draw] is displayed, which indicates that the confrontation between the character X and the character A is a draw. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues even after the first super effect mode ends (the fourth bonus is executed to shift to the second count effect mode). In other words, it indicates that the character A confrontation reach effect is performed when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is out.

  FIG. 87 (c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [Loss] is displayed on the result display unit as a confrontation result of character A confrontation reach effect ing. Further, in the central portion of the display screen, an off-reach producing symbol [212] is displayed, and as a result of the reach producing, it is shown that the player did not become an advantageous big hit advantageous to the player. In addition, as the production design, out-of-reach reach production design (3 figures not identical production design) of [212] is displayed, but the result of the special design equality judgment is the big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R 7th jackpot or 2R 8th jackpot). Further, in the confrontation between the character X and the character A, an effect indicating that the character A has won (the character X has lost) is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode is ended (the fourth bonus is executed to shift to the second count effect mode). That is, the character A confrontation reach production performed when the result of the special symbol qualification judgment is relatively disadvantageous to the player (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit) To indicate that

  In addition, as described above, when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed and [defeated] is displayed on the result display section, in principle (in most cases), the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is set. Transition. However, there may be a rare case (at a very low possibility) that a reverse presentation is performed after the defeat presentation in FIG. 87 (c) and a presentation showing that it is an advantageous jackpot. In this case, the third bonus (or the first bonus) is executed, and then it shifts to the super effect mode. In the table of FIG. 85, the advantageous big hit reliability of the character A confrontation reach is not 0%, but is 1% because it has such a rare case. Moreover, it may change to such an aspect, and you may set 0% the advantageous big hit reliability at the time of performing character A confrontation reach production.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows a scene in which the character G confrontation reach effect 192 (second special game effect) is executed along with the change display of the predetermined effect pattern in the first super effect mode 185. On the left portion of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun is displayed, which indicates that the effect mode in progress is the first super effect mode 185. Further, in the approximate center of the display screen, a character X174 of an ally character and a character G192 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed. Moreover, the production | presentation design of a reach aspect is displayed on the right-and-left upper part of a display screen (the production | presentation design "2" of the left and right which comprises a reach aspect is displayed). Further, at the upper part of the display screen, an option display section 179 is provided, and options which can be the result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (d), in the character G showdown reach effect (second special game effect), unlike the character A showdown reach effect (first special game effect), [win] and [continue] are selected as options in the option display section. ] Is displayed and [defeat] is not displayed.

  That is, in the character G confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. In addition, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character G confrontation reach effect is a reach effect that indicates a situation that is extremely advantageous for the player (that there is no possibility of an adverse jackpot as a result of the game effect). Therefore, the player is expected that [winning] will be displayed on the result display section 178, that is, the result of the special symbol judgment will be an advantageous big hit, and the first super effect mode will continue after the big hit game is over. Play a game. In addition, even if [Continuation] is displayed without displaying [winning], the first super effect mode continues thereafter, so that the player can play with peace of mind. . Further, although not shown in the figure, it may have a pattern of displaying only [winning] (one option).

  FIG. 87 (e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87 (d), and shows a scene in which [winning] is displayed on the result display unit as a confrontation result of character G confrontation reach presentation ing. Further, in the center portion of the display screen, a hit (advantage big hit) reach production symbol [222] is displayed, and it is shown that a hit (advantage big hit) is achieved as a result of the reach production. Further, an effect image indicating that the character X being the ally character has won over the character G being the enemy character is displayed. This indicates that an advantageous jackpot will be made, and a big hit game (third bonus or first bonus) will be executed, and after the big hit game is over, it will be set to the first super effect mode again. That is, it is indicated that the result of the special symbol qualification determination is the character G confrontation reach effect executed in the case of the advantageous big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit).

  Further, FIG. 87 (f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87 (d), and a scene in which [Continuation] is displayed on the result display unit as a confrontation result of character G confrontation reach effect Is shown. In addition, in the central portion of the display screen, the off reach production effect design [232] is displayed, and it is shown that it is off as a result of the reach operation. In addition, a character [draw] is displayed indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character G is a draw. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues even after the first super effect mode ends (the fourth bonus is executed to shift to the second count effect mode). That is, it indicates that the character G confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is out.

  FIG. 87 (g) shows a scene in which the character H confrontation reach effect 193 (second special game effect) has been executed along with the change display of the predetermined effect pattern in the first super effect mode 185. In the approximate center of the display screen, a character X174 of an ally character and a character H176 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), [Victory] and [Continuation] are displayed as options on the option display section 179 as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, and [Loss] is not displayed. .

  That is, in the character H confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option, as in the event of the character G confrontation reach effect. In addition, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character H confrontation reach effect (the second special game effect) is a reach effect that indicates a situation that is extremely advantageous for the player (that there is no possibility of an adverse jackpot as a result of the game effect). In addition, although illustration is omitted, as a result of character H confrontation reach production, same as in Figure 87 (e) or Figure 87 (f), when it becomes [winning] executes an advantageous jackpot and then the first supermarket The rendering mode is set again, and when it is "continue", the first super rendering mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  FIG. 87 (h) shows a scene in which character I confrontation reach effect 194 (second special game effect) has been executed along with the change display of the predetermined effect pattern in the first super effect mode 185. In the approximate center of the display screen, the character X174 of the teammate character and the character I177 of the enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), [Victory] and [Continuation] are displayed as options on the option display section 179 as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, and [Loss] is not displayed. .

  That is, in the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option as in the character G confrontation reach effect. In addition, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character I confrontation reach effect (the second special game effect) is also similarly a reach effect that indicates a situation that is extremely advantageous for the player (that it does not become a disadvantageous big hit as a result of the game effect). In addition, although illustration is omitted, as a result of character I confrontation reach production, same as FIG. 87 (e) or FIG. The rendering mode is set again, and when it is "continue", the first super rendering mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  As described above, in the first super effect mode (first effect mode, specific effect mode), any of the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, and the character I confrontation reach effect is executed, [Loss] is not displayed as an option, and as a result, [Loss] is not displayed on the result display unit. That is, in the first super effect mode, only the character A confrontation reach effect has a possibility of becoming a disadvantageous jackpot disadvantageous to the player, and other game effects (character G confrontation except for the character A confrontation reach effect Reach production, character H confrontation reach production, character I confrontation reach production) does not have the possibility of becoming a disadvantageous disadvantage jackpot for the player.

  As a result, when a game effect (second special game effect) other than the character A confrontation reach effect is executed, the possibility of becoming a large jackpot at that time is eliminated, and the player's sense of security is enhanced. It becomes possible to increase the sense of expectation to the advantageous big hit when the game effect (the second special game effect) other than the reach effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 85, the character G confrontation reach production, the character H confrontation reach production, and the character I confrontation reach production differ in the possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit reliability (favorable big hit reliability), and the character I Confrontation reach production is set the most advantageous big hit confidence is high.

  Moreover, it has the option of [continuation] which does not become a disadvantageous big hit even when character A confrontation reach production is performed, and also has the possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit although being a slight possibility. As a result, the tension on the disadvantage jackpot is enhanced when the character A confrontation reach production (the first special game production) is executed, and the game interest is enhanced, and the continuation of the first super production mode and the expectation for the advantageous jackpot Can be maintained for a long period of time.

  Also, in the first super effect mode, the value of the character A (specific character) in the first super effect mode is set low by making the game effect in which the character A appears the most disadvantageous game effect for the player. ing. On the other hand, as described above, “specific reach effect” in which the character A common to the character A confrontation reach effect appears and which is a game effect that can be executed in the normal effect mode, the jackpot reliability is also set relatively high. The game effect is set to always be an advantageous big hit (set to a high probability low base state and a super effect mode) when it is a big hit.

  That is, the specific reach effect (refer to FIGS. 78 and 79, etc., the third special game effect) executed in the normal effect mode (third effect mode), and the character A confrontation reach effect executed in the first super effect mode (See FIG. 87 etc., and the first special game effect) is a game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears, but the value for the player of the game effect (a result advantageous to the player) Potential, the jackpot reliability) is completely different. Thereby, the value (big hit reliability) of the game effect that the same character A appears depending on the effect mode (normal effect mode, first super effect mode) to be executed or the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state) , The big hit reliability, the possibility that the player will have a favorable outcome). Further, this enhances the excitement (tension) of the player when the game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears is executed depending on the effect mode or the game state, and also diversifies the game effect to the game. It becomes possible to prevent getting tired.

  In addition, if the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode that can be executed in the super effect mode, and the effect mode such as the first super effect mode is not preferred, then the second super effect mode is selected. Can play a game. As a result, it is possible to provide a game effect according to the player's preference, and to enhance the fun of various players. It should be noted that in the first super effect mode, there is a possibility that it will be a large jackpot only when a specific game effect (character A confrontation reach) is executed, and it will be a large jackpot when other game effects are performed By excluding the possibility, it was made an effect aspect that places the most emphasis on which game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the second super effect mode, even if any of a plurality of game effects (J reach, K reach, A reach, L reach) is executed, there is also the possibility that it will be an advantageous jackpot or an adverse jackpot. And the possibility of becoming an advantageous jackpot varies depending on the game effect to be executed. Thereby, even when any game effect is executed among the plurality of game effects, it is possible to see the game effect with a certain degree of anticipation for an advantageous big hit. On the contrary, even when any game effect is executed among the plurality of game effects, it is possible to see the game effect with a certain degree of anxiety that will be a disadvantageous big hit. In addition, this makes it possible to increase the player's feeling of excitement (tension) and to increase the fun of the game.

[Other execution modes of game profit acquisition direction]
Next, another execution aspect of the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described using FIG. 88 to FIG. As described above, when the gaming state is in the specific state, the gaming profit acquisition effect is an effect that indicates how much game profit has been acquired in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called continuous state (continuous period), and in the low probability low base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state again from when it is a big hit Up to (except the jackpot gaming state) state. This is an effect that indicates the amount of gaming profit acquired in this specific state. Further, in another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect described later, a total acquired game profit acquired in the specific state (specific period) and a unit period (one big hit game) of the specific state (specific period) Unit acquired game profit obtained in accordance with the game situation, the first image display 7 (second display), the second image display 71 (first display), and / or the third image It displays on the display apparatus 72 (1st display apparatus), respectively.

  That is, the acquired gaming profit amounts for different periods are respectively displayed on the plurality of display devices separately arranged, and the display devices to be displayed are made different according to the game situation. In addition, it is preferable to provide one or more display devices separately disposed at least inside and outside the game area. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the game profit acquired in the desired period according to the game situation. In addition, "display according to the game situation" is displayed according to the game state such as low probability high base state, high probability high base state high probability low base state, etc., normal effect mode, the first super effect mode It means displaying according to the rendering mode such as the second super rendering mode, the first counting rendering mode, the second counting rendering mode, and the like. The display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 may display the effect pattern 8 depending on the game situation, for example, when performing reach effect, The display screen 71a is also referred to as a second effect symbol display portion, and the display screen 72a is also referred to as a third effect symbol display portion.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a scene in which variable display of the rendering symbol (first special symbol) is being performed in the low probability low base state (normal state). As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the low probability low base state (normal state), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first image display device, first effect display device) provided substantially in the center of the game area 3 (1st display screen), a production hold display area (1st production hold 9a or a 2nd production hold 9b) for displaying a production design display area 7b (production design display section) for displaying the production design 8 and a production hold (1st production hold 9a or 2nd production hold 9b) A first effect hold display area 9c or a second effect hold display area 9d) is provided. Also, on the display screen 71a (second display screen) of the second image display device 71 provided in the outer area (first outer area) (on the left side of FIG. 88) of the game area 3, If the big hit game is being executed after the power is turned on, the first variation count display section 203 (the first bonus variation count display section, the execution period display, which displays the variation display count of the rendering symbol from the previous big hit game end Section) is provided.

  Here, it is shown that the variable display of the effect pattern 78 times has ended since the end of the last big hit game (currently, the 79th variable display is being executed). Further, on the display screen 72a (third display screen) of the third image display device 72 provided in the outer area (second outer area) (on the right side of FIG. 88) of the game area 3, an effect showing the current effect mode A mode display unit 171 is provided. Then, characters of “normal mode” indicating that the current effect mode is the normal effect mode 181 are displayed.

  FIG. 88 (b) shows a scene in which the aforementioned “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” is executed as a reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 88 (a). It shows. At this time (at the time of reach effect execution), the effect mode display section 171, the first effect hold display section 9c, and the variation display section 9e are erased, and the first display screen, the second display screen, and the third display screen are displayed. A game effect (reach effect) is displayed using three display screens (generally the whole). However, as shown in FIG. 88 (b) and the like, such other display units (effect mode display unit 171, effect suspension display unit, variable display unit, total acquired profit display unit described later and second acquired profit display) Even in a situation where the part etc.) is temporarily not displayed, the first variation count display part 203 maintains the display without being erased. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the game period (the game period from the power on) from the previous big hit game to the player regardless of the game situation.

  Also, this makes it possible for the player to confirm how long he / she has played a game without having a big hit game, and to prevent an excessive investment in the game. In addition, even in a situation where the player is not playing a game (during demonstration image display, etc.), the display is maintained without the first variation count display unit 203 being erased. This allows other players to use as reference information when selecting a gaming machine. In addition, even when the game information is not displayed on the island facilities or the like, it is possible to notify clearly and surely by always displaying on the gaming machine.

  FIG. 88 (c) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 88 (b), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 88 (b) is a big hit, and the big hit effect symbol (“777 ") Shows the scene which is stopped and displayed. Further, on the bonus type display unit 201, characters of “first bonus” are displayed to notify that the jackpot type is the first bonus advantageous to the player. In the normal state (low probability low base state), since it is executed by the first special symbol equivalence determination, the jackpot type advantageous to the player here means the 4R first jackpot. The first bonus (big hit) advantageous to the player means that the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shifts to the super effect mode (high probability / low base state). Also at this time, the first variation count display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

  FIG. 89 (d) shows a running (3R's) scene of a big hit game (4R first big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 88 (c). Based on executing the jackpot game from the normal state, to start a special period (duration period). Then, during the special period, a total earned profit display portion 164 (second profit information display portion) for displaying the gaming profit earned during the special period, and a second earned profit display portion 204 (first profit information display portion) And). The special period is ended when the gaming state is set to the normal state (low probability low base state) again in a period excluding the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89 (d), in the gaming situation in the big hit game, it was acquired in the special period in the upper center of the display screen 7a (first display screen) of the first image display device 7 provided in the gaming area A total earned profit display unit 164 is provided to indicate the total number of gaming profits (T: 00350 pt). This means that 350 gaming balls have been paid out during the special period.

  In the lower right of the display screen 7a, a second earned profit display unit 204 is provided (350/600) that indicates the total number of gaming profits earned in the running big hit game. This means that the maximum number of gaming balls (the number of winning balls) scheduled to be paid out in the main hit game is 600, and 350 playing balls have been paid out at present. During the big hit game at the first hit (big hit generated in the normal state), the value displayed on the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 are the same value. Therefore, either one may be displayed, or both may be displayed as in the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, "maximum number of game balls to be paid out in the big hit game (the number of winning balls)" is displayed only at the first hit, and thereafter only the number of game balls actually paid out is displayed. Display In the upper left of the display screen 7a, the number of rounds of the big hit game being executed is shown (3R: third round).

  Further, on the upper right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a launch direction display section 162 which indicates the launch direction (launch area) of the gaming ball. In the approximate center (other display area) of the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character pattern or background pattern is displayed. In addition, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a without being erased. In this way, even during the big hit game, from the previous big hit game to the current big hit game, it is necessary to perform the variable display (special symbol hit / fail judgment) of the value (78 times) displayed on the first change number display 203 It can be easily confirmed. In the other display areas of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a, jackpot game effects such as predetermined character patterns and background patterns are displayed.

  FIG. 89 (e) shows a scene in which the variable symbols of the rendering symbol have been executed a predetermined number of times in the high probability low base state set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is finished. Specifically, it is possible to grasp from the display (14 times) of the first change number display portion 203 that 14 times of change display of the effect symbol has been executed after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is finished. Since the gaming state after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is set to the high probability low base state (since it is not set to the low probability low base state), the special period is continuing. Here, in the second embodiment, as described above, the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183 are provided as the effect modes in the super effect mode, and the player in the predetermined selection period is determined. It is possible to select any of the effect modes by the selection of. Since the selection period and the selection method of the effect mode in the high probability low base state are the same as in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted. On the second display screen 71a, a second effect mode display unit 202 (selection mode display unit) for displaying the effect mode selected by the player, and a effect mode display unit 171 for displaying the effect mode in execution (first effect And a mode display unit).

  The character of "super effect mode" indicating that it is the super effect mode is displayed on the effect mode display unit 171, and the second effect mode display unit 202 displays the first super effect mode as the effect mode of the super effect mode. The letters “1st SM” indicating that it has been selected are displayed. Further, in the gaming situation in the high probability low base state (the first super effect mode), a total earned profit display portion 164 (in the lower part of the display screen 7a, showing the total number of gaming profits earned in the special period (the second period) A second profit information display unit) is provided (T: 00720 pt). This means that 720 gaming balls have been paid out during the special period. From the scene shown in FIG. 89 (d), 370 balls of game balls are additionally paid out during the remaining period of the big hit game and the period of 14 rotations of the first super effect mode.

  In the approximate center of the display screen 7a, effects for the first super effect mode such as a character pattern imitating an airplane are displayed. At the lower right of the display screen 7a, a second effect hold display unit 9d is provided. In addition, a second acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) is provided on the third display screen 72a. In the second earned profit display unit 204, in the gaming profit earned in the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d), in the high probability low base state after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (e) (small hit game ) To display the game profit obtained by adding the obtained game profit. That is, the second earned profit display unit 204 displays the total amount of gaming profit acquired in the period of one big hit game and the period until the next big hit game from the present big hit game. The period from the start of this one big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is also called the unit special period (the first period), and the gaming profit earned during this unit special period is the unit gaming profit (first profit information Also called).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the second earned profit display unit 204 displays the unit game profit and also displays the type of the previous big hit (big hit game) (First B: First Bonus). In this way, it is possible to easily grasp what kind of jackpot game and what type of gaming profit is obtained in the subsequent gaming state in the unit special period. Further, the change (increase) in the display (value) of the unit game profit continues as long as the first super effect mode shown in FIG. 89 (e) continues, and the game profit (prize ball) is awarded by the occurrence of the small hit game. When it is done (is paid out), the value of the total earned profit display portion 164 of the display screen 7a and the value of the second earned profit display portion 204 of the third display screen 72a increase in conjunction (by the same number) .

  In the scene shown in FIG. 89 (e), since the special period is the first unit special period, the value of the total earned profit display portion 164 matches the value of the second earned profit display portion 204. . If a special period continues for a long time and a plurality of unit special periods occur in response to the occurrence of a large hit game a plurality of times, these values will be different.

  In FIG. 89 (f), the first super effect mode (high probability and low base state) shown in FIG. 89 (e) continues, and the 29th effect symbol is produced from the end of the previous big hit game (FIG. 89 (d)). It shows a scene during the execution of the variable display. As shown in FIG. 89 (f), reach effect is generated in the variable display of the effect pattern of the 29th time. When reach effect occurs in the first super effect mode (high probability and low base state), the second effect mode display unit 202 and the effect mode displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. The display unit 171, the total acquisition profit display unit 164, the second effect suspension display unit 9d, the emission direction display unit 162, and the second acquisition profit display unit 204 are the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Hide from (delete). The reach effect is displayed on all the display screens of the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. Even during the reach effect, the first variation count display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

  FIG. 90 (g) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as FIG. 89 (f), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 89 (f) is a big hit, and the big hit effect pattern (“777 ") Shows the scene which stopped and displayed. Further, on the bonus type display unit 201, characters of "third bonus" are displayed to notify that the jackpot type is the third bonus advantageous to the player. In the first super effect mode (high probability and low base state), since the second special symbol equivalence determination is executed, the jackpot type advantageous to the player here means the 15R third jackpot. In addition, the 4R fourth jackpot is also a jackpot relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, the third bonus (big hit) which is advantageous to the player is a big hit game with the largest obtainable game profit, and the effect mode (playing state) after the end of the big hit game is the super effect mode (high probability low) Transition to the base state). Also at this time, the first variation count display unit 203 maintains the display without being erased.

  FIG. 90 (h) shows a running (13R) scene of a big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 90 (g). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 90 (h), in the gaming situation in the jackpot game, a total earned profit display portion 164 indicating the total number of gaming profits earned in the special period is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a (T : 02850 pt). This means that 2850 game balls have been paid out during the special period. Specifically, the game profit obtained in the previous big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) and 28 rotations of the first super effect mode (high probability low base state) until the current big hit game is executed. The value of the total earned profit display portion 164 is obtained by adding the gaming profit shown in the second earned profit display portion 204 in FIG. 90 (h) to the gaming profit obtained by adding the gaming profit obtained in the small hit game to : 02850 pt).

  In the lower right of the display screen 7a, a second earned profit display portion 204 is provided (01950 pt) which indicates the total number of gaming profits earned in the currently executing big hit game (FIG. 90 (h)). This means that 1950 balls have been paid out in a running big hit game. As shown in FIG. 90 (h) etc., in the present embodiment, the total earned profit display portion 164 and the second earned profit display portion are displayed during the variation display of the rendering symbols such as the high probability low base state etc. and in the big hit game. Different display devices are used to display 204. As a result, the profit display unit is set at an appropriate position according to the game situation, and the game profit obtained for the desired period is accurately and surely notified to the player, so that the player can grasp.

  In FIG. 90 (i), the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 90 (h) is set to the super effect mode (high probability low base state), and the super effect mode (high probability low base state) 22 shows the scene (the scene in which the variation display of the twenty-third presentation symbols is being executed) in which the variation display of the twenty-two production symbols has been executed. As shown in the second display screen 71 (a), the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, and the second super effect mode is set by the player's selection (2nd SM: second super effect mode) .

  Further, since the scene shown in FIG. 90 (i) is under execution of the second unit special period as described above, the third display screen 72a is provided with a plurality of second acquired profit display portions 204. There is. At the top of the third display screen 72a, the acquired gaming profit in the unit special period in progress is shown (third B, 2960 pt). As a result, it is possible to grasp that the big hit game generated in the current unit special period is the third bonus, and that 2960 game benefits are currently provided in the current unit special period. Also, below (in the lower part of) that, the acquired gaming profit in the previous unit special period is shown (1 B, 28, 885 pt). When the unit special period ends, a second fluctuation number display unit 205 (second bonus fluctuation number display unit, period information display unit) is added to the second earned profit display unit 204 (appendix). Then, by looking at the additional information, it is possible to grasp how long it took (after taking the number of times of the Nankai change) from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit game occurrence in the unit special period . In addition, the big hit game which occurred in the unit special period of the last time is the first bonus, and the number of times (the number of special symbol pass / fail judgments) of the variation display of the production symbol during the big hit game is 28 times (period information). , It can be grasped that 885 game profits have been earned in the previous unit special period.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (i), when the unit special period becomes plural due to the occurrence of a plurality of big hit games during the special period, the plurality of second earned profit display portions are displayed on the third display screen 72a. 204 is displayed. In this case, the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed (consecutively) is displayed more prominently than the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period which has already ended. Specifically, it displays in a larger size than the one that is currently being executed, or adds a decoration (such as adding a design or adding a box) that is not present in the one being executed. , Can be displayed in bold.

In the lower part of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display portion 164 is provided, and the amount of gaming profit earned during the entire special period, that is, the period obtained by adding all unit special periods is displayed (T: 03845pt ). Specifically, the two second acquired profit display units 204 of the third display screen 72a
When 2960 and 885 displayed on the are added, the value (3845) displayed on the total earned profit display portion 164 is obtained. Further, the change in the display (value) of the unit game profit displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period in execution continues as long as the super effect mode continues. Therefore, when a game profit (prize ball) is awarded due to the occurrence of a small hit game, a unit special during execution of the third display screen 72a is interlocked with an increase in the value of the total earned profit display portion 164 of the display screen 7a. The value of the (top) second earned profit display 204 corresponding to the period increases by the same number. In addition, since the value of the 2nd acquired profit display part 204 corresponding to the unit special period completed below is already decided, it does not change.

  In FIG. 91 (j), the second super effect mode (high probability and low base state) shown in FIG. 90 (i) continues, and the 45th effect pattern of the previous big hit game (FIG. 90 (h)) ends. It shows a scene where the variable display has ended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), reach effect occurs in the variable display of the 45th effect pattern, and the ally character loses the enemy character in the confrontation effect in the reach effect, and a big hit to the player Shows the scene where Although illustration is omitted, after this, the big hit game (the 4th bonus) which is disadvantageous to the player on the basis of the said big hit is executed, the game state after the said big hit game end, low certain high base state or high certain high base It becomes a state, and the high probability low base state which is a game state advantageous to the player ends.

  In addition, even in the 4th bonus (2R 5th big hit game, 2R 6th big hit game, 2R 7th big hit game, or 2R 8th big hit game), it is possible to obtain gaming profit, but it is comparable to other big hit games It is a small amount. Therefore, even during the execution of the big hit game, the player is displayed with difficulty in recognizing the execution as compared with other big hit games. Further, for the unit special period including the big hit game relating to the fourth bonus, the corresponding acquired second acquired profit display unit 204 does not display acquired profits. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game), and the decline of the game fun is minimized. Make it possible to prevent. In addition, even when the game profit is obtained in the big hit game concerning the 4th bonus, even if it is displayed only on the total earned profit display section 164 without adding to the second earned profit display section 204 (without displaying) Good. In addition, the game profit acquired in the big hit game relating to the fourth bonus may be added to the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the previous unit special period, assuming that it has been acquired during the previous unit special period. In the present embodiment, when the game profit is obtained in the big hit game relating to the fourth bonus, the addition display is not performed on any of the second acquired profit display unit 204 and the total acquired profit display unit 164.

  In the scene shown in FIG. 91 (k), a big hit game against the player is executed based on the big hit which is against the player shown in FIG. 91 (j), and after the big hit game is over, the effect mode is set. It shows a scene in which the count effect mode is set. As described above, the result of the second special symbol hit or not determination is an adverse jackpot (2R fifth jackpot, 2R sixth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot or 2R eighth jackpot), the count set after the end of the jackpot game The effect mode is a second count effect mode. In addition, the result of the first special symbol equality determination becomes an adverse big hit (4R second big hit), and the count effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is the first count effect mode. As shown in FIG. 91 (k), in the second count effect mode 185, the remaining period display unit 206 is provided at the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the number of times of variation display of the effect symbol is displayed on the remaining period display unit 206 (special By displaying the remaining number of symbol success / failure determinations), it is possible to play a game while grasping the remaining period of the second count effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the first count effect mode 184, the remaining period display unit 206 displays the remaining period (number of times) of the first count effect mode except near the end of the first count effect mode (for example, five times before the end). It does not have (Fig. 94 (e) and (f)). This point is that the display mode is partially different between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185. In addition, in the gaming situation where the effect mode (playing state) is set to the count mode (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), a total earned profit display portion 164 is provided below the display screen 7a. There is. Further, on the third display screen 72a, three (plural) second acquired profit display portions 204 are provided. Since the count mode is currently in progress, the letter "C mode" indicating the count mode is displayed on the top second acquired profit display unit 204. As described above, in the big hit game to set the count mode, and in the count mode (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the second obtainable profit display unit 204 because there is a small amount of obtainable game profit. Do not show gain earned on.

  Further, the second acquired profit display unit 204 at the top of the third display screen 72a indicates a unit special period currently in progress, and the second acquired profit display unit 204 below that is the previous unit special period which has already ended. Furthermore, the second acquired profit display unit 204 below it indicates the last two previous unit special periods. In this embodiment, it is possible to display up to three second earned profit display portions 204 on the third display screen 72a, and when four or more big hit games (unit special period) occur, the oldest ones are listed in order from the oldest one. It is supposed to be erased. The second acquired profit display portion 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a may be any number of four or more.

  In FIG. 91 (l), the count mode (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) shown in FIG. 91 (k) continues, and the 40th from the end of the previous big hit game (FIG. 91 (j)) The result of the fluctuation display of the production design shows the scene that became a big hit. FIG. 92 (m) shows a running (10R) scene of a big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 91 (l). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 92 (m), in the gaming situation in the jackpot game, a total earned profit display portion 164 indicating the total number of gaming profits earned in the special period is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a (T : 05385 pt). In the lower right of the display screen 7a, there is provided a second earned profit display section 204 (01450 pt) which indicates the total number of gaming profits earned in the running big hit game (FIG. 92 (m)).

  In FIG. 92 (n), the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 92 (m) is set to the super effect mode (high probability low base state), and the super effect mode (high probability low base state) 4) shows a scene in which the variable display of the production design is performed four times (a scene during the execution of the variable display of the production design for the fifth time). As shown in the second display screen 71a, the first super effect mode is set by the player's selection (1st SM).

  Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90 (n), since the fourth unit special period in the special period is being executed, the number of second acquired profit display portions 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a is exceeded. There is. Therefore, the oldest second acquired profit display unit 204 is deleted, and the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the newly executed unit special period is provided at the top (the third B, 2350 pt). In addition, from the “C mode” displayed in the second acquired profit display unit 204 below, it is possible to grasp that the special period is continued by the pullback (big hit occurrence) in the count mode. According to the flow described above, the total earned profit display portion 164 and the second earned profit display portion 204 are displayed on the predetermined display screen in accordance with the game situation.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a scene in which the big hit rendering symbol (“666”) is stopped and displayed in the normal state (low probability and low base state) as a big hit. On the bonus type display unit 201 of the display screen 7a, "second bonus" is displayed. In the second bonus, the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game is set to the super effect mode (high probability low base state) according to the result of the game effect (counter game effect) executed during the big hit game And the count mode (low probability high base state) may be set. The count mode in this case is the first count effect mode 184.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a big hit game (second bonus) executed based on the big hit shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the big hit game or with the end of the final round, a victory effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed, and it is indicated that the super effect mode (high probability low base state) is set after the big hit game is over. It is done. In FIG. 93 (c), the first super effect mode (high probability low base state) is set after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 93 (b), and in the first super effect mode (high probability low base state), It shows a scene in which the variable display (special symbol pass / fail judgment) of the rendering symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (14 times).

  FIG. 94 (d) shows a jackpot game (second bonus) executed based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the big hit game or the end of the final round, defeat effect that the enemy character defeats the ally character is executed, and it is indicated that the count effect mode (low probability high base state) is set after the big hit game ends. It is done. In FIG. 94 (e), the count mode (low probability high base state) is set after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 94 (d), and in the count mode (low probability high base state), the predetermined number of times (35 times) It shows a scene where the variable display (special symbol judgment) of the effect pattern is executed. As described above, while the count mode shown in FIG. 94 (e) is the first count effect mode 184, the display screen is displayed just before the end of the first count effect mode 184 (a predetermined number of times within the remaining five times). The remaining period display unit is not set to 7a. This means that there are two types of execution periods set in the second count effect mode of 50 times or 100 times, while the execution period set in the first count effect mode is only one type of 100 times. It depends on.

  FIG. 94 (f) shows a scene where the variable mode display of the effect design is performed a predetermined number of times from the count mode shown in FIG. 94 (e) and the count mode is advanced. As shown in the first variation count display section 203 of the second display screen 71a, the variation display (special symbol suitability judgment) of the 96 production symbols has been executed since the end of the last big hit game, and the count mode is being executed. It will end when the remaining 3 times of the variation display of the production design is done excluding variation indication. In order to indicate that the end time of this count mode is near, in this embodiment, when the remaining number is 3, the remaining period display section 206 is provided on the display screen 7a, and the last 3 times, the last 2 times, the last 1 time Display. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the end time of the count mode in advance.

  As described above, according to the game situation, in order to display the amount of gaming profit earned during different periods of the special period (the consecutive period) respectively on the plurality of display devices separately arranged, the player wants the desired period It becomes possible to easily and reliably grasp the gaming profit acquired in the (special period or unit special period). Further, by changing the display device to be displayed according to the game situation, it is possible to easily and surely grasp the game profit.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, depending on the gaming state, the case of playing the left hitting game in which the game ball is fired to the left gaming area 3A (first gaming area, first firing area) and There is a case where a right-handed game in which a game ball is fired by playing the game ball in the area 3B (second game area, second launch area) is played. Specifically, the low probability low base state proceeds the game by left hitting game, the low probability high base state, the high probability high base state, the high probability low base state, the big hit gaming state advances the game by right hitting game It is assumed. And, when the gaming state changes (in the changing scene at the time of change), in order to inform the player of the shooting direction (launch area) of the gaming ball, a launch direction alerting effect (launch area alerting effect, instruction effect, Execute the launch area instruction effect). In this embodiment, a scene changes from a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played to a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played, or a scene in which a specific condition (big hit) is established in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played. Or, it is intended to diversify the effect mode of the shooting direction notification effect which is performed in a scene etc. which changes from the gaming state in which the right-handed game is played to the gaming state in which the left-handed game is performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured with the same specifications as the first and second embodiments, and the low probability low base state proceeds with the game by left strike game, and the low probability high base state, high probability high base State, high probability low base state, jackpot gaming state is to play the game by right-handed game. In the effect mode, the normal effect mode advances the game by left-handed game, and the super effect mode, the first count effect mode, the second count effect mode, and the effect mode during various bonuses advance the game by right-handed game Do. Further, in the gaming state (rendering mode) in the case of performing the right-handed game, the number of types is set larger than in the gaming state (rendering mode) in the case of performing the left-handed game. In order to inform the player of the type of the gaming state (rendering mode) in advance so as to be easily grasped in advance, or in order to inform the player of inferring the kind in advance to some extent, a plurality of different presentation modes. A launch direction notification effect is provided.

  That is, more types of launch direction notification effects for reporting right-handed games are set than for launch direction notification effects for reporting left-handed games. Thereby, when the right-handed game is executed, the player proceeds with the game while deducing (while recognizing) which gaming state (rendering mode) is to be executed. This will enhance the fun of the game.

  FIG. 95 and FIG. 96 show a first emission direction notification effect 211 (first instruction effect) executed when the aforementioned first bonus or third bonus is executed. That is, the first firing direction notification effect 211 is executed when it is decided to shift to a high probability low base state (super effect mode, second specific effect mode) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is over. Ru. As a result, the player who sees the first emission direction notification effect 211 recognizes that the subsequent game will be advantageous to him / her, and it becomes possible to enhance the game interest.

  In FIG. 95 (a), in the gaming state (low probability and low base state) in which the left-handed game is played, the result of the special symbol equivalence determination (first special symbol equivalence determination) becomes a big hit (specific result), and the presentation symbol (special symbol) Shows the scene stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol ("777") showing the first bonus. FIG. 95 (b) is a game effect to be executed subsequently to FIG. 95 (a), and is a first firing direction notification effect 211 which starts before the big hit game starts after the big hit (first bonus) is determined. The start timing of the first firing direction notification effect 211 is a predetermined timing before the start of the big hit game after the determination stop of the big hit symbol. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has been fired in the firing direction indicated by the first firing direction alerting effect 211 (for example, when the big hit game starts, the game ball is terminated) When passing through the start gate 29). Further, the end time may be a timing when a predetermined time has passed since the big hit game started.

  As described above, the first firing direction informing effect 211 is also an informing effect informing that after the end of the big hit game, the player shifts to a (most) advantageous game state (effect mode indicating that it is advantageous) for the player. . Therefore, the display screen 7a (middle display portion) of the first image display device 7, the display screen 71a (left display portion) of the second image display device 71, and the display screen 72a (right display portion) of the third image display device 72. The display direction of the three display devices is used to execute the emission direction notification effect. As shown in FIGS. 95 (b) to 95 (d), the first emission direction notification effect 211 is composed of a character image 211a and a pictorial image 211b. The character image 211a which comprises 1st discharge direction alerting production | generation 211 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the 1st image display apparatus 7 which is a display apparatus for main effects among three display apparatuses. The first image display device 7 displays the variation display of the design symbol (decision stop display), the display of the effect suspension display, the game effect such as the reach effect, and the second image display device 71 and the third image which are display devices for other effects. It is displayed as the subject rather than the display device 72. Therefore, the first image display device 7 is also referred to as a main effect display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are also referred to as a sub effect display device.

  By displaying on the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device to which the player pays most attention, the character image that directly conveys the player the direction of the emission (the emission area) by characters is assured to the player. Can be recognized by In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the player from erroneously causing the shooting direction and to prevent unexpected disadvantages. Further, by displaying the specific character 144 (picture image 211b) together with the character image 211a, a rendering effect is enhanced, and a highly entertaining game effect is provided.

  Further, the pictorial image 211 b constituting the first emission direction notification effect 211 is displayed using all three display devices. The pictorial image 211 b is formed of an arc-shaped (semi-circular) effect image using display areas (71 a, 7 a, 72 a) of three display devices. In addition, as time passes, on the arc, from left to right (the second display screen 71a → the first display screen 7a → the third display screen 72a), a plurality of direction suggestion images 211c (the upper side of the arc image) By repeatedly running the substantially triangle image), it is possible to indicate to the player that the launch direction is the right direction, and to allow the player to recognize the launch direction. FIGS. 95 (b), (c) and 96 (d) are diagrams showing scenes advancing in time series. In FIG. 95 (b), the direction suggesting image 211c is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the first display screen 7a, and in FIG. 95 (c), the direction suggesting image 211c moves to the right. 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in FIG. 96 (d), the direction suggestion image 211c is further moved in the right direction, and is displayed on the first display screen 7a and the third display screen 72a. Thereafter, the emission direction notification effects in FIGS. 95 (b), (c) and 96 (d) are repeated as time passes.

  As described above, the character image 211a is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 in order to surely convey the shooting direction to the player, and the player is informed that the pictorial image 211b has become an advantageous jackpot. The display is performed in a flashy manner, using more display devices (three display devices) than the other big hit, in order to convey to the. This makes it possible to enhance the game interest and increase the player's expectation for the acquisition of a large amount of game profit. In FIG. 96 (e), the player shoots the gaming ball to the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area) according to the first firing direction notification effect 211, and the gaming ball passes the start gate 29. Fig. 95 (a) shows a scene in which the big hit game (first bonus) is started. During the big hit game shown in FIG. 96 (e), the fifth emission direction notification effect 215 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The fifth emission direction notification effect 215 is executed during the big hit game started by the first emission direction notification effect 211, and is displayed in pink (a first specific display mode).

  In addition, since the big hit game is started by playing the right-handed game according to the first firing direction notification effect 211 and the right-handed game is continued only after that, the fifth firing direction notification effect 215 is confirmed in a relatively small size Is displayed. In the first emission direction notification effect 211, unlike the other emission direction notification effects involving a big hit game, no pictorial image is suggested that suggests the passage of the start gate 29. In addition, the character representation of the character image is also different. Also, the specific character 144 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that it is a special launch direction notification effect different from others, and to show the player that a (most) advantageous big hit has occurred for the player.

  FIGS. 97 and 98 show a second emission direction notification effect 212 (second instruction effect) that is executed when the above-mentioned second bonus is executed. That is, the second firing direction notification effect 212 changes to the high probability low base state (super effect mode, second specific effect mode) after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state (count mode (first count) It is executed when transitioning to the effect mode) and when there is a second bonus. Note that the low probability high base state (first count effect mode) is more advantageous than the low probability low base state (normal effect mode), but more disadvantageous gaming state than the high probability low base state (super effect mode) Production mode). This makes it possible for the player who has seen the second emission direction notification effect 212 to be more tense and to increase the fun of the game, expecting the subsequent game to be advantageous to itself.

  In addition, after the execution of the second firing direction notification effect 212, whether to shift to a low probability high base state (count mode), or to shift to a high probability low base state (super effect mode), the player is the second firing direction It is notified by the game effect during the big hit game (second bonus) which is started by performing the right-handed game according to the notification effect 212. For example, in a battle effect (purpose achievement effect) executed during a big hit game, if the ally character defeats the enemy character (if the purpose is achieved), the gaming state (production mode) after the end of the big hit game is high probability low base state (Super production mode) is set. On the other hand, in the battle effect (purpose achievement effect) executed during the big hit game, if the ally character loses the enemy character (if the purpose can not be achieved), the gaming state (production mode) after the big hit game is low probability and high It is set to the base state (count mode).

  In FIG. 97 (a), in the gaming state (low probability and low base state) in which the left-handed game is played, the result of the special symbol hit / fail decision (first special symbol hit / fail decision) becomes a big hit (specific result) and the effect symbol (special symbol) Shows the scene stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol ("666") which shows the 2nd bonus. FIG. 97 (b) is a game effect to be executed subsequently to FIG. 97 (a), and is a second firing direction notification effect 212 which starts before the big hit game starts after the big hit (second bonus) is determined. The start timing of the second emission direction notification effect 212 is, as with the first emission direction notification effect 211, a predetermined timing before the start of the big hit game after the determination stop of the big hit symbol. Further, the end timing of the second emission direction notification effect 212 is the same as that of the first emission direction notification effect 211.

  As described above, in the second firing direction notification effect 212, after the end of the big hit game, when transitioning to the (most) advantageous high probability low base state (super effect mode) for the player, and from the high probability low base state It is also a notification effect to notify that there is a case of transition to the disadvantageous low probability high base state (count mode) and that there is. That is, as compared with the first emission direction notification effect 211, since it is a disadvantageous notification effect, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (middle display portion) and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 (right display Using the display screens of the two display devices of (a) and (b), the emission direction notification effect is executed. The second emission direction notification effect 212 makes the number of display devices used for the emission direction notification effect smaller than that of the first emission direction notification effect 211.

  Thereby, the second emission direction notification effect 212 indicates that the notification effect is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the first emission direction notification effect 211. Further, since the number of display devices to be used is different, the player can clearly recognize the difference in the emission direction notification effect. In addition, in order to notify the game of right-handed game, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 provided at the right of the game area (inside the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 (left display section) Using the display screens of the two display devices of the display unit 72 and the display screen 72a (right display unit) of the third image display device 72, the emission direction notification effect is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (b), (c) and 98 (d), the second emission direction notification effect 212 is composed of a character image 212a and a pictorial image 212b. Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (b) etc., the second emission direction notification effect 212 superimposes and displays the character image 212a and the pictorial image 212b, unlike the first emission direction notification effect 211. On the other hand, the first emission direction notification effect 211 displays the character image 211 a and the pictorial image 211 b so as not to overlap. Also in this display position relationship, the display mode of the notification effect is different.

  Similar to the first emission direction notification effect 211, the character image 212a constituting the second emission direction notification effect 212 is a display of the first image display device 7 which is a main effect display device among the three display devices. It is displayed on the screen 7a. By displaying on the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device to which the player pays most attention, the character image that directly conveys the player the direction of the emission (the emission area) by characters is assured to the player. Can be recognized by

  Further, the pictorial image 212 b constituting the second emission direction notification effect 212 is displayed using two display devices in the middle and the right. The picture image 212b is formed of a curved arrow image showing a right direction (right play area) using the display areas (7a, 72a) of the two display devices. The effect image extends downward from the top of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 to the center and then extends in the upper right direction from the top to the third image display device 72, as shown in FIG. It has a curved arrow shape (arrow image) extending to the display screen 72a.

  Also, as time passes, the arrow image is repeatedly run from left to right (from the first display screen 7a to the third display screen 72a) and the direction suggestion image 212c (indicated by the hatched lines). It is possible to make the player recognize the launch direction by suggesting that the launch direction is the right direction. FIGS. 97 (b), (c) and 98 (d) are diagrams showing scenes advancing in time series. In FIG. 97 (b), the direction suggestion image 212c is displayed on the left side of the first display screen 7a (the start side of the arrow), and in FIG. 97 (c), the direction suggestion image 212c moves to the right. Thus, they are displayed on the right side of the first display screen 7a (about the middle of the arrow). Further, in FIG. 98 (d), the direction suggestion image 212c is further moved in the right direction and displayed on the third display screen 72a. Thereafter, the emission direction notification effects of FIGS. 97 (b), (c) and 98 (d) are repeated as time passes.

  As described above, the character image 212 a is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7 in the same manner as the first emission direction notification effect 211 in order to reliably inform the player of the emission direction. Then, the first emission direction notification that the pictorial image 212b has been determined to be in a relatively advantageous state to indicate that the pictorial image 212b may be in a relatively advantageous state or may be in a relatively disadvantageous state. The display is performed prominently using a smaller number of display devices (two display devices) than the effect. As a result, the player's sense of tension and expectation for the subsequent game is enhanced, and the game interest is enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the acquisition of a large amount of game profits. Also, although the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212 are effects that similarly notify emission in the right direction, the number of display devices used for the emission direction notification effect is different, and The display modes of the image 212a and the pictorial image 212b (display mode, advancing angle of image indicating right direction, advancing path of image indicating right direction) are also different.

  In FIG. 98 (e), the player shoots the gaming ball to the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area) according to the second firing direction notification effect 212, and the gaming ball passes the start gate 29. Fig. 97 (a) shows a scene in which the big hit game (second bonus) is started. During the big hit game shown in FIG. 98 (e), a sixth shooting direction notification effect 216 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The sixth emission direction notification effect 216 is executed during the big hit game started by the second emission direction notification effect 212, and has the same display mode as the fifth emission direction notification effect 215, and is pink (the first specification Display mode).

  In addition, since the big hit game is started by playing the right-handed game according to the second firing direction notification effect 212 and the right-handed game is continued only after that, the sixth firing direction notification effect 216 is confirmed in a relatively small size Is displayed. In the second emission direction notification effect 212, unlike the first emission direction notification effect 211, an entrance suggestion image 212d which is a pictorial image suggesting the passage of the start gate 29 is provided. In addition, the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212 are also different in the character expression of the character image. Also, the specific character 144 is not displayed. This makes it possible to recognize that the special launch direction notification effect is different from the others, and to show the player that the second bonus has occurred.

  FIGS. 99 and 100 show a third emission direction notification effect 213 (third instruction effect) which is executed when the above-mentioned fourth bonus is executed. That is, the third firing direction notification effect 213 is executed at the fourth bonus time to shift to the count mode (second count effect mode) after the end of the big hit game. In addition, as described above, the fourth bonus is executed when the result of the second special symbol qualification determination is the 2R fifth big hit, the 2R sixth big hit, the 2R seventh big hit, the 2R eighth big hit. The second count effect mode has a low probability high base state and a high probability high base state, and in the high probability high base state, it is advantageous for the player when the predetermined number of fluctuation display has elapsed. It will shift to the high probability low base state. However, in the second count effect mode, in many cases, the low probability high base state (7/9) and the possibility of the high probability high base state is set to 2/9. In addition, when returning to the player's leftward strike game (normal state) which is relatively advantageous to the player from the rightward strike game, which is relatively advantageous to the player, it always returns via this count mode (second count effect mode).

  Therefore, it is recognized that the count mode (second count effect mode) is an adverse effect mode informing that the advantageous gaming state for the player is ended. In fact, among the three types of right-handed notification effects (the first emission direction notification effect 211, the second emission direction notification effect 212, the third emission direction notification effect 213), the possibility of being at an adverse state is the highest. It is an effect that reports the occurrence of a bonus. Thereby, the player who has seen the third emission direction notification effect 213 recognizes that the end of the advantageous gaming state is approaching, and is promoted from the count mode to the super effect mode, or the high base state is counted. Expecting to generate a big hit again during the mode, it is possible to enhance the sense of tension and enhance the game interest.

  In FIG. 99 (a), in the gaming state (high probability and low base state) in which the right-handed game is played, the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment (the second special symbol pass / fail judgment) is a big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, It shows a scene in which the 2R seventh big hit or the 2R eighth big hit) is stopped and the rendering symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the fourth bonus symbol ("212"). As for the fourth bonus, the opening time of the big winning opening in the big hit game is set to be shorter than the first bonus, the second bonus and the third bonus, and the obtainable game profit is set to be small. Therefore, like the first bonus, the second bonus, and the third bonus, instead of stopping and displaying the same 3-digit identical design symbols, at least one symbol out of the three digits is a combination of different production symbols Stop display. That is, the same effect pattern (off effect pattern) as that at off time is displayed in a stopped manner, and the player is not positively notified that the game has been a big hit. At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit. With such a stop indication of the out-of-order effect design and a defeat effect that defeats the battle, the subsequent effect mode (playing state) shifts to an adverse effect mode (playing state) or becomes an adverse big hit Alert you to something.

  FIG. 99 (b) is a game effect to be executed subsequent to FIG. 99 (a), and is a third firing direction notification effect 213 which starts before the big hit game starts after the big hit (fourth bonus) is decided. The start timing of the third emission direction notification effect 213 is, as with the first emission direction notification effect 211, a predetermined timing before the start of the big hit game after the determination stop of the big hit symbol (special symbol). Further, unlike the first emission direction notification effect 211, the end timing of the third emission direction notification effect 213 is after the end of the big hit game (the fourth bonus).

  As described above, the third firing direction notification effect 213 is advantageous after the big hit game ends, when it shifts to a low probability high base state (count mode) relatively disadvantageous for the player, and after a predetermined number of fluctuation display. It is also a notification effect of notifying that there is a case of transition to a high probability high base state (count mode) that can be promoted to a high probability low base state, and that there is. However, the possibility of the low probability high base state is higher than the possibility of the high probability high base state. That is, as compared with the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212, since it is an adverse notification effect, one display device of the display screen 7a (middle display portion) of the first image display device 7 Using the display screen of, the emission direction notification effect is executed. The third emission direction notification effect 213 has a smaller number of display devices used for the emission direction notification effect than the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212. Thus, the third emission direction notification effect 213 indicates that the notification effect is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212. Further, since the number of display devices to be used is different, the player can clearly recognize the difference in the emission direction notification effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (b), (c) and 100 (d), the third emission direction notification effect 213 is composed of a character image 213a and a pictorial image 213b. Further, as shown in FIG. 99 (b) etc., the third emission direction notification effect 213 displays the character image 213a and the pictorial image 213b so as not to overlap similarly to the first emission direction notification effect 211. . On the other hand, the character of the character image 213a is the same as the character image 212a, but the second emission direction notification effect 212 displays the third emission direction notification while the character image 212a and the pictorial image 212b are superimposed and displayed. The effect 213 does not superimpose and display the character image 213a and the pictorial image 213b. Also in this display position relationship, the display mode of the notification effect is different.

  The character image 213a constituting the third emission direction notification effect 213 is a main effect display device among the three display devices, as in the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212. It is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7. By displaying on the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device to which the player pays most attention, the character image that directly conveys the player the direction of the emission (the emission area) by characters is assured to the player. Can be recognized by That is, in all of the first emission direction notification effect 211, the second emission direction notification effect 212, and the third emission direction notification effect 213, a character image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. Also, none of the character images are displayed on the display screen 71 a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72 a of the third image display device 72.

  Further, the pictorial image 213b constituting the third emission direction notification effect 213 is displayed using only one display device (the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) in the approximate center. The pictorial image 213 b is formed of a rendering image of a curved arrow indicating the right direction (right gaming area) using the display area (7 a) of one display device. The effect image has a curved arrow shape (as shown in FIG. 99 (b) and the like, drawing an arc that bulges upward from the lower left to the upper right of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) It is an arrow image).

  In addition, as the arrow image is repeatedly run from left to right with the passage of time, the direction suggesting image 213c (portion shown in black) is repeatedly run to suggest to the player that the shooting direction is the right direction. , It becomes possible to make the player recognize the firing direction with certainty. FIGS. 99 (b), (c) and 100 (d) are diagrams showing scenes advancing in time series. In FIG. 99 (b), the direction suggesting image 213c is displayed on the lower left of the first display screen 7a (the end of the arrow), and in FIG. 99 (c), the direction suggesting image 213c moves to the right. Thus, it is displayed near the center of the first display screen 7a (about the middle of the arrow). Further, in FIG. 100 (d), the direction suggestion image 213c is further moved in the right direction, and is displayed on the upper right side (end side of the arrow) of the first display screen 7a. Thereafter, the emission direction notification effects in FIGS. 99 (b), (c) and 100 (d) are repeated as time passes.

  As described above, the character image 213a transmits the display direction to the player with certainty, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 as well as the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212. Display on The picture image 213b is determined to shift to the count mode which is a relatively disadvantageous effect mode, and has a smaller number of display devices than the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the second emission direction notification effect 212 The display is carried out in an easy-to-understand manner using one display device). The count mode is an effect mode in which the advantageous state (right-handed game) is ended, and the transition to the normal effect mode by the left-handed game can be made.

  As a result, the sense of tension for the end of the player's advantageous state in the subsequent game and the expectation for the withdrawal of the big hit in the count mode are enhanced, and the fun of the game is enhanced. Further, although the first emission direction notification effect 211, the second emission direction notification effect 212, and the third emission direction notification effect 213 are all effects for notifying emission in the right direction, the display device used for the emission direction notification effect The number of used images is different, and the display modes of the pictorial image 212a and the pictorial image 212b (the display form, the advancing angle of the image indicating the right direction, and the advancing path of the image indicating the right direction) are also different.

  In FIG. 100 (e), the player shoots the gaming ball to the right gaming area 3B (the second gaming area) in accordance with the third ejection direction notification effect 213, and the gaming ball passes the start gate 29, and 99A shows a scene in which the count mode (second count effect mode) is started after the big hit game (fourth bonus) generated in FIG. 99 (a) is finished. The fourth bonus is a bonus where the opening time of the big winning opening is set in a short period of time as compared to other bonuses, and is a bonus which is not scheduled to obtain a large amount of gaming profits. The third firing direction notification effect 213 shown in 99 (b), (c) and FIG. 100 (d) is continued, and when the big hit game is over, the count mode shown in FIG. 100 (e) is displayed.

  During the count mode shown in FIG. 100E, the seventh emission direction notification effect 217 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The seventh emission direction notification effect 217 is executed during the effect mode after the end of the big hit game started by the third emission direction notification effect 213, and the fifth emission direction notification effect 215 and the sixth emission direction notification effect 216 The display mode is different from the display mode in FIG.

  In addition, since the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game according to the third firing direction notification effect 213, and the right-handed game is only continued thereafter, the seventh shooting direction notification effect 217 is confirmed in a relatively small size Is displayed. In the third emission direction notification effect 213, unlike the first emission direction notification effect 211, an entering suggestion image 212d which is a pictorial image suggesting the passage of the start gate 29 is provided. Further, the first emission direction notification effect 211 and the third emission direction notification effect 213 are also different in the character expression of the character image. Also, the specific character 144 is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the special emission direction notification effect is different from the others, and to show the player that the player is transitioned to the adverse effect mode (the occurrence of the fourth bonus).

  The first emission direction notification effect 211, the second emission direction notification effect 212, and the third emission direction notification effect 213 described above are notification effects that promote release to the right game area 3B (second game area), which is the same release direction. Met. Next, a description will be given of a shooting notification effect when changing from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, that is, a notification effect that urges the player to shoot into the left gaming area 3A (first gaming area) different from these. The number of types of left-handed notification effects is smaller than that of right-handed notification effects, and only one is set. This is also because the game state in which the game is advanced by the left-handed game is only one game state of low probability and low base state.

  In FIG. 101 and FIG. 102, the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 (fourth instruction executed when the count mode (first count effect mode, second count effect mode) described above ends and the transition to the normal effect mode is performed. Show). That is, in the fourth emission direction notification effect 211, it is determined that the count mode set after the big hit game ends (the low probability high base state ends), and the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode If, it will be executed. As a result, the player who sees the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 recognizes that the advantageous state is over and the subsequent game is in the normal state (low probability low base state).

  In FIG. 101 (a), in the count mode (low probability high base state) for performing a right-handed game, the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment (second special symbol pass / fail judgment) of the preset number of times (50th) is out ( It shows a scene in which the rendering symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the symbol ("357") indicating the detachment. FIG. 101 (b) shows a scene that displays the end of the count mode and the total number of gaming profits acquired during the continuous play in the game effect to be executed subsequently to FIG. 101 (a). Further, FIG. 101 (c) is a game effect to be executed subsequently to FIG. 101 (b), in which the effect mode is returned to the normal effect mode, and the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is executed.

  The start timing of the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is a predetermined timing after the variable display of the number of times (specific number of times) predetermined in the count mode is performed and the end condition of the count mode is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is displayed after the end condition of the count mode is satisfied and the notification effect of the end of the count mode and the obtained gaming profit notification effect are finished. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has been fired in the firing direction indicated by the fourth firing direction alerting effect 214 (for example, entering the ball entering a predetermined ball entrance) When is detected). Note that the end time may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (at least once), or a predetermined time may elapse from the start of the fourth emission direction notification effect 214.

  As described above, the fourth emission direction notification effect 211 is a notification effect to notify that the emission direction is changed from the right direction to the left direction so far in the normal state (low probability low base state, normal effect mode). . Therefore, the display screen 7a (middle display portion) of the first image display device 7, the display screen 71a (left display portion) of the second image display device 71, and the display screen 72a (right display portion) of the third image display device 72. The display direction of the three display devices is used to execute the emission direction notification effect. As shown in FIGS. 101 (c), 102 (d) and 102 (e), the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is composed of a character image 214a and a pictorial image 214b. The character image 211 a constituting the fourth emission direction notification effect 211 is a display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7 which is a main effect display device among the three display devices, and a display of the second image display device 71. It is displayed on the screen 71 a and the display screen 72 a of the third image display device 72.

  Displaying a character image 214a that directly conveys the player the direction of shooting (the shooting area) to the player by characters on all three display devices including the first image display device 7 which is the main effect display device that the player pays most attention to Thus, the player can be made to recognize the change in the firing direction with certainty. Further, the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is displayed using all three display devices in order to make the emission direction more noticeable in order to switch from the state of being a right-handed game to the left-handed game. In addition, since the gaming state is the most inconvenient low probability low base state for the player, it is necessary to make the player launch in the wrong firing direction, and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring. If such an erroneous firing occurs, the player may decrease the interest in the game and the player may end the game.

  Further, the pictorial image 214b constituting the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is displayed using all three display devices, similarly to the character image 214a. The pictorial image 214 b is formed of a strip-like (linear form having a predetermined width) using display areas (72 a, 7 a, 71 a) of three display devices. In addition, with the passage of time, from the right to the left (the third display screen 72a → the first display screen 7a → the second display screen 71a), the direction suggestion image 214c (arrows and characters in the strip image) By repeatedly running the image itself), it is possible to indicate to the player that the launch direction is the left direction, and to allow the player to recognize the launch direction. Specifically, a character image 214a ("Please return to the left") superimposed on the band is scrolled from right to left on the band. In addition, the arrow in the strip image blinks on the spot.

  FIGS. 101 (c) and 102 (d), 102 (e) are diagrams showing scenes advancing in time series, and the character image 214a which is the direction suggestion image 214c is displayed from the third display screen 72a to the first display screen 7a. The display is moved leftward from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a (scroll display in the left direction). After that, the emission direction notification effects shown in FIGS. 101 (c) and 102 (d) and 102 (e) are repeated as time passes.

  As described above, the character image 214a is displayed on the display screens of the three display devices including the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 in order to surely convey the shooting direction to the player, and the pictorial image 211b is also displayed. Similarly, the display is performed in a conspicuous manner by using three display devices similar to the notification effect using the most display devices among the other emission direction notification effects. This makes it possible for the player to surely recognize that the shooting direction has changed. In FIG. 102 (e), the game ball is caused to fire on the left game area according to the fourth firing direction notification effect 214, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the effect symbol (first special symbol) changes. Indicates the scene that started. Even after the start of the variable display, the display of the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is maintained for a predetermined time. Further, FIG. 102 (f) shows a scene following the screen of FIG. 102 (e) in which the display of the fourth emission direction notification effect 214 is ended when the effect pattern continues to be changed for a predetermined time.

  As described above, the number of launch direction notification effects for reporting the execution of the left-handed game is set smaller than the number of launch direction notification effects for reporting the execution of the right-handed game. In addition, a plurality of types (three or more types) of shooting direction notification effects for reporting the execution of the right-handed game are set, and all of them have different display modes. In addition, they differ in the character image indicating the emission direction, the picture image, the positional relationship between the character image and the picture image, the number of display devices used for the notification effect, etc., and a large number of emission direction notification effects are provided. Also, the player can easily identify them. Further, since the launch direction notification effect is made different corresponding to the type of the big hit (type of effect mode), the player estimates the subsequent game state and the effect mode by looking at the launch direction notification effect, It becomes possible to grasp. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  The sub control board 90 (sub control unit) that executes the instruction effect for designating the above-described firing direction (firing region) is referred to as "firing region designating means". Further, the first bonus and the third bonus described above are also referred to as "first special game", the second bonus as "second special game", and the fourth bonus as "third special game". Further, the sub control board 90 (sub control unit) for setting the rendering mode (normal rendering mode, count mode, super rendering mode, etc.) is also referred to as "rendering mode setting means". In addition, the count mode is also referred to as “first specific effect mode”, the super effect mode as “second specific effect mode”, and the normal effect mode as “third specific effect mode”.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. In this embodiment, an aspect of displaying the number of times (the number of times of execution) of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) will be described. FIG. 103A shows one scene in execution of the super effect mode (second super effect mode). On the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the first variation count display section 203 (“The first bonus variation count display is shown to indicate the number of variation displays of the special symbol) since the end of the previous big hit game. A unit, an "execution period display unit" and a "variation count display unit" are provided. “22 times” is displayed on the first variation count display unit 203, and variation display of the 22 production symbols is performed after the big hit game is over, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is currently displayed (first display In the screen), it is shown that the variable display (simply referred to as "variable display") of the twenty-third rendering symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a scene in which the second super effect mode shown in FIG. 103 (a) is in progress, and the variable display is further performed 23 times from the scene shown in FIG. 103 (a). This is a scene where the 46th variable display is being performed. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), predetermined reach effect 221 (game effect, specific game effect) is executed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. When the reach effect 221 shown in this example is executed, a scene shown by the first display screen 7a (first display unit), the second display screen 71a (second display unit), and the third display screen 72a (FIG. 103A). Among the game information displayed up to that point, part of the game information remains displayed, and the other game information is not displayed. Thereby, the display area of the reach effect 221 (game effect) is secured to enhance the visibility, and it is possible to execute a more enjoyable game effect.

  The first variation count display unit 203 (variation count display unit) displayed on the second display screen 71a as game information as displayed when executing the reach effect 221 (specific game effect) shown in FIG. 103 (b) There is. In addition, as the non-displayed game information, the launch direction display unit 162 displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second effect pending display area 9d (effect pending display area), the total earned profit display unit (second profit information display) Unit) 164, a second effect mode display unit (selection mode display unit) 202 displayed on the second display screen 71a, a effect mode display unit (first effect mode display unit) 171, a third displayed on the third display screen 2 There are acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) and second variation count display unit 205 (second bonus variation count display unit, period information display unit).

  As described above, when the reach effect 221 is performed, game information other than the effect pattern used for the reach effect 221 is provided from the first display screen 7 a which is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area and the player constantly gazes to play the game. Is hidden and the display of reach effect 221 is given priority. In addition, the reach effect 221 is a display screen of the second image display device 71 provided around the first image display device 7 (outside the game area, outside the game area) together with the display screen 7a of the first image display device 71. It is also executed on the display screen 72 a of the third image display device 72 a and 71 a. Then, the display of a part of the game information is left on the display screen of the image display device provided sub (the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and / or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72). It is possible to confirm the game information even while the effect is being executed.

  As described above, the game information (the first variation count display unit 203) that is displayed even during the execution of the reach effect 221 is the periphery of the first image display device 7, which is the main effect display device (outside the game area And the sub display device provided in the game area). Thereby, it is possible to always check the game situation without disturbing the visibility of the reach effect 221 as much as possible. In addition, on the second display screen 71a, both the first variation count display unit 203 and the reach effect 221 are displayed, and when both are superimposed and displayed (superimposed), the first variation count display unit Reference numeral 203 is displayed on the near side in priority to the reach effect 221. As a result, the player can always check the game situation without the first variation count display unit 203 being disturbed by the reach effect. FIG. 103 (b) shows a scene in which the defeat effect is executed as a result of the reach effect 221, and indicates that the above-mentioned fourth bonus is generated by the defeat effect.

  In FIG. 103 (c), the defeat effect is determined in the reach effect shown in FIG. 103 (b), and the variation display of the effect pattern is determined (“212”), and the special symbol is a big hit indicating execution of the fourth bonus. It shows a scene where the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. In the first variation count display unit 203, "46 times" is displayed because the variation display of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 103 (b) is determined. Further, on the first display screen 7a, a third firing direction notification effect 213 is executed which indicates (instructs) that the game ball is fired to the right game area and the start gate 29 passes (enters) the game ball. ing. As described above, even in the gaming state (big hit standby state) before the game ball passes through the start gate 29 after the big hit is determined, the first variation count display unit 203 is in the display state on the second display screen 71a. .

  In FIG. 104 (d), from the scene shown in FIG. 103 (c), the player shoots the game ball in the right game area and causes the start gate 29 to pass the game ball to execute the big hit game (the fourth bonus). The second count effect mode is set after the end of the fourth bonus. The numbers (the number of times of display, the number of times) displayed on the first variation number display unit 203 are initialized (reset to “0”) based on the execution of the big hit game. Further, the timing of resetting the number of displays to "0" is the timing of the end of the big hit game. Further, the reset display timing may be performed based on the end of the big hit game, or may be performed based on the display of the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game. In FIG. 104 (d), since the first variable display after the end of the big hit game (the fourth bonus) is executed, “0 times” is displayed on the first change number display unit 203, and the remaining period is displayed. “49 times” is displayed on the display unit 206. That is, the display of the first variation count display unit 203 is updated (added) whenever the variable display is determined, and the display of the remaining period display unit 206 is updated (subtracted) every time the variable display starts. Be done.

  As described above, the second count effect mode (set after the end of the fourth bonus) (the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state) shown in FIG. When the variable display of the effect design is executed 50 times (sometimes 100 times) without being a big hit, the process is ended, and the mode shifts to another effect mode. When the gaming state in the second count effect mode is the low probability high base state, transition to the normal effect mode is performed based on the variable display of the effect pattern being executed 50 times (specific number of times), and high In the case of the certain high base state, transition to the super effect mode is performed based on the variable display of the effect pattern being executed 50 times (specific number of times).

  In the second count effect mode shown in the present example, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a in the same manner as described above, and the second count effect mode under execution is displayed on the first display screen 7a. The remaining period display unit 206 capable of grasping and recognizing the remaining period of the special effect mode) is displayed. Thereby, during execution of the second count effect mode (special effect mode), while grasping the remaining period (remaining number of fluctuation display) of the effect mode (playing state) during the execution, the fluctuation from the previous big hit game It is possible to grasp the number of times of display (the number of special symbol pass / fail judgments). The number of times displayed on the first variation number display unit 203 is the number obtained by adding the number of variation displays of the first special symbol and the number of variation displays of the second special symbol. In addition, various game information shown in FIG. 104 (d) is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

  FIG. 104 (e) shows a scene in which the fifth variation display is being performed in the second count effect mode, in a scene in which the second count effect mode of FIG. 104 (d) is continuously executed. Also in this scene, the first variation count display unit 203 and the remaining period display unit 206 are both displayed. FIG. 104 (f) is a scene in which the second count effect mode shown in FIGS. 104 (d) and 104 (e) is continuously executed, and is the reach of the 36th variable display in the second count effect mode. It shows a scene where the effect 221 is performed. The reach effect is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, as described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), part of the game information that has been displayed so far is kept displayed, and the others are not displayed. Thereby, the display area of the reach effect 221 (game effect, specific game effect) is secured to enhance the visibility, and it is possible to execute a more entertaining game effect.

  In the case of executing the reach effect 221 (specific game effect) shown in FIG. 103 (b), the first change number display portion 203 (the change number display portion displayed on the second display screen 71a as game information maintaining the display ). In addition, as the non-displayed game information, the launch direction display unit 162 displayed on the first display screen 7a, the second effect pending display area 9d (effect pending display area), the total earned profit display unit (second profit information display) Section) 164, effect mode display section (first effect mode display section) 171, remaining period display section 206, second acquired profit display section 204 (first profit information display section) displayed on third display screen, second There is a variation count display unit 205 (second bonus variation count display unit, period information display unit). In this manner, when reach effect 221 (specific game effect) occurs in the second count effect mode (special effect mode), the remaining period display unit 206 indicating the remaining period of the second count effect mode in execution is not displayed. The first variation count display unit 203, which indicates the number of times the variation display of the production symbol (special symbol) has been performed since the start of the second count effect mode, maintains the display.

  Similar to FIG. 103 (b), when the reach effect 221 is performed, the effect used for the reach effect 221 is provided from the first display screen 7a which is provided substantially at the central portion of the game area and the player constantly looks at and plays the game. The game information other than the symbol is not displayed, and the display of the reach effect 221 is given priority. In addition, the reach effect 221 is a display screen of the second image display device 71 provided around the first image display device 7 (outside the game area, outside the game area) together with the display screen 7a of the first image display device 71. It is also executed on the display screen 72 a of the third image display device 72 a and 71 a. Then, the display of a part of the game information is left on the display screen of the image display device provided sub (the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and / or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72). It is possible to confirm the game information even while the effect is being executed.

  As described above, the game information (the first variation count display unit 203) that is displayed even during the execution of the reach effect 221 is the periphery of the first image display device 7, which is the main effect display device (outside the game area And the sub display device provided in the game area). Thereby, it is possible to always check the game situation without disturbing the visibility of the reach effect 221 as much as possible. In addition, even if the display of the remaining period of the rendering mode (the second count rendering mode) being executed is lost, the display of the first variation count display unit 203 that displays the number of variable displays from the start of the rendering mode is maintained Do. Thereby, even if the remaining period display unit 206 is not displaying, the remaining period of the effect mode (second count effect mode) being executed is grasped (inferred) by confirming the display of the first variation number display unit 203 Possible).

  As shown in FIG. 104 (f), on the second display screen 71a, both the first variation count display unit 203 and the reach effect 221 are displayed, and both are displayed superimposed (superimposed) In this case, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the near side in priority to the reach effect 221. As a result, the player can always check the game situation without the first variation count display unit 203 being disturbed by the reach effect. FIG. 103 (b) shows a scene in which the defeat effect is executed as a result of the reach effect 221, and indicates that the above-mentioned fourth bonus is generated by the defeat effect.

  FIG. 105 (g) is a scene showing that the result of the reach effect 221 is a big hit (first bonus, “777”) in the same variable display as the variable display shown in FIG. 104 (f). Also at this time, the first display screen 203a displays the first variation count display unit 203 (it displays "35 times" because it is before the fixed stop), and the remaining period display unit 206 is not displayed on the first display screen 7a. It has been left. In addition, an effect indicating a big hit is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

  In FIG. 105 (h), the variation display of the effect pattern (special symbol) being executed in FIG. 105 (g) is determined and stopped, and the big hit (first bonus, "777") is decided, and the big hit standby state is established. Shows a scene of As shown in FIG. 105 (h), the first emission direction notification effect 211 is executed on the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. Even in the big hit standby state, the first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a, and the variation display shown in FIG. 105 (g) is determined. "36 times" is displayed.

  In addition, on the second display screen 71a, when both the first variation count display unit 203 and the first emission direction notification effect 211 are displayed, and both are displayed superimposed (superimposed), the first The fluctuation number display unit 203 is displayed on the near side in priority to the first emission direction notification effect 211. Thereby, the player can grasp the number of times of the variable display from the end of the previous big hit game even in the big hit standby state.

  In FIG. 105 (i), in the big hit standby state shown in FIG. 104 (h), the player shoots the game ball to the right game area and causes the start gate 29 to pass the game ball, thereby making a big hit game (first bonus). It shows the scene that started. The first variation count display unit 203 is displayed on the second display screen 71a even during the big hit game, and it is possible to grasp the number of variation displays after the end of the previous big hit game even during the big hit game.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. In the fifth embodiment, various reach effects and precursor effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 106 is an explanatory view illustrating the flow of the effect performed in the low probability low base state. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for describing an execution condition of the prognostic effect. 108 and 109 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the prognostic effects. FIG. 110 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control RAM 913. As shown in FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the indication effect pattern setting process.

[On the flow of presentation in the low probability low base state]
First, based on FIG. 106, the flow of effects in the low probability low base state will be described. When a game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 while the game is being controlled in the low probability low base state, the first special symbol equivalence determination is executed. Then, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41a, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is stopped and displayed. . On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3) is started ( See FIG. 106 (A)). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of symbol rows of effect symbols in which the numerals “1” to “9” are vertically continuously described from the bottom to the top are three rows in the horizontal direction As the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from the top to the bottom (for example, FIG. 108) (A)).

  Here, when it is determined that the result of the first special symbol equality determination made at the time of the variable display start of the first special symbol is "loss" and it is decided not to execute the reach effect, the variable display of the first special symbol In the final stage of the game, the pseudo effect stop showing three effect symbols showing barrage eyes (for example, "458"), and the lost notification as the first special symbol. (See FIG. 106B) is performed. Here, "pseudo stop" refers to swinging the production pattern on the spot with little movement, and "book stop" refers to completely stopping the production pattern.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a "big hit", or when it is determined to perform reach effect of what is "loss", for example, during the variation display of the first special symbol A predetermined left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left row of the symbol display area 7b, and subsequently, a right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) showing the same effect symbol as the left symbol is displayed in the right row of the effect symbol display area 7b. A pre-reach presentation is given to make a pseudo stop. And, as a result of such pre-reach effect, reach is established when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 106 (C)).

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there may be a case where a so-called pseudo-series effect is performed as the effect before the reach is established. This pseudo-series effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect pattern is changed and displayed a plurality of times in the effect symbol display area 7b during the variable display of one special symbol. When this pseudo-series effect is executed before reaching the reach, for example, the following effect display is performed.

  That is, although not shown in the drawings, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variable symbol display is started, for example, the left symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped first, and then, the right symbol is displayed The right symbol (for example, one symbol) different from that of the symbol is pseudo-stopped, and thereafter, the symbol 7 is pseudo-stopped in the middle row as a middle symbol notifying the execution of the pseudo serial effect.

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which the execution of simulated chain effect is notified by stopping 7 symbols in the middle row by pseudo stop, but in another embodiment, the player performs a simulated chain effect such as “NEXT”. By pseudo-stopping the recognizable special symbol in the middle row, the execution of the pseudo connected effect may be notified.

  As described above, when 7 different symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped after the different rendering symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second 2 nd fluctuation rendition following the pseudo 1 nd fluctuation rendering is started Ru. Specifically, the character "x2" is displayed first after the character "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second run variation effect is largely displayed in the central region of the first display screen 7a. A small area is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and in accordance with this, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is resumed. In addition, in FIG. 109 (F) to be described later, it is suggested that the second pseudo-series effect is started during the one time variable display of the first special symbol, and the start of the pseudo-third series of the variable effect is suggested. A state in which the character of “× 3” is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7 a is illustrated.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher in the case where the simulated continuous effect is executed than in the case where the simulated continuous effect is not executed. Is configured. In addition, in the case where the pseudo series effect is executed twice within the same variation (when the pseudo effect is developed to the third run and the reach effect is executed), the pseudo series effect is executed only once in the same variation The jackpot reliability is configured to be higher than in the case (when the pseudo effect is developed to reach the second run and the reach effect is executed).

  In addition, although the case where "pre-reaching pseudo ream" which performs pseudo stop in 7 lines in a middle row and performs pseudo relicing is performed is demonstrated to an example before reach establishment so far, it is the same as left design and right design There are also cases where "after simulated reach" in which simulated stop is performed by pseudo-stopping 7 symbols in the middle row after pseudo-stop the produced symbols.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 106, when the fluctuation effect pattern for executing reach effect is set during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol this time, a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started Then, for example, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left row first, and then the right symbol (for example, 2 symbols) same as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right row, and reach is established (FIG. C)). In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the left symbol is falsely stopped (the same as the right symbol) and the reach is established after the right symbol is falsely stopped (the same left symbol and right symbol are simultaneously falsely stopped) Reach may be established.

  In this manner, when the same effect pattern as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established, the player is expected to expect the same effect pattern as these effect symbols (reach symbol) to stop in the middle row A predetermined reach effect is performed. In the fifth embodiment, the normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) and the normal long reach (see FIG. 106F) as reach effects that can be executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. There are five types of reach effects prepared: reference), first SP reach (see FIG. 106G), second SP reach (see FIG. 106H), and SPSP reach (see FIG. 106J).

  The normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) is the reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). The normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than that of the normal long reach described later. When the reach is established, the normal short reach is performed first. When this normal short reach is performed, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row gradually decreases when the reach is established, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is formed between the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. Scrolling display of the middle symbol row is performed to simulate the middle symbol different from the second symbol.

  Here, in the case where a variation effect pattern for reporting a drop on normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) is set, a drop on alert effect (see FIG. 106E) is performed on the normal short reach. Specifically, if the result of the current first special symbol suitability determination is "big hit", the pseudo pattern of the middle symbol same as the reach symbol is falsely stopped on the effective line (for example, "222") After pseudo-stopping the rendering symbols, a hit notification effect is performed by stopping these rendering symbols as they are. On the other hand, when the result of the current first special symbol pass / fail judgment is "losing", the intermediate symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line to render the effect symbol of the reach losing eye (for example, "232") After pseudo-stopping, a loss notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are directly stopped.

  On the other hand, in the case where a change effect pattern that develops from normal short reach to another reach effect is set, the following effects are performed. For example, if a variation effect pattern is set that develops a normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) to a normal long reach (see FIG. 106F) and reports a drop on the normal long reach. At the end of the reach, there are development suggestion effects that suggest development to a normal long reach, and high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbol rows is resumed, and reach production develops to a normal long reach. In this normal long reach, for example, effect display is performed in which a predetermined character is expected to match the design in the central region of the first display screen 7a.

  In addition, normal long reach is reach production with the next highest jackpot reliability in normal hit reach among the above five types of reach production (for example, jackpot reliability: about 5%), and in most cases, normal long reach Loss notification effect (see Fig. 106 (E)) is performed at normal long reach without developing to other reach effects, but if the result of the current first special symbol judgment is a big hit, normal long reach In some cases, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 106E) may be performed. In addition, when the variation production pattern that develops from normal long reach to other reach effects is set, the normal long reach to first SP reach (see FIG. 106 (G)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 106 (J) Reach production will be developed.

  Here, the first SP reach (see FIG. 106 (G)) is a reach effect that has the second highest jackpot reliability next to normal long reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and the first SP reach from normal long reach The following effect display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, high-speed scrolling of the symbol row in the middle row is resumed, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) which is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b is The image is moved to the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

  As described above, when the first SP reach is developed, a collision notification effect (see FIG. 106 (I)) for reporting a drop in this first SP reach is performed, and SPSP reach from the first SP reach (FIG. 106 (J There may be cases where it develops into

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the flow of the above-described reach effect, the first SP reach (see FIG. 106D) from the normal short reach (see FIG. 106D) does not pass through the normal long reach. In some cases, the normal short reach may develop to the second SP reach (see FIG. 106H).

  Here, the second SP reach (see FIG. 106 (H)) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is slightly higher than the first SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and the normal short reach to the second SP reach The following effect display is performed. That is, after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, high-speed scrolling of the symbol row in the middle row is resumed, and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) which is pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b is The image is moved to the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a while being reduced while maintaining the reach state. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

  As described above, the first SP reach and the second SP reach are displayed in the same screen configuration to expect a jackpot, but in these reach effects, the contents of the effects are different from each other. Specifically, in the first SP reach (see FIG. 106 (G)), if the own character prevents the attack of the enemy character, it becomes a big hit, and conversely, if the own character does not prevent the attack of the enemy character, it will be a loss An effect display is performed. One second SP reach (see FIG. 106 (H)) is configured as a mission effect, and if the player's own character succeeds in a mission, it will be a big hit, and conversely, if the player's own character fails in a mission, an effect display will be performed. .

  When developed into the 1st SP reach and the 2nd SP reach, since the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is relatively low, the loss information effect is more successful as the hit notification effect (see FIG. 106 (I)) than the notification effect. Are also easy to implement. For this reason, when developing into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player is expected to appear as the first SP reach (or the second SP reach) lost and develop into the SPSP reach (see FIG. 106 (J)). It will be done.

  Here, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 106 (J)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects. In the fifth embodiment, the normal long reach (see FIG. 106 (D)) and the normal long reach (see FIG. 106 (D)), when the reach is established and the SPSP reach is directly developed (see FIGS. 106 (C) and (J)). (F) (see Fig. 106 (G)) and SPSP reach via the first SP reach (see Fig. 106 (G)). In some cases, the SPSP reach may be developed via the reach (see FIG. 106H).

  In the fifth embodiment, four types of SPSP reach are prepared, and when the SPSP reach is developed, first, a title display for notifying the type of SPSP reach is performed. For example, a title is displayed to suggest that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (A battle) where the character battles with the enemy character A. In the title display performed at the start of SPSP reach, characters constituting the title display may be displayed in white, in red, or in rainbow colors.

  On the other hand, from the title display until the final stage of SPSP reach is reached, an effect display indicating that the self character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeat attack and defense is performed. Then, when reaching the end of SPSP reach, a first effect button operation promoting effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

  In this first effect button operation promotion effect, the first in the effective period is the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a, or the timing when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a. An effect called cut-in is performed, in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is a notice effect that indicates how big the jackpot reliability is, and in the present embodiment, a green cut-in is performed in which a green cut-in image is superimposed, and a red cut-in. There are cases in which a red cut-in in which an image is superimposed and displayed is performed, and a case in which a gold cut-in in which a gold cut-in image is superimposed and displayed is performed.

  As described above, when the cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach end comes, the second effect button operation promoting effect (see, for example, FIG. 108A) for urging the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. During the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, the character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!", And the effective period And a lifetime gauge indicating the remaining time of the In the fifth embodiment, a second effect button image indicating a small second effect button 63b is displayed as a second effect button image, and a second effect button 63b having a medium size is indicated. There are cases where an effect button image is displayed (see FIG. 108A) and cases where a second effect button image showing a large second effect button 63b is displayed.

  When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the effective period of such a second effect button operation promoting effect, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 106 (K)) is displayed as an operation-responsive effect corresponding to the operation. To be done. That is, when the result of the first special symbol hit / non-permission determination is a big hit, the victory effect representing the self character defeating the enemy character, and the effect symbol showing the Zoro eyes are artificially stopped and then the main stop is made. A hit notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the current first special symbol qualification test is a loss, the game is stopped after falsely stopping a rendering effect showing a state in which the player character loses to the enemy character and a rendering pattern showing a reach loss eye Loss notification effect is performed.

  The size of the second effect button 63b indicated by the second effect button image displayed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promoting effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the second of the medium-sized In the case where the second effect button image indicating the effect button 63b is displayed, the hit notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect compared to the case where the second effect button image indicating the smaller second effect button 63b is displayed It has the characteristic of being easy to In addition, the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b is displayed as compared to the case where the second effect button image indicating the medium-sized second effect button 63b is displayed. There is a feature that the loss notification effect is easily performed as the operation corresponding effect.

  In addition, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b may be displayed when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination of this time is a hit, but is not displayed when it is a loss There is. For this reason, it can be said that the second effect button operation promoting effect for displaying the second effect button image indicating the large second effect button 63b is an advance effect whose jackpot reliability is 100%.

[About the admonition effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an indication effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. By the way, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, for example, reach production where jackpot reliability is higher compared to normal short reach such as normal long reach, first SP reach, second SP reach, and SPSP reach If the situation in which the informing effect is not executed despite the situation continues for a long time, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit will decrease, and as a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine may decrease. is there. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, for example, it is conceivable to frequently perform an effect for expecting a jackpot, but it is reverse to frequently perform such an effect in a situation where the possibility of leading to a jackpot is extremely low. This is an effect and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the lost notification effect is executed for a reach effect other than the normal short reach, the first special symbol is held at the time when the lost information effect is executed. The jackpot game is executed on the condition that the right of judgment includes a notification notification effect or a variation effect that may lead to a jackpot. The player is expected to perform a precursor effect (an example of an expected effect) which causes the player to expect. Specifically, it is as follows.

  That is, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal long reach (see FIG. 107A), the loss notification effect is performed in the first SP reach (see FIG. 107B), or the loss in the second SP reach When the informing effect is executed (see FIG. 107C), the corresponding first special symbol in-use determination right held at the time when any of these three lost informing effects is executed. 1 On the condition that the thing of which the pseudo-demonstration effect of 2 times is performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the fluctuation production develops in the pseudo-third series (see Fig. 107 (E)) is included It is supposed to be executed. As described above, when the fluctuation effect develops to the pseudo third stage after the precursor effect is performed (see FIG. 107E), in most cases, as illustrated in FIGS. 107F and 107G, Finally, it develops into reach effect (1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, or SPSP reach) more than SP reach, and a hit informing effect (or loss information effect) will be performed.

  Further, as exemplified in FIGS. 107 (A) to (C), in the case where any of the above three loss notification effects is executed, the hold is made when any of these three loss notification effects is executed. During the variable display of the corresponding first special symbol among the right of the first special symbol suitability determination being done, it is developed into SPSP reach without being executed pseudo combined effect and hit notification effect (or lost notification effect) ) (See Fig. 107 (H), (J), (G)) or from the second pseudo to a SPSP reach and hit a notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is executed On the condition that the target (see FIGS. 107 (I), (J), and (G)) is included, the precursor effect is to be executed.

  As is clear from these configurations, when the accompaniment effect is executed according to any of the above three loss notification effects, the first special symbol pass / fail judgment being suspended when the loss notification effects are performed Since there is a case where the fluctuation effect develops in the pseudo 3rd series (big hit reliability: about 15%) in accordance with the fact that the game was played, the player against the jackpot by synergy between the predense effect and the pseudo series effect It is possible to effectively improve the sense of expectation of

  In addition, when the indication effect is executed according to the execution of any of the above three loss notification effects, in response to the first special symbol propriety judgment being held at the time when the loss notification effects are performed. Because the SPSP reach, which is a high-reliability reach production, is executed even if the fluctuation production does not develop in the third pseudo-sequence, the synergy between the prognostic production and these reach productions, the game against the jackpot It is possible to effectively improve the sense of expectation of the person. In the fifth embodiment, although the case where the fluctuation effect develops into the SPSP reach without developing in the pseudo third stage is described as an example, the reach effect of the development destination is the SPSP reach if the reach effect of high reliability is achieved. For example, in the case where the fluctuation effect does not develop in the third pseudo-sequence, there may be a case where the reach effect of high reliability (different from SPSP reach) may be developed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach, it is suspended at the execution time of the loss notification effect. Among the right of the 1st special symbol equivalence judgment (up to 4), the first special symbol equivalence judgment is made (indicating that the possibility of a big hit game being played is relatively high ) When the "indication effect" is performed, it is decided to perform a precursor effect.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 107 (K) to (M), there is a loss in SPSP reach along with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. When the notification effect is executed (see FIG. 107 (K)), the variation of the corresponding first special symbol in the right of the first special symbol equivalence judgment which is suspended at the time when the lost notification effect is executed A configuration is also adopted in which the indication effect is executed on the condition that the indication that the notification effect is to be executed is included during the display. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot within the hold is determined if the precursor effect is generated in response to the loss notification effect being executed in the SPSP reach effect. For this reason, the omen effect not only functions as an expectation effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed, but also functions as a confirmation notification effect that announces that the jackpot game will be executed. is there.

  By adopting these configurations, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which reach effect the loss notification effect has been executed, and after the precursor effect is started, the player hits the jackpot In the fluctuation effect performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol propriety judgment that has been suspended, while expecting a change, the fluctuation effect will be developed up to what number of pseudo-repetitions (how many times the simulated relics are performed You can enjoy the game while paying attention to

  In addition, when the hit notification effect is executed in any reach effect, the stop pattern of Zoro eye to notify the "big hit" is simulated stop after pseudo stop, the big hit game according to the "big hit" Will be executed. For this reason, temporarily, among the right of the first special symbol equivalence judgment which is suspended at the time when the above-mentioned hit notification effect is executed, the hit notification effect is to be executed or the above three types of “ Even if any of the “proposed effects” is included, the necessity for performing the adjective effects can be said to be low. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, even when the condition for executing the prognostic effect (related to the perceivable notification effect or the suggested effect performed after the prosodic effect) is satisfied at the time when the performing information effect is performed, the prognostic effect is not performed The configuration is adopted.

  By the way, if you compare the lost notification production that you stop the production symbol showing the loose eye to make a pseudo stop and then stop the real, and the lost notification production that make the real stop after making the simulated symbol showing the reach loss eye make a pseudo stop, The appearance rate is higher than the latter. For this reason, if the precursor effect is made executable even when the loss notification effect in which the main stop is performed after falsely stopping the effect pattern showing the discolored eye is executed, the appearance rate of the precursor effect becomes too high, As a result, there is a possibility that the player is unlikely to expect a jackpot even if a precursor effect appears. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, a precursor notification effect (for a hit notification effect or a suggestion effect performed after the indication effect) is performed at the time when the loss notification effect of stopping the effect pattern showing the loose eye is simulatedly stopped and then stopped. Even if the execution conditions of are satisfied, a configuration is also adopted in which no prognostic effect is performed.

(Specific example of omen production)
In FIGS. 108 and 109, it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed among the right of the first special symbol suitability determination that is suspended at the time when the lost notification effect is executed at the end of SPSP reach and this loss notification effect is performed. It is a screen figure showing a concrete example of precursory effects performed when what is to be done is included. In the following description based on FIGS. 108 and 109, for the convenience of explanation, the first effect hold 9a indicating that the first special symbol equivalence judgment is held is simply referred to as a "hold icon" and this hold icon is displayed The display area is called (in place of the first effect hold display area 9c) a hold icon display area 9c. In addition, “the icon” is displayed in the icon display area 9e (see, for example, FIG. 68A) as a change suggestion image that indicates that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being changed and displayed. I will explain as a thing.

  During the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, when the cut-in occurs and the final stage of SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 108 (A)). FIG. 108 (A) shows a second effect button 63b of medium size during an effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect in a state where a red icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. (2) A state in which the character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b "press!" And the effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the first display screen 7a There is.

  In the case where the determination result of the first special symbol suitability determination at this time is "loss", for example, "343" in response to the second effect button 63b being operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promoting effect. The three rendering symbols indicating the reach loss eye of "" are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then main-stop as it is (see FIG. 108 (B)). Along with this, the icon (here, red icon) displayed in the icon display area 9e is deleted from the first display screen 7a.

  When a predetermined decision time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three production symbols showing a reach loss eye of "343" have stopped, the first special symbol pass / fail judgment corresponding to the first hold icon is executed As a result, shift processing is performed on each of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 108 (C), the first hold icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon. At the same time, the remaining two pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 9c are shifted toward the icon display area 9e (within the pending icon display area 9c). Then, along with the first special symbol variation display being started in response to the execution of the first special symbol equivalence determination, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 108 (C)). .

  As described above, when the next change of the change for which the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach is started, the above-described progic effect is started (see FIG. 108 (D)). Specifically, as exemplified in FIG. 108 (D), an electrocardiogram image resembling an electrocardiogram is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a prophetic effect sound for producing a display of an electrocardiogram image such as "picone" is displayed. It is outputted from the speaker 67. And although this precursor effect is not shown in the figure, it is repeatedly executed at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval of 2 seconds).

  Here, the determination result of the first special symbol equivalence determination corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. 108 (C) is “loss”, and as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the variation time of the first special symbol is When a relatively short (for example, 4 seconds) fluctuation pattern is set, as illustrated in FIG. Specifically, the left 4 symbols, middle 5 symbols and right 3 symbols moved from above finish moving at the approximate center of the first display screen 7a in the vertical direction and swing up and down. Along with the left 4 symbols, the number "4", the middle 5 symbols, the number "5", and the right 3 symbols, the number "3" counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction Simultaneously (see FIG. 108E). Then, along with the stop display of the first special symbol, these three effect symbols showing discolored eyes stop as they are (see FIG. 108 (F)).

  When a predetermined decision time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three production symbols showing the “453” loose eye show stop, the first special symbol pass / fail judgment corresponding to the first hold icon is executed As a result, shift processing is performed on each of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, as exemplified in FIGS. 108F and 108G, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is the icon display area 9e as the icon. The other one pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is shifted to the side of the icon display area 9e and displayed as a first pending icon. Then, along with the first special symbol variation display being started in response to the first special symbol equivalence determination being performed, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 108 (G)). .

  Also during the second symbol change (after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach), a precursor effect is performed as in the first symbol change (see FIG. 108 (H)). Note that FIG. 108 (I) exemplifies a situation in which a progant effect is performed at timing when the right 2 symbols stop pseudo after the left 8 symbols stop being simulated.

  During a second symbol change after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the right 2 symbols have stopped artificially, one of the symbols has stopped artificially (see Fig. 109 (A). Then, the left 8 symbols, the middle 1 symbol, and the right 2 symbols are directly stopped (see FIG. 109 (B)). Then, when the second symbol variation ends in this way, the third symbol variation is started. Specifically, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols indicating the discrete appearance of "812" are stopped, the first special corresponding to the first hold icon With this, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon (FIG. 109 (B)). And (C)). Then, along with the first special symbol variation display being started in response to the first special symbol equivalence determination being performed, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 109 (C)). .

  Thus, even during the third symbol change after the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach, the adversary effect is executed intermittently in the same manner as described above (FIGS. 109 (D) and (D)). See E). Although not shown in FIG. 109, the prognostic effects here continue from the start of the third symbol change until the first pseudo continuous effect is executed.

  In addition, since the determination result of the first special symbol suitability determination performed when this third symbol variation is started is "big hit", for example, two pseudo-sequence effects are executed and the pseudo 3 The icon changes from a white icon to a red flight icon (the icon that imitates a red airplane) at the timing when the variation effect of the run is started (see FIG. 109F), and SPSP in this pseudo third run. It develops into a reach C battle (see FIG. 109 (G)). Then, in response to the second effect button 63b being operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 109 (H)) in the late stage of the C battle, the hit notification effect is executed (FIG. 109 (I)). FIG. 109 (I) exemplifies a state in which three rendering symbols indicating the "111" zoro have been pseudo-stopped, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, these three rendering symbols are directly stopped.

  Up to this point, the leading effect over the first symbol change, the second symbol change, and the third symbol change (where a hit notification effect is performed) after the loss notification effect is executed in SPSP reach Although the case of performing is described as an example, the first symbol variation and the two symbol variations, for example, can be made so that the player can easily recognize that the third symbol variation is the symbol variation for which the hit notification effect is performed. In the symbol variation of eye, the time interval of precursor effect is fixed to 2 seconds, for example, while in the third symbol variation, the time interval when precursor effect is executed is gradually shortened as the end timing of precursor effect approaches You may do it.

  In addition, although not shown in the figure, the prognostic effect started in response to the loss notification effect in the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach is also the next to the symbol variation for which the loss notification effect was performed. It starts as the symbol variation starts. Then, for example, in the case of the second symbol variation (after the above-mentioned loss notification effect is performed), when the reach effect more than the SP reach is executed in the pseudo third run (FIGS. 107E and 107F) In the case where the precursor effect is performed intermittently until the first pseudo-series effect is performed, and SPSP reach (or special reach) is performed in the second pseudo-sequence (see (I) and (see FIG. 107)). In J) (see (H)), the precursory effects are performed intermittently until the first pseudo connected effect is performed, and SPSP reach (or special reach) is performed without the pseudo connected effect (FIG. 107H). And (J)), the precursor effect is executed intermittently until reach is established.

(Example of configuration of effect control RAM 913)
FIG. 110 is a block diagram for explaining the storage area of the effect control RAM 913 constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 and the information stored in each storage area. When receiving the change start command from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect pattern of the change effect using the effect pattern. Specifically, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation pattern of the production design, the presence or absence of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-series production, the type of production design constituting the reach design, reach production The type and content of the, the content of the pseudo-series effect, the type of the effect pattern to be displayed stopped, etc. are set.

  As illustrated in FIG. 110A, the effect control RAM 913 is provided with the change effect pattern storage area 9130 as a storage area for temporarily storing the change effect pattern set in the change effect pattern setting process. It is done. In addition, when the special figure 1 start entry ball command from the main control board 80 is received, the effect control RAM 913 is a storage area for storing information included in the special figure 1 start entry ball command. The first reserve storage area 9131, the special view 1 second reserve storage area 9132, the special view 1 third reserve storage area 9133, and the special view 1 fourth reserve storage area 9134 are provided. Further, in the effect control RAM 913, a special figure 1 / number-of-holdings storage area 9135 is provided as an area for storing the number of holdings of the first special symbol suitability determination.

  Special figure 1 · first reserve storage area 9131-special figure 1 · fourth reserve storage area 9134 is a storage area for storing information included in the special figure 1 start entry command, and is shown in FIG. 110 (B). As exemplified in, the result of the pass / fail judgment and the variation pattern information are stored. The judgment result is information included in the special view 1 start entry ball command as the preliminary judgment result, and is information indicating whether or not the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment judgment is "big hit". In addition, fluctuation pattern information is information which is included in the special figure 1 start entry sphere command as a preliminary decision result, is the information which shows the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special design.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability and low base state, the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 and the right of the first special symbol acceptance decision is suspended. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a prior determination process. Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 20, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, at the time of the variable display start of the first special symbol The same big hit judgment processing is performed prior to the big hit judgment processing in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment to be performed, and it is determined in advance whether it will be judged as a "big hit" when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. To Also, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the big hit random number, the same processing as the variation pattern selection processing performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the first special symbol suitability determination is executed. It is determined in advance which variation pattern is to be selected.

  When the game control microcomputer 81 executes such prior determination processing, the information indicating whether the determination result of the first special symbol suitability determination is “big hit” (probability determination result) or the first special symbol A special figure 1 start entering ball command including preliminary determination results such as variation pattern information indicating a variation pattern is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 receives the special figure 1 start entry ball command from the main control board 80, and receives two pieces of information illustrated in FIG. 1) 1st reserve storage area 9131 to 1st reserve storage area 9131 to 1st special reserve 1st fourth reserve in order from the special view 1st reserve storage area 9131) It is stored in one of the storage areas 9134.

  For example, when the special figure 1 start entry command is received in a state where information is not stored in any of the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1 fourth reserved storage area 9134, the special figure Two pieces of information included in the 1 start entry command are stored in the special view 1 · first reserved storage area 9131. In addition, for example, when the special figure 1 start entry command is received in a state where information is stored in the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 9131 and the special figure 1 second reserved storage area 9132, the special figure 1 start up Two pieces of information included in the entering command are stored in the special view 1 · third reserved storage area 9133.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command relating to the first special symbol pass / fail judgment that has been held, the special view 1 · first hold storage area 9131-special view 1 · fourth hold storage area 9134 Shift stored information. For example, when a change start command is received in a state in which information is stored in each of the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 9131 to the special figure 1 third reserved storage area 9133, the special figure 1 first reserved storage area 9131 Erase the information stored in the special view 1 · second reserve storage area 9132 and shift the information stored in the special view 1 · first reserve storage area 9131 to the special view 1 · third reserve storage area The information stored in 9133 is shifted to the special view 1 second reserved storage area 9132.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds “1” to the number of holdings of the first special symbol pass / fail judgment stored in the special drawing 1 · number of holdings storage area 9135 each time it receives a special drawing 1 start entering ball command. Each time the variation start command according to the first special symbol equivalence judgment is received, the number of pending for the first special symbol equivalence judgment is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

(About processing to realize the prognostic effect)
Subsequently, an example of processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 to realize the prognostic effect will be described. Although not shown in the figure, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores, in the fluctuation effect pattern storage area 9130, fluctuation effect pattern information indicating the fluctuation effect pattern when setting the fluctuation effect pattern by the fluctuation effect pattern setting process. . At that time, when the fluctuation effect pattern information concerning the previous symbol fluctuation is stored, the fluctuation effect pattern information is rewritten to new fluctuation effect pattern information.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing, for example, when a change effect end command instructing stop display (full stop) of reach loss is set in the sub output buffer. Specifically, when a change effect end command instructing stop display of reach loss eyes is set in the sub output buffer, a loss effect is reached in which reach effect based on the change effect pattern stored in the change effect pattern storage area 9130 It specifies whether the notification effect has been executed. Here, when it is specified that the loss notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach, the normal long reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”, and the first SP reach (or the first SP reach (or When it is specified in 2SP reach) that the loss notification effect has been executed, the SP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to "ON". Further, when it is specified that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SPSP reach, the SPSP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to “ON”.

  On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following process in the notice effect setting process executed based on the reception of the change start command. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 111, the microcomputer for effect control 91 executes the lost notification effect in SPSP reach in the previous symbol fluctuation based on whether the SPSP reach loss flag is set to "ON" or not. It is determined whether it has been done (step S6000). Here, when it is determined that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SPSP reach in the previous symbol change (step S6000: YES), it is specified whether or not the current symbol change leads to a big hit (step S6001). Specifically, the current symbol variation is based on whether or not the variation presentation pattern indicated by the information stored in the variation presentation pattern storage area 9130 is a variation presentation pattern that finally executes a notification presentation. Identify if it will lead to a jackpot.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the presence or absence of the "big hit" in the pending state (step S6002). Specifically, whether or not there is a storage area in which the result of the determination of “big hit” is stored in the special view 1 · first reserve storage area 9131 to special view 1 · third reserve storage area 9133 Identify the presence or absence of a "big hit" in the hold based on

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an item that becomes a "big hit" is included based on the identification result of step S6001 and the identification result of step S6002 (step S6003). In other words, with regard to the current fluctuation effect and the fluctuation effect relating to the determination of the maximum of three first special symbols that are held at the time of starting the current fluctuation effect, the hit notification effect is finally executed. It is determined whether the following is included. Here, when it is determined that the item that is the "big hit" is not included (step S6003: NO), a series of predictive effect pattern setting processing is ended, and setting processing relating to other preliminary effects is executed. .

  On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the item for the "big hit" is included (step S6003: YES), the setting information of the precursor effect is set in the predetermined area of the effect control RAM 913 (step S6004). ). Specifically, for example, when it is specified in the process of step S6001 that the present symbol variation leads to a "big hit", a precursor effect is started along with the start of the current variation effect, and the current variation effect is produced. The indication pattern of the omen effect that causes the omen effect to continue intermittently until the first pseudo-series effect is executed (or until the reach is established if the pseudo-series effect is not executed) It is set in the effect control RAM 913 as setting information. Moreover, when it is specified in the processing of step S6002 that there is a "big hit" in the hold, the precursor effect is started with the start of the current fluctuation production, and the first special symbol hold determination is held. Until it is executed until the first pseudo-series effect is executed during the fluctuation effect performed in response to being determined as a "big hit" when it is executed (or until reach is established if the pseudo-series effect is not performed ) The effect pattern of the omen effect for continuing the omen effect is set in the effect control RAM 913 as setting information of the omen effect.

  As described above, the setting information of the precursor effect set in the effect control RAM 913 is included in the change effect start command, and the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106 are generated by the command transmission process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Sent to As a result, a prognostic effect in which the effect pattern is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 is realized by the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106. In addition, when the indication effect is performed after the loss notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach effect, a big hit is determined in the hold at the time when the loss notification effect is performed. Based on M), the above-described configuration is realized.

  On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the loss notification effect in SPSP reach has not been executed in the previous symbol change (step S6000: NO), the SP reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is Based on whether or not it is set to "ON", it is determined whether or not a lost notification effect has been executed in the SP reach in the previous symbol variation (step S6005). Here, when it is determined that the loss notification effect in the SP reach is not executed in the previous symbol change (step S6005: NO), the normal long reach loss flag stored in the effect control RAM 913 is set to "ON" Based on whether or not it has been performed, it is determined whether or not a lost notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach in the previous symbol variation (step S6006). Here, if it is determined in the previous symbol variation that the loss notification effect in the normal long reach is not being executed (step S6006: NO), a series of precursor effect pattern setting processing ends, and it relates to another advance notification effect The setting process is performed.

  When the microcomputer for effect control 91 determines that the loss notification effect has been executed in the SP reach in the previous symbol change (step S6005: YES), or the loss notification effect has been executed in the normal long reach in the previous symbol change If it is determined (step S6006: YES), a variation effect pattern is specified with respect to the right of the first special symbol equivalence determination which has been suspended when these loss notification effects are performed (step S6007). Specifically, based on the variation pattern information stored in the special view 1st reserve storage area 9131 to the special view 1st reserve storage area 9133, the first special symbol hold determination is suspended. Identify the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected if it is selected. Then, with reference to the variation presentation pattern determination table corresponding to the identified variation pattern, when the variation presentation pattern is selected based on the variation presentation pattern determination table, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-series effect is executed, or the pseudo-series When the rendition is executed, it is specified how many times the pseudo evolves, whether or not it finally evolves to the SPSP reach, whether or not it finally evolves to the special reach, etc. When the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the on-hold change effect pattern in this manner, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing based on the specification result.

  After the processing of step S6007, the effect control microcomputer 91 actually executes the first special symbol equivalence judgment among the right of the first special symbol equivalence judgment which is suspended (up to three). It is determined whether or not a thing for which a fluctuation effect that develops up to the pseudo-3rd station is performed is included along with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol performed according to (step S6008). Here, when it is determined that the one that does not include the fluctuation effect that develops up to the pseudo third station is included (step S6008: NO), that is, the pseudo connection effect is not executed in any of the fluctuation effects, or the pseudo If only the second pseudo-develop is developed, although the rendition is executed, the first special symbol right or wrong judgment is actually executed among the right of the first special symbol right or wrong judgment (up to three) which has been suspended It is determined whether or not there is a thing to be subjected to a fluctuation effect that eventually develops into SPSP reach along with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol performed according to the event (step S6009).

  If it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 91 does not include those for which the change effect that is ultimately developed into SPSP reach is performed (step S6009: NO), the first special one is suspended (up to three) In the right of the symbol success or failure judgment, with the variable display of the first special symbol performed in response to the fact that the first special symbol success or failure judgment is actually executed, the line of fluctuation effects that eventually develops into a special reach It is determined whether the item to be included is included (step S6010).

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that a variable effect that develops up to the pseudo 3rd station is included (step S6008: YES), although the pseudo 3rd station does not develop, the SPSP reach is finally reached. When it is determined that the one to be developed is included (step S6009: YES), or the one that is not developed in the third pseudo-run but is finally developed into a special reach is included If it is determined that it is (step S6010: YES), setting information of the prognostic effect is set in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM 913 (step S6011). Specifically, among the right of the first special symbol equivalence judgment which is held (up to three), of the first special symbol which is performed in response to the fact that the first special symbol equivalence judgment is actually carried out In the case where it is included that the fluctuation effect is developed up to the pseudo 3rd series along with the fluctuation display, the precursor effect is started along with the start of the fluctuation production this time, and the fluctuation developed up to the above 3rd simulation In the effect control RAM 913, an effect pattern of a omen effect is set in the effect control setting information to continue the omen effect until the first pseudo-series effect is executed in the effect.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is executed in response to the fact that the first special symbol suitability determination is actually executed among the right of the first (up to three) first special symbol suitability determinations that have been suspended. (1) If the change indication of SPSP reach is carried out without developing in the pseudo 3rd line with the change indication of the special symbol, the indication effect is started along with the start of the current change effect. In addition, until the first pseudo-series effect is executed in the fluctuation effect developing to the SPSP reach (or until the reach is established if the pseudo-series effect is not executed) the pattern pattern of the omen effect that continues the omen effect Are set in the RAM 913 for effect control as setting information of the prognostic effect.

  As described above, the setting information of the precursor effect set in the effect control RAM 913 is included in the change effect start command, and the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106 are generated by the command transmission process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Sent to As a result, a prognostic effect in which the effect pattern is set by the effect control microcomputer 91 is realized by the image control board 100 and the sound control board 106. In addition, when the precursor effect is performed after the normal long reach loss, or when the precursor effect is performed after the first SP reach (or the second SP reach) loss, the fluctuation effect that develops up to the third pseudo run is The above-described configuration is realized based on FIGS. 107 (A) to (G) that the change effect to be executed or to develop to SPSP reach from the second or subsequent pseudo-run is executed.

  As is clear from the description so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) in the low probability low base state When the loss notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach, and when the loss notification effect is performed, the jackpot effect is executed. A precursor effect (an example of an expected effect) that causes a game to be executed is executed (see FIGS. 107 (K) to (M)).

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a reach effect (in the fifth embodiment, the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the first effect) which is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) in the low probability low base state. If lost notification effect is executed by 2SP reach) and the first special symbol equality judgment is performed (indicating that the possibility of a big hit game being executed is relatively high), as indicated effect, within the same variation The right of the first special symbol pass / fail judgment that the two pseudo linked effects (the fluctuation effects developed in the third pseudo run) or the SPSP reach will be executed is suspended at the time the loss notification effect is executed. In the case where a jackpot game is being played, a precautionary effect (an example of an expected effect) that causes the jackpot game to be executed is executed (see FIGS. 107A to 107 J).

  In addition, if an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the holding icon is performed when executing the omen effect, the player can easily easily recognize to which icon the lingering effect corresponds to the symbol change. Instead, when the player gazes at the hold icon which is the target of the icon change presentation, the presentation effect of the precursor presentation may be reduced. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed, the execution of the icon change effect is limited between the start of the precursor effect and the end, and the precursor effect is After completion, execution of the icon change presentation is permitted (see FIGS. 109E and 109F).

(Operational effects by prognostic effects)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state, the lost notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach, and when this lost notification effect is executed. In the case where the right of the first special symbol suitability determination that the informing effect is to be executed is held, there may be a case in which the informing effect is made to make the player expect the jackpot game to be performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the precursor effect to be executed when the loss notification effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the big hit game to be executed is lowered. Can be suppressed. In addition, since it is necessary to hold the right of the first special symbol acceptance determination in order to generate a pro-end effect, a so-called stop in which a player who expects the occurrence of the pro-end effect temporarily stops the launch of the game ball It is possible to suppress hitting.

  By the way, when SPSP reach is compared with reach effects other than SPSP reach (other reach effects such as SP reach), SPSP reach is more likely to be hit notification effect than other reach effects. For this reason, when the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach, it is likely that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit game is reduced than in the case where the loss notification effect is performed in the other reach effects. Conceivable. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the right of the first special symbol suitability determination that the lost notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach and the hit notification effect is executed is reserved. If this is the case, a precursor effect is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the prognostic effect to be executed, and to effectively suppress a significant drop in the sense of expectation due to the lost notification effect being executed by the SPSP reach.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the lost notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect such as the normal long reach, the first SP reach, or the second SP reach, and the first special symbol pass / fail judgment is performed. The jackpot game is executed when the right of the first special symbol judgment whether the suggestion effect is to be executed (indicating that the jackpot game is relatively likely to be executed) is held. Anticipation is performed that is expected to be done. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the precursor effect to be executed when the loss notification effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the big hit game to be executed is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  By the way, when SPSP reach is compared with other reach effects other than SPSP reach (for example, normal long reach, 1st SP reach, or 2nd SP reach), SPSP reach hits more than other reach effects and the notice effect is Easy to execute. Therefore, even if another reach effect is executed, it is considered that the player is unlikely to expect that the jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the right of the first special symbol pass / fail judgment that the lost notification effect is executed by another reach effect and the suggested effect is executed. In the case of being put on hold, a precursor effect is performed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot game to be executed by executing the precursor effect.

(Modified example of prognostic effects)
The following configuration may be adopted for the prognostic effect.
That is, in the fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the “indication effect” described above is the fluctuation effect (see FIG. 107 (E)) and SPSP reach (see FIG. 107 (J)) that develop in the third pseudo. However, “indication effect” is not limited to the ones exemplified in the fifth embodiment as long as it is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed is relatively high, for example, a large number of characters The group notice may be a group notice or the like that displays an effect of moving in a predetermined direction on the display screen 7a.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, at the time when the next symbol variation of the symbol variation in which any of the lost notification effects illustrated in FIGS. 107 (A) to (C) and (K) is performed is started, Any of a total of 4 variations of the symbol variation and the maximum of 3 symbol variations corresponding to the right of the maximum of the first three special symbol pattern judgments held at the time the symbol variation is started is a precursor effect In the case where the execution condition is satisfied, the case is described where the omen effect is performed. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the indication effect is started with the start of the symbol variation following the symbol variation in which any of the above-mentioned loss notification effects is performed, so the loss notification There is a possibility that one more right relating to the determination of the first special symbol may be reserved between the presentation and the start of the presentation effect. For this reason, in another embodiment, at the time when the next symbol fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation for which any of the above-mentioned loss notification effects is performed is started, the symbol fluctuation and the timing of the symbol fluctuation are suspended If any of a total of 5 variations with up to 4 symbol variations corresponding to the right of the maximum 1st 4 special symbol special right or wrong decision, fulfills the execution condition of the precursor effect, the composition to execute the precursor effect It may be adopted.

  In addition, since the normal short reach has a higher appearance rate than the normal long reach, the first SP reach, and the second SP reach, in the fifth embodiment, when the loss notification effect is performed in the normal short reach, the precursor effect effect is produced. The case of not executing is described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the loss notification effect is executed in the normal short reach, the processing after step S6007 is performed, and if the condition for executing the indication effect is satisfied, the indication effect is executed. May be As described above, by enabling the prognostic effect even when the loss notification effect is performed in the normal short reach, the appearance rate of the prognostic effect is improved, and the player's expectation for the jackpot game is performed Can be further improved.

  Further, although the fifth embodiment has described the case where the precursor effect is started from the start of the next change start at which the loss notification effect is performed in the predetermined reach effect, the other embodiment starts the next change. The precursor effect may be started before being played. For example, during the final stop of the predetermined reach effect, in the process of stopping after the three production symbols showing reach loss eyes are pseudo-stopped, or while the three production symbols are pseudo-stop, start prognostic effects, or The precursor effect may be started at the same time as the three effect designs stop.

  When adopting these configurations, it is conceivable to execute the following processing in order to execute the prognostic rendition. That is, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a special timing 1 · 1st suspension storage area 9131-special at a predetermined timing during a period in which three effect symbols showing reach loss eyes are pseudo-stopped at the end of SPSP reach. It is determined whether or not a yes / no determination result indicating “big hit” is stored in any of the fourth reserve storage area 9134 in FIG. 1, and if a positive determination is made, a precursor effect start command instructing execution of the precursor effect It is transmitted to the image control board 100 and the voice control board 106. Further, for example, the microcomputer for effect control 91 is a predetermined period during a period in which three effect designs showing reach loss eyes are falsely stopped at the end of another reach effect such as normal long reach, first SP reach, or second SP reach. At timing, the same processing as step S6007 is performed on variation pattern information stored in the special view 1st reserve storage area 9131 to the special view 1st reserve storage area 9134 to correspond to each reserve. Identify the fluctuation presentation pattern. Then, the same processing as steps S6008 to S6010 is performed, and when the condition for executing the prognostic effect is satisfied, the prognostic effect start command instructing the execution of the prognostic effect is transmitted to the image control board 100 and the voice control board 106.

  If such a configuration is adopted, the continuity (relevancy) relating to the effect is improved between the change for which the loss notification effect is performed in the predetermined reach effect and the change performed after the change, It is possible to carry out a more effective precursory effect.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, although the case of performing the prognostic effect using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 has been described as an example, the rendering means used for the prognostic effect is not limited thereto, for example, the first display screen The precursory effect may be performed using a light guide plate disposed in front of 7a at a predetermined interval, the first display screen 7a, and the speaker 67. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the prognostic effect is an effect in which an electrocardiogram image is displayed on the first display screen 7a and an effect (see FIG. 108 (D)) in which the prognostic sound is output from the speaker 67 is repeated intermittently. Although the case has been described as an example, the precursor effect may be another effect. For example, the prognostic effect is an effect of outputting a prognostic effect BGM from the speaker 67 instead of the normal BGM, on the condition that the execution condition of the prognostic effect is satisfied, or a background image displayed on the first display screen 7a. An effect of changing to a background image dedicated to the omen effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a, or the like may be used.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the execution condition of the prognostic effect is satisfied, the case where the prognostic effect is always executed is described as an example, but in the other embodiments, one of the cases where the execution condition of the prognostic effect is satisfied It is also possible to execute a prognostic effect on a part. For example, when fulfillment conditions of the prognostic effect are satisfied, it is possible to perform the effect drawing using random numbers in order to decide whether or not to perform the prognostic effect, and to execute the prognostic effect according to the lottery result .

[Other aspect]
In the embodiment described above, the special symbols (the first special symbols (described later) are set as the main part of the game in the game state according to the game state, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the effect symbol display unit Or, it is assumed that the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, by displaying the effect symbol (three digits) of 1 in the effect symbol display portion and synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, it is synchronized with the first special symbol There is a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, and the variable indication of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable indication of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of In addition, when displaying both the 1st production design and the 2nd production design, the production design which corresponds to the special design (one special design) which is set as the main game in the game state is largely displayed , And may be displayed small corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) which is not considered as the main game. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, instead of always displaying both the first and second effect symbols, the first and second effect symbols may both be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first One of the rendering symbol and the second rendering symbol may be displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine, the “variable entry ball opening” which can be changed into a ball entry possible state where game balls can enter and a ball entry impossible state where game balls can not enter; When the result of 1 judgment of success or failure or 2nd judgment of success is hit, it is possible to possess the special game execution expedient which can execute the special game which makes variable entry ball ball entry possible state. In addition, the “second starting opening” may be a variable starting opening that can be changed to the first mode and the second mode in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first mode. In addition, the game state (first game state) in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the game in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the gaming state The game state setting means may be set to the state (second game state). Here, "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

  Also, in the embodiment described above, the number of opening times of the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening in one round is one, but the number of opening times of the first large winning opening in the first round or the second large winning opening It may be a plurality of times, or may have different open times. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve can be simultaneously changed, but the second special view reserve is prioritized over the first special view reserve. That is, control processing of so-called special view 2 priority, control processing in which the first special view reservation is prioritized over second special view reservation, or so-called special processing 1 priority control process may be adopted. In addition, priority is not set for the first special view reserve digest and the second special view reserve digest, and the first special figure reserve and the second special view reserve are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called ball entry order (memory order) digestion may be performed.

  In addition, it is a pachinko gaming machine of the type (without high probability state) which does not have probability setting means, which has a specific area inside, and can enter the game ball and can enter the ball entry possible state and the game ball enters the ball A large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state is provided, and the large winning opening is allowed to enter for a predetermined time when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entry to the starting opening becomes a small hit. When the game ball enters the large winning opening that is in the ball enable state and the game ball passes through the specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed and is applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined bonus is given. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixer, and if the result of the judgment based on entering the ball into the starting opening is a big hit, it does not require passage to a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. Further, as a benefit, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting opening. In addition, it is possible to generate a high base state which has a first starting opening and a second starting opening and increases the frequency of ball entry into the second starting opening. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to the low probability (first probability) or the high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function, but the type (number) of jackpot probabilities Is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities such as medium probability (third probability) higher than low probability (first probability) and lower than high probability (second probability) It is also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of probability conditions defining the relationship between the low probability and the high probability are provided, and any of the plurality of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is also good.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned Example, the latest acquisition random value (acquisition information) memorize | stored in the special figure reservation storage part is read about prior determination based on starting ball entry, and the said acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is judged (It is pre-decision) (It is processing when starting ball entry (S205). Refer to FIG. 11, FIG. 13 etc.), The method of pre-decision is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special view reserve storage unit, the main control unit and sub-controls an area (acquired information storage means) for storing acquired information (that is, acquired information acquired based on starting ball entry) targeted for prior determination It is good also as what is provided in RAM of a part and judges the acquisition information memorized to the storage area concerned (memory part for prior determination) (predetermination). In this case, it is also possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the prior determination by storing the result of the prior determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub control unit. Alternatively, the acquired information stored in the special view suspension storage unit may not be determined in advance, but may be determined in advance for acquired information acquired based on the starting ball entry. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special-image storage unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing acquired information to be subject to prior determination separately from the special map storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquired information stored in the special map storage unit for prior determination. Absent.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the effect mode D (state C, specific gaming state), when the specific period is started under the situation where three or more small hit retentions are continuously stored, during the specific period The display of the number-of-balls image S and the addition display (second profit effect) of the number-of-balls count image C2 are performed based on entering the small winning prize winning opening etc., and the specific period is over, the prize An effect is performed in which the number of winning balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added to the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls, total number of winning balls) of the winning ball count image C1 It had become. On the other hand, when a new second special view reservation (entering the third starting opening 26) occurs during a specific period, and it is determined that the suspension is a small hit suspension by the prior determination (reservation prefetching) The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started under a situation where four small hit retentions are stored continuously, and after that start, two small hit retentions are digested. At this time, the special figure 2 reservation ball number becomes “2”. Under that situation, when a new 2nd special view reserve occurs and the special figure 2 reserve ball number becomes “3” and it is determined in advance that the reserve is a small hit reserve, the specific period counter (see S5005) "+1" (add 1). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small hit reserve is digested and the small hit game pertaining to the small hit hold is completed. Or, after the specific period is started similarly, under the situation that the small hit retention is digested to two and the special figure 2 number of holding balls becomes “2”, it corresponds to the special figure 2 holding number of balls “3” It is assumed that the 2nd special figure reservation which carries out and the 2nd special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number of balls "4" occur in succession. And the second special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number of balls "3" is out of reserve, and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls "4" is small hit in advance Suppose that it is judged. In this case, the small hit hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "4" is digested by "+2" (2 addition) by the specific period counter (see S5005), and the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game are completed. Until then, the specific period can be extended. As described above, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the display of the winning ball number image S and the additional display of the winning ball count image C2 (second profit effect) is performed Since it is extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the profit presentation.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned example, two conditions of (1) small hit retention being stored three or more continuously, and (2) winning of the start lottery of a specific period, the start of the specific period Although the condition is described, the start condition of the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small hit reservations are stored regardless of whether a plurality of (for example, 2 or more) small hit reservations are stored although they are not continuous or continuous. May be used as the start condition of the specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared to the example, and the specific period is more likely to occur (is easier to be started). In addition, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit serving as a setting trigger of the state C (high probability low base state) occurs, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C before transitioning to the state C If the big hit is 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), the mode selection period occurs during the big hit game ending period, and the 15R big hit (15R third hit) In the case of three big hit), the mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (in the present embodiment, 14R start to 15R midway). On the other hand, if the number of big hit rounds that trigger the setting of state C is, for example, one kind of 10 rounds, the ending period if the gaming state when the 10R big hit occurs is state A (left-handed game) The mode selection period may occur in a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R midway) if the state is B or C (right-handed game). In the latter case, in the round before the mode selection period occurs, the notification that the mode selection period is started from the next round may be performed (the notification before the start of the selection period). In addition, generation timing when generating the mode selection period in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that becomes the mode selection period is not limited to the example, for example, from 5R start to 6R end It may be generated in any round, such as final round only. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the big hit ending period, it is notified that the mode selection period is to be started later (informing before the start of the selection period) in the round effect of the last round before the ending period starts. You may

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be performed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, one of the effect mode selection in the mode selection period may be automatically selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes by lottery on the sub control side. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, with a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes. An effect (roulette effect) in which the one effect mode is determined (selected) by the roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode in the state C is set to two types (effect mode C and D), but it is possible to select one effect mode from among them as three or more types.

  In addition, the aspect (the fluctuation aspect, the stop aspect, the aspect of the reach production etc) which relates to the fluctuation indication of the production design which is shown in the aforementioned execution example, the production which is executed with the small hitting in state C (production mode C, D) The mode of (small hit pre-reading effect, the first profit effect, the second profit effect, etc.), the mode of the notice effect (display of the notice image) in the effect mode D, the mode of the notification screen or mode selection screen according to the mode selection period, etc. The aspects of the various effects are merely examples, and the aspects of the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the preview image is displayed in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the notice image may be displayed on another image display device provided in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Furthermore, in addition to the image display device consisting of a liquid crystal display, display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided, and in the above-mentioned effect mode D The notice effect corresponding to the display of the notice image may be executable.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 (pachinko gaming machine 1), and the second image display device 71 is The third image display device 72 is also rotatable in the initial state (first state) and in the inclined state (inward of the front frame 51) (inside the front frame 51) (the first state). The second state may be adopted. In this way, the relationship with the hall equipment (CR unit, ball rental machine, other stand-to-car equipment) adjacent to the right of the gaming machine and the gaming machine (frame opening) should not be disturbed. Is possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, one image display 7 (board display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the gaming board side (inside the gaming area), and the gaming machine frame side (outside the gaming area) Although two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) are provided as the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) in the above, the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, two sub liquid crystals as main panel display means (main image display) Providing one sub-liquid crystal on the game board side instead of the left and right of the device 7) or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal) Can. Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiments. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (the inside of the game area) and the display device (the second image provided on the game machine frame side (the outside of the game area) Although the display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices including liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystal. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display or the like. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed in with a plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub-display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display 71 and the third image display The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be dot displays. As a result, it is possible to display various effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance game interest.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, while the variable display and the stop display of the effect pattern 8 are performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) positioned approximately at the center of the game board 2 (the game area 3) in principle (FIG. 58, 67 to 73, FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 75, and FIG. 76), the left symbol (render symbol 8L) is displayed on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal) at the time of execution of full rotation effect. The middle symbol (render symbol 8C) is displayed on the center display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), and the right symbol (render symbol 8R) is displayed on the right indicator screen 72a (right sub-liquid crystal) (see middle of FIG. 77) . In other words, the effect pattern (stop effect pattern) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display is displayed on the first image display device 7 in principle, and in the full rotation effect, the middle pattern of the stop effect pattern is the first image The left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the display device 7 (display screen 7a), and are displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, in the case of variation effects other than the full rotation effect, a part of the stop effect design may be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

  For example, after the variation display of the rendering symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7, when the left symbol and the right symbol stop (temporary stop) on the screen and reach is established, the reach state is configured The left symbol and the right symbol (part of the stop effect symbol) to be displayed are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In that state, after the reach effect display is performed by the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is displayed as a stop (temporary stop) by the first image display device 7, and then the second image display device 71 is displayed. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side on the left and right of the middle symbol, and finally three effect symbols (stop effect symbols) Confirm display. In addition, for example, it indicates whether or not it is a definite change big hit depending on the symbol type when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eyes) in the first image display device 7 (for example, in red pattern) If there is a probability variation big hit, if it is a symbol other than red symbol chance chance hit etc), if so-called "re-lottery effect" is performed when a big hit mode which is not a probability variation big-hit is displayed, all of the above mentioned The middle symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7 as in the rotation effect, and the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and these three symbols are displayed respectively The re-lottery effect is performed by synchronizing and scrolling the device. By providing such an effect mode (variation effect pattern) such as reach effect or re-lottery effect, the display variation of the effect pattern 8 (stop effect pattern) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display increases, and the fluctuation effect is diversified It is possible to

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) are liquid crystal display devices smaller than the first image display device 7 (main display device), The display screen was substantially square (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the sizes (screen sizes) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) may be larger than those shown in the embodiment. Specifically, in the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device) has a length in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen thereof. The image display device (liquid crystal display device) is a vertically-long rectangular image having substantially the same length as or longer than the vertical direction (longitudinal direction), and is provided on the front of the front frame 51 on the left and right of the viewing window 51a. May be Also in this case, the image display device provided on the front left side of the front face frame 51 is pivotally supported in the same manner as the embodiment described above. By providing such a vertically-long rectangular image display device as a secondary display device on the gaming machine frame side (front frame), it is possible to provide a dynamic effect display that gives the player an impact. In particular, the length in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub display device provided on the gaming machine frame side is the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the game board side The effect display expanded on the display screen of the main display device by arranging the sub display devices in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the main display device with the length substantially equal to or longer than the length of the main display device. However, effect display (wide display in the horizontal (left and right) direction) is possible such as expanding (enlarging) to one or both of the sub display devices positioned on the left and right.

  Specifically, for example, a mode (a variation production pattern) of a variation production during the execution of variation display (variation presentation) of the rendering symbol on the first image display device 7 (main display device) is In the case of the specific aspect, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually enlarged to the display screen of the image display device (sub display device) on the frame side It is possible to produce effects such as expanding) or expanding (expanding) the entire display screen at a stretch. Alternatively, when the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed on the main display device through the variable display, the rendering symbol is enlarged and displayed, and one of the left symbol and the right symbol among the three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R Part or all may be displayed on the display screen of the left and right sub display devices, and an effect of displaying a middle symbol on the display screen of the main display device may be possible.

  In addition, from the main display unit (board-side display unit) located approximately at the center of the game board (inside the game area), the display contents from the main display unit (board-side display unit) to the sub display unit (frame-side display unit) In order to obtain the rendering effect by the effect that the (display area) is expanded (expanded), the length in the vertical direction (longitudinal direction) of the display screen of the sub display device is at least the vertical direction of the display screen of the main display device It is desirable to set the length to 1/2 or more, preferably 2/3 or more.

[Others]
Hereinafter, the invention related to the embodiment (example) disclosed in the present specification is disclosed as a reference invention.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is provided with display means for performing variable display of identification information, and based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, a special game advantageous to the player can be executed. There is. In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-370).

  In the gaming machine provided with the display means as described above, the player pays attention to the identification information displayed on the display means to advance the game. However, it becomes difficult for the player to feel bored with the game while the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, making it difficult to maintain interest in the game. This reference invention 1 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the purpose is to realize the display of a new aspect which attracts the player's interest regarding the display of the identification information, and the improvement of the game interest is realized. It is to be done.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition and notifying of a result of the variable display by a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
A variable display means capable of performing variable display of identification information;
The variation display means is
When stopping the fluctuation display of the identification information, the fluctuation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
According to the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display, it is possible to make the stop mode at the time of stopping the variable display different.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the fluctuation display of the identification information is performed by the fluctuation display means, the fluctuation display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode when the fluctuation display is stopped. Then, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. Therefore, the player can estimate the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) after paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information stops. This makes it possible to attract the interest of the player to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
As the stop mode when stopping the variable display of identification information, at least the first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order, and the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first And a second stopping mode which is a second stopping order different from the stopping order.
As a display mode of identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that is an execution trigger of a predetermined special game and a second display that is an execution trigger of another special game different from the predetermined special game Has an aspect and a third display aspect that does not trigger execution of special games,
The variation display means is
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and the variation display of the identification information is performed by the variation display of these symbols. In such a configuration, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order as the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols. And the second stop mode in which the second stop order is different from the first stop order (the first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode serving as an execution trigger for a predetermined special game, a second display mode serving as an execution trigger for another special game different from the special game, and a special game And a third display mode that does not trigger execution of And when the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is performed in the first stop order ( When it is possible to stop in the first stop mode) and it is the second display mode or the third display mode, stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the second stop order (the second stop mode) Is possible. For this reason, the player can estimate the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to feel the expectation for the special game thereafter.

The gaming machine of the reference invention 1-3 is the same as the gaming machine of the reference invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of identification information when the variable display is stopped, there is further a fourth display mode which does not become an execution trigger of the special game,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of identification information, it has a third stop mode in which the stop times of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The variation display means is
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variation display of the identification information (plural symbols), execution of the special game is further performed. When the display mode of the identification information (plural symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, which has the fourth display mode that does not become a trigger. In the third stop mode in which the stop timing (stop timing) of the second stop mode or the plurality of symbols is substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of the plurality of symbols. Therefore, the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed includes a mode (third stop mode) that can immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of expectation for the execution of the special game while making various stop modes when the variable display of the identification information stops.

The gaming machine of the invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of the invention 1-2 or the invention 1-3 described above,
A predetermined effect display is performed when the variable display of identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variation display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variation display is the first display mode In the case of, the predetermined effect display is performed according to this. Therefore, it is indicated that the player is emphasized that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode is executed. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to enhance the rendering effect when the variable display of identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
It has state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of identification information is performed,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information to be displayed by stopping the variable display is higher in the frequency of the first display mode than the first gaming state. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are included as gaming states when the variable information of identification information is displayed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the frequency at which the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode is high. That is, in the second gaming state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display of the first display mode is higher than that in the first display mode. For this reason, in the second gaming state, the frequency with which the variable display of identification information stops in the first stop mode is high. Thereby, in the second gaming state, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and an expectation for the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode is It will be possible to speak.

The gaming machine of the invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of the invention 1-5 described above,
At least a first symbol type and a second symbol type as types of symbols constituting the identification information,
The first display mode is configured of a symbol of a second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
It is characterized in that at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set as a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are included as the types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among the first symbol type and the second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is made the second symbol type in the second gaming state It has become a thing. For this reason, the symbol which can not constitute the first display mode because it is the symbol of the first symbol type in the first gaming state is changed to the symbol which can constitute the first display mode by becoming the second gaming state It will be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the symbol type as well as the stop mode when the fluctuation display of the identification information is stopped.

  According to the above-described reference invention 1, regarding the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize the display of a new aspect that attracts the player's interest, and to improve the game interest.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the game ball can enter the variable entrance (for example, the big winning opening) and the game ball enters the variable entrance. A gaming machine is known in which a predetermined gaming benefit (for example, winning balls) is given to a player based on the above. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of gaming profit to be awarded in response to the entry of the gaming ball to the variable entrance, that is, the amount of gaming profit to be earned by the player (earning profit amount) is predetermined. What is displayed on the display area of is known (see, for example, JP-A-2010-35664).

  However, the display of the acquired profit amount as described above has already been adopted by many gaming machines, and it is an effect of lacking fresh taste. This reference invention 2 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the purpose place is to realize a new aspect of presentation as a presentation to show the amount of profit earned, and to aim at the improvement of game interest .

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable ball entry port that can be changed to a state in which the game ball can not enter and a state in which the ball can enter.
Profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance;
A profit presentation execution unit capable of executing a profit presentation that displays an amount of earned profit when a game profit is given by the profit giving unit;
And state control means capable of controlling the game state;
The state control means can control the gaming state to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the control condition,
The profit effect execution means includes at least a first benefit effect in which an acquired profit amount is additionally displayed based on entering the ball into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the above in a specific period in the specific game state It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second profit presentation in which the acquired profit amount is additionally displayed based on the ball entering the variable entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming ball enters the variable entrance when being controlled to the specific gaming state, and the predetermined gaming profit is provided to the player accordingly, At least two types of effects such as the first profit effect and the second profit effect can be executed as effects (profit effect) for displaying the amount of game profit to be granted (acquired profit amount), of which the second profit effect Is executed during a specific period in a specific gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the profit effect to be executed based on the ball entry to the variable entrance in the specific gaming state, and to improve the fun of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The profit effect execution means does not execute the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and can execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit, and the first profit in the specific period. It is possible to execute the second profit presentation on a predetermined second display unit without executing the presentation,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specified period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is displayed. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in the period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed in the first display part based on the ball entering the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entry into the variable ball entry port. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the acquired profit amount (acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit) displayed by the second profit effect performed in the specific period. An effect of performing addition display (summation) to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to change the display mode of the acquired profit amount in the specific gaming state, and to enhance the effect of the profit presentation.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on establishment of acquisition conditions;
Identification information display means capable of executing variable display of identification information based on the acquired information;
And a prior determination means capable of performing a prior determination of whether or not acquired information is specific acquired information before execution of the variable display.
It is possible to enter the ball into the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can start when the predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquired information storage means as a result of the prior determination in the specific gaming state. It is said that.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to store acquired information acquired based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, and it is possible to execute variable display of identification information based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not the acquired information is specific acquired information, and when the acquired information is specific acquired information, display of the variable display based on the specific acquired information As a result, a specific display result is derived, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the variable entrance. And the specific period in the specific gaming state is a period that can be started under the situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. That is, it is a period which can be started under the situation where it is decided that it becomes possible to enter the variable entrance with the predetermined number of specific acquisition information. Thereby, during the specific gaming state, it is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to enhance the effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-4 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period is ended after being able to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable entrance. The specific period ends when it becomes possible. This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second benefit presentation is performed during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-5 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The prior determination means can execute the prior determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on the fact that the determination result to the effect that the specific acquisition information is newly obtained by the prior determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the preliminary determination can be performed even during the specific period, the preliminary determination is performed for the newly acquired acquisition information during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquired information When the determination result is obtained, the specific period is extended. As a result, since the period in which the second profit effect is performed is extended, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-6 is any of the gaming machines according to Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the prior determination,
When the predetermined effect is performed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be performed is different depending on the number of the specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined effect is executable based on the result of the prior determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and the predetermined effect is The effect mode differs depending on the storage number of the specific acquisition information when executing the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to produce a rendering effect and a rendering effect by a predetermined rendering during the specific gaming state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the specific gaming state.

  According to the above-described reference invention 2, it is possible to realize the effect of the new aspect as the effect of displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game interest.

(Reference Invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is widely known in which a variation display of identification information is performed and a special game can be executed based on the display result of the variation display becoming a specific display result. Among gaming machines of this type, there is one configured such that any of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). As the time when the effect mode can be selected, for example, it can be set to various times such as during a special game (for example, during a big hit game) while displaying the standby screen (demonstration screen) during the variable display of identification information. It is possible. In addition, in the configuration in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, there is one in which the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP-A-2006-174956).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem that fresh taste is lacking. there were. This reference invention 3 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the place made as the purpose is to perform selection of a production mode after a special game in a novel mode, and to aim at improvement of game fun .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable ball entry port that can be changed to a state in which the game ball can not enter and a state in which the ball can enter.
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
It is a gaming machine configured to be able to enter the variable entrance ball in the round game,
It has a plurality of effect modes as an effect mode when variable display of identification information is performed,
Selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is over can be selected from the plurality of effect modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game,
And a first notification means for notifying the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game when generating the selection period in the predetermined round game in the special game. It is

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the start of the special game, it becomes possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the special game is finished can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. When the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game in the special game, notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, after notifying in advance in the previous round game that the effect mode can be selected (a selection period occurs) in the predetermined round game in the special game, it is in the selection period of the effect mode. It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode such as reaching an occurrence (start). As a result, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  In addition, for the selection of the effect mode in the selection period, for example, the player manually selects one of a plurality of effect modes using a predetermined input unit provided in the gaming machine, or the selection of a plurality of effect modes. It includes automatic selection in which one is selected automatically.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
Second notification means for notifying of the selection period in the predetermined round game when generating the selection period in the predetermined round game in the special game;
And third notification means for giving notification before the end of the selection period when the predetermined round game is over and the next round game is started,
The selection period is completed during a round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game is ended and the next round game is performed. When is started, in the round game (the next round game of the predetermined round game), notification before the end of the selection period is performed. Then, during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is performed (during the next round game of the predetermined round game), the selection period is ended. Therefore, when the selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification (the notification by the first notification means) before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game and the predetermined The special game is performed by the notification (the notification by the second notification means) during the selection period performed in the round game and the notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (the notification by the third notification means) It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. As described above, by adopting a new notification mode in which the player is prompted to select the effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the effect mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above notification is performed from before the start to the end of the selection period, so the player selects the effect mode It becomes possible not to miss the opportunity for presentation mode selection without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 includes the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
It has state control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable display of identification information is performed,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the first gaming state and the special game is executed, and the display result of the variable display is the specific display result in the second gaming state The generation time of the selection period is different depending on when the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state and the special game is executed, the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The occurrence time of the selection period of the effect mode differs depending on whether the display result of the variable display in the state is the specific display result and the special game is executed. As a result, the effect mode can be selected in a novel mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable period after that depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Is possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 described above,
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the first gaming state, the selection period occurs after all of the round games constituting the special game are finished. Notification during the selection period is performed,
When the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the second gaming state, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game in the special game. It is a thing.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first gaming state and the special game is executed, all of the round games constituting the special game have ended. A selection period of the effect mode occurs later, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the predetermined round game in the special game is performed. In this case, the notification by the first notification means (the notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (the notification during the selection period), and 3 Notification by the notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived in the first gaming state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the presentation mode after the end of all the round games, and the second gaming state is entered. In the case where the special display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select a rendering mode by the end of all the round games. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of the effect mode selection different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the player is given a different impression. It is possible to give

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 includes the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Have a plurality of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period is different depending on the type of special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the selection period of the effect mode differs depending on the type of special game to be executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. As a result, effect mode selection can be made in a novel mode, such as changing the effect mode selectable timing depending on the type of special game to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-6 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
The plurality of types of special games include at least a first special game and a second special game having more round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all of the round games constituting the first special game are finished, and notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game, in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small, is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game have ended. A selection period of the effect mode occurs later, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when a second special game is executed in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large, a selection period of effect mode occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the notification by the above-mentioned first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period) and the notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period Notification will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (special game with a relatively small number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select a presentation mode after the end of all the round games, and the second special game is performed. When a game (special game with a relatively large number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all the round games. Thereby, it is possible to make the aspect of the effect mode selection different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give the player a different impression. Become.

  According to the above-described reference invention 3, it is possible to improve the game fun by performing the selection of the effect mode after the special game in a new mode.

(Reference Invention 4)
Moreover, in patent document 1 (Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2017-055811), a 2nd starting opening is made into a variable starting opening, the ball-incidence frequency is made low in a low base state, and ball-incidence is raised in a high base state. In the low base state, there was a game in which the player aimed at the first starting opening and in the high base state, the player aimed at the second starting opening. In addition, there is a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is performed aiming at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once in an advantageous state, a game is performed in a right-handed game until the advantageous state is ended, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to say that various entrances are simply disposed in the right hitting area, and efficient gaming can be advanced. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike the conventional game machine, by arranging various ball entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to increase the gaming efficiency. In addition, the present invention provides a gaming machine that enhances the fun of gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific starting port where game balls can enter
A variable starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the specific starting opening;
Identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting opening;
Specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable starting opening is in the second state when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
Special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance can enter the ball entering state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode;
The game machine is characterized in that the specific starting opening, the first variable entrance, the variable starting opening, and the second variable entrance are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific starting opening, a first variable entrance, a variable starting opening, and a second variable entrance are provided at predetermined positions in the gaming area, and these are located upstream of the gaming area. From the downstream side, the specific starting opening, the first variable entrance, the variable starting opening, and the second variable entrance are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

  Specifically, in order to advance the game smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable starting opening related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state), and the specific starting opening related to this, these opening Place it on the most upstream side of the ball mouth. As a result, first, the possibility of setting the variable start port to the second state (open state) is increased. Further, by setting the gaming ball having entered the specific starting opening (passed) as the gate type (gate 28) to flow down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game also smoothly progresses. Further, by arranging the first variable entrance downstream of the specific starting opening, the ball can be quickly hit when a special game is executed, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short time. In addition, by providing the first variable entry ball opening upstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the variable start opening that is in the second state during the special game, and the first variable entry opening is It is also possible to prevent a situation in which the injection is inhibited.

  In addition, by arranging the variable start opening downstream of the first variable entrance, in the special game, the variable start opening in the second state can be used except in the case where the first variable entrance can enter the ball. , It becomes possible to enter the game ball flowing down prior to other ball entrances. This makes it possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where the variable starting port is not entering the ball despite the variable starting port being in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable entry ball opening downstream of the variable start opening, the game ball enters the second variable entry ball opening based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable start opening. The frequency changes, and it becomes possible to add various playability. This enables the diversification of gameplay while providing smooth progression of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The above special modes include the first special mode and the second special mode,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game is considered to have more available game benefits than the second special game.
The first variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are included as modes of the stop display of the identification information that will execute the special game, and as the special game, the first special game and the first special game are performed. 2 Have a special game. Then, the first special game is a special game with many game benefits that can be obtained more than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is allowed to enter (opened), the second special game Then, the second variable ball entry port is allowed to enter the ball.

  Specifically, first, in order to bring the variable starting opening into the second state (opened state), the specific starting opening pertaining to this is disposed on the most upstream side among these ball entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance downstream of the specific starting opening, it is possible to quickly enter the ball when the first special game with a large amount of gaming profit is executed, and in a short period of time of a large number of gaming balls. Enable acquisition. In addition, next, by arranging the variable starting opening downstream of the first variable entry port, in the special game, except in the case where the first variable entry port is in the ball entry enabled state, the second state variable It is possible to cause the game ball flowing down to enter the starting opening preferentially to other ball entrances. In addition, the second variable entry port that can enter the ball in the second special game with a small amount of game profit can be disposed downstream of the variable start port, and can add various game characteristics. This enables the diversification of gameplay while providing smooth progression of the game.

In addition, a different stop pattern can be illustrated as a 1st special mode and a 2nd special mode, for example. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, it is possible to illustrate different special games of execution modes (round number, opening time, gain obtainable, variable entrance for opening state).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state It has a settable game state setting means,
In the second gaming state, the game ball is caused to enter the variable start opening disposed on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entry opening disposed on the downstream side of the variable start opening is By making it difficult to hit the ball,
The ball entering possibility of the game ball to the second variable entry ball opening when the second special game is generated, characterized in that the first game state is higher than the second game state It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set the first gaming state in which the pitch of the gaming ball into the variable starting opening is low and the second gaming state in which the pitch is higher than the first gaming state. When the variable starting opening disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entrance disposed on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable entry is in the entry enable state (opened state) in the second special game, the first game state is the second variable entry than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game ball entry is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3,
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance may be greater than the game profit obtained by entering the variable start opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game profit obtainable by the game ball entering the ball (for example, a prize ball awarded by the game ball entering one ball) is second than the variable start opening. Make more variable ball entry. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first gaming state in which the variable start-up port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball which has flowed down is easy to enter the downstream second variable entrance. In the second gaming state in which the variable starting opening is likely to be in the second state, it is easy to enter the upstream variable starting opening. In this way, the player expects to enter the second variable entry port where the game gain that can be obtained is greater than the variable start opening, and is expected to generate the second special game in the first game state. , Enhance the game interest. Also, thereby, it is possible to differentiate the game benefits that can be obtained when the same second special game occurs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, to diversify the gaming characteristics, and to enhance the gaming interest. It becomes.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4,
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the gaming state before the second special game and the gaming state after the second special game are the same. Thereby, if the second special game can be executed in the first gaming state, the first gaming state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first gaming state, so a plurality of second specials can be performed. By generating a game, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 includes the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of the invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of the inventions 4-1 to 4-6.
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
And first identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the ball into the first starting opening,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information to be variably displayed based on entering the ball to the first starting opening, and the identification information to be variably displayed based on entering the ball to the variable starting opening in parallel. (Simultaneously) variable display is possible. Thus, in the simultaneous variation gaming machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), it is possible to diversify the gaming characteristics while providing smooth progression of the game. Do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game while enabling the smooth progression of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the gaming state includes a plurality of gaming states, and in the probability change state or time saving state advantageous to the player from the normal state triggered by the execution of the big hit game. It has become a transition game machine. In addition, in the advantageous state, when the next big hit game does not occur while the symbol changes and displays a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the setting is made to return to the normal state. In such a gaming machine, the transition of the gaming state exhibited certain effects such as preventing the boredom of the game.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition have not been uniform, and it has not been possible to enhance the amusement of the game. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine which diversifies gaming characteristics and enhances gaming interest by giving a feature to the transition mode of the gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
First identification information that is variably displayed based on entering a ball into the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the second start opening;
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, the special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port enters an enterable state is executed. Game execution means,
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be the identification result A gaming machine,
Having the first specified result as the specified result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability. And, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the high probability and the second game state When the specific number is reached, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
Having the second specified result as the specified result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state The game is characterized by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state by executing a common effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state with the predetermined probability, in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display with is the specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, the player can execute a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with the second probability and the second probability and the second probability. However, it is difficult to recognize whether the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the fun of the game. Also, this makes it possible for the player to expect the gaming state to change to the second gaming state with high probability and to increase the game interest while the specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect. .

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
The high probability and the first gaming state are characterized in that there are more gaming benefits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more obtainable gaming benefits than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player is expected to change the gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability by the elapse of the specific number of times, thereby enhancing the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second disposed on the downstream side than the second starting port By making it difficult to enter the ball into the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second probability It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

  According to such a game machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), which makes it difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entry ball slot disposed on the downstream side. Thus, when the second variable entry ball entrance possible state (open state) in the second special game, the higher probability and the first gaming state is higher probability than the second gaming state, It is assumed that the game ball's entering frequency into the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
In the first special game, the game state after the end of the first special game can be changed,
The second special game does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball, the gaming state after the end of the first special game can be changed. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game is made the same as the game state after the second special game is made. As a result, when the first gaming state becomes a high probability, the high probability and the first gaming state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first gaming state, so a plurality of second special games can be performed. By generating them, it is possible to obtain more gaming profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
First identification information that is variably displayed based on entering a ball into the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the second start opening;
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, the special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port enters an enterable state is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be the identification result;
A game machine comprising: a launcher for launching a game ball into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity;
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting opening is provided in a second game area where game balls launched with a second launch intensity different from the first launch intensity can enter.
Having the first specified result as the specified result,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
As a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on entering the ball into the first starting opening, the first identification result is not obtained,
It is characterized by having a said 1st specific result as a result of the fluctuation | variation display of said 2nd identification information based on the ball into said 2nd starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability. In addition, the first starting opening is provided in the first play area where the first launch strength can enter the ball, and the second start opening is provided in the second play area where the second launch strength is capable of entering the ball . Then, when the first specified result is reached, if the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display with is the specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the fun of the game. Further, the first identification result is not included as a result of the variation display of the first identification information, and the first identification result is included as a result of the variation display of the second identification information. As a result, different game characteristics can be provided in the case where the game ball is made to enter the first starting port and the case where the game ball is made to enter the second starting hole, thereby diversifying the game characteristics and making the game fun. It is possible to enhance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
Having the second specified result as the specified result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches the specific number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state By performing common effects, it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.
The second identification result is characterized by having the second identification result as a result of the fluctuation display of the second identification information based on entering the ball into the second starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. And, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with a predetermined probability, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information When the specific number is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, the player can execute a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with the second probability and the second probability and the second probability. However, it is difficult to recognize whether the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the fun of the game. Also, this makes it possible for the player to expect the gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability when the specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the game entertaining .

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
As the identification result, having a third identification result,
When the third identification result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next identification result And
It is characterized by having the 3rd specification result as a result of change display of the 1st discernment information based on entering a ball into the 1st starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the third specified result and the gaming state after the end of the special game are set to the high probability and the first gaming state, the gaming state is maintained with the high probability and the first gaming state until the next specified result. It is supposed to be. Thereby, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, the high probability and the second game state are not changed to the high probability and the first game state based on the variable display of the specific number of times, and the special game ends It has what guarantees the gaming state of the high probability and the first gaming state until the next specific result is obtained later. Further, thereby, in the game accompanied by the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, and it is possible to diversify the game property and to enhance the game interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4, in the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3,
The high probability and the first gaming state are characterized in that there are more gaming benefits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more obtainable gaming benefits than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player is expected to change the gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability by the elapse of the specific number of times, thereby enhancing the game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of the inventions 6-1 to 6-4,
The second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening,
In the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second disposed on the downstream side than the second starting port By making it difficult to enter the ball into the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second probability It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), which makes it difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entry ball slot disposed on the downstream side. Thus, when the second variable entry ball entrance possible state (open state) in the second special game, the higher probability and the first gaming state is higher probability than the second gaming state, It is assumed that the game ball's entering frequency into the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
In the first special game, the game state after the end of the first special game can be changed,
The second special game does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball, the gaming state after the end of the first special game can be changed. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game is made the same as the game state after the second special game is made. As a result, when the first gaming state becomes a high probability, the high probability and the first gaming state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first gaming state, so a plurality of second special games can be performed. By generating them, it is possible to obtain more gaming profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
First identification information that is variably displayed based on entering a ball into the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the second start opening;
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, the special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port enters an enterable state is executed. Game execution means,
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be the identification result A gaming machine,
The first identification result and the fourth identification result are included as the identification results,
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches a second number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability. Then, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state as a first identification result, in the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display with is the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. In addition, when it becomes the 4th specified result, when the game state after the special game end is set to high probability and 2nd game state, in the high probability and 2nd game state, 1st identification information and 2nd identification information When the number of times of the variable display with is the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and the second gaming state to the high probability and the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the game interest for a long time. Also, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the game interest.

  In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has high probability and the second gaming state has high probability and the second probability. 1 It changes to the game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variation display of the first identification information, when the number of times of variation display of the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has high probability and the second gaming state It is good also as what changes to a 1st game state from high probability. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variation display of the second identification information, when the number of times of variation display of the first identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has high probability and the second game The state may be changed to the first gaming state with high probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1,
The second identification result and the fifth identification result as the identification result;
When the second identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the fifth identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and in the gaming state, the variation between the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of displays reaches the second number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state The game is characterized by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state by executing a common effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as a second specifying result, in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first When the number of times of the variable display of the identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, as a fifth identification result, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined probability and the second gaming state, in the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display with is the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, the player can execute a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same appearing character, the same mode, etc.) with the second probability and the second probability and the second probability. However, it is difficult to recognize whether the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the game interest for a long time. Also, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the game interest. Also, thereby, the player is expecting the gaming state to change to the first gaming state with high probability when the first number has elapsed and the second number has elapsed during execution of the common effect, It becomes possible to increase the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2.
The second number of times is a number greater than the first number of times,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state if the gaming state changes to the second number than if the gaming state changes to the first number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, and the gaming state change timing is higher in the second number of times than in the first number of times. Probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number, the player plays a game expecting to be maintained without changing the gaming state, and the gaming state reaches the second number while remaining in the second gaming state. In this case, the game is played with a high probability and an expectation to change to the first gaming state. In this way, in the second gaming state, there are points that enhance the sense of expectation a plurality of times. Also, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2,
The second number of times is a number greater than the first number of times,
It is more likely that the gaming state will change to the high probability and the first gaming state if the gaming state changes to the first number than if the gaming state changes to the second number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is greater than the first number, and the gaming state change timing is higher in the first number than in the second number. Probability and the possibility of changing to the first gaming state are high. In this way, when the player reaches the first number, he / she plays in expectation of a change in the gaming state, and when the gaming state reaches the second number while remaining in the second gaming state, it is possible. Sex is played with a high probability of being lower than that of the first number and in expectation of changing to the first gaming state. In this way, in the second gaming state, there are points that enhance the sense of expectation a plurality of times. Also, this makes it possible to diversify the gameplay and to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The high probability and the first gaming state are characterized in that there are more gaming benefits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the higher probability and the first gaming state is in a gaming state in which there are more obtainable gaming benefits than the high probability and the second gaming state. As a result, the player is expected to change the gaming state to the first gaming state with a high probability by the elapse of the specific number of times, thereby enhancing the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
The second start port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second start port.
In the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second disposed on the downstream side than the second starting port By making it difficult to enter the ball into the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second probability It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

  According to such a game machine, the second start port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second start port. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), which makes it difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entry ball slot disposed on the downstream side. Thus, when the second variable entry ball entrance possible state (open state) in the second special game, the higher probability and the first gaming state is higher probability than the second gaming state, It is assumed that the game ball's entering frequency into the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

The gaming machine of the invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of the inventions 7-1 to 7-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
In the first special game, the game state after the end of the first special game can be changed,
The second special game does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is capable of entering a ball in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball, the gaming state after the end of the first special game can be changed. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter the ball does not change the gaming state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the second special game is made the same as the game state after the second special game is made. As a result, when the first gaming state becomes a high probability, the high probability and the first gaming state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first gaming state, so a plurality of second special games can be performed. By generating them, it is possible to obtain more gaming profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
First identification information that is variably displayed based on entering a ball into the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the second start opening;
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, the special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port enters an enterable state is executed. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be the identification result;
A first condition state in which a time of variation display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; and a second condition state in which a time of variation display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A second identification information variation time determination means capable of setting
In the second condition state, an average time of time of variation display of the second identification information to be determined is shorter than that of the first condition state.
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the first It is characterized by having two condition states, the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the first condition state (2) A second identification information fluctuation time determination means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of fluctuation display time of identification information is shorter than the first condition state. Further, as the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, and the high probability And in the gaming state in which the second gaming state and the second condition state are set and the first condition state is set, the fluctuation display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition is set. In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1,
If the result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific result, the possibility that the player is more advantageous for the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific result is higher. It is characterized by

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility that the player is more advantageous than the first identification information is higher when the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the identification result. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game to be executed as a specific result, to increase the possibility of increase, or to increase the possibility of becoming an advantageous state after the end of the special game. is there. As a result, the player is expected to be set to the second condition state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be performed in a relatively short time, ie, the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed a lot. Will play a game. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the gaming states, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the game interest.

Further, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
It has the third starting port where game balls can enter.
The second identification information is variably displayed on the basis of the ball entering the third starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the game machine has a third starting opening on which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the gaming ball. As a result, the second identification information is changed and displayed by entering either of the variable second starting opening and the third starting opening, and it becomes possible to enhance game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of the invention 8-1 or 8-2.
It has a launcher that launches game balls into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter.
A second game in which gaming balls fired at the second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter the second starting aperture, the first variable entering aperture, and the second variable entering aperture. Provided in the area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the game ball is displayed in the first gaming area to variably display the first identification information and play a game ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the case of the two condition state, by playing the game ball in the second game area, the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the player can enter with the first firing strength, and the second starting opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , And is provided in the second game area where the player can enter the ball with the second launch intensity. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the game is played by firing the gaming ball in the first gaming area and fluctuating the first identification information. Also, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, when in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area It is assumed that the game is played by causing the second identification information to be changed and displayed.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and to enhance the game interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is advantageous for the player, it is possible to play the game in expectation of setting the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the gaming states, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3,
It has a launcher that launches game balls into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter.
The second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance have a game ball launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. Provided in the possible second game area,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the game ball is displayed in the first gaming area to variably display the first identification information and play a game ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the case of the two condition state, by playing the game ball in the second game area, the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the player can enter with the first firing intensity, and the second starting opening, the third starting opening, the first variable entrance and the second opening are provided. The variable entrance is provided in the second game area where the player can enter with the second launch intensity. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and the first gaming state and the first condition state, the game is played by firing the gaming ball in the first gaming area and fluctuating the first identification information. Also, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, when in the first condition state, the game ball is shot in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game, and in the second condition state, the game ball is displayed in the second game area It is assumed that the game is played by causing the second identification information to be changed and displayed.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and to enhance the game interest. In addition, when the variation display of the second identification information is advantageous for the player, it is possible to play the game in expectation of setting the second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of gaming states are set, so that it is possible to diversify the gaming states, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of the inventions 8-1 to 8-5,
The high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state have more game benefits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming condition which can be acquired more is more likely to be obtained by the first gaming state and the second condition state with a higher probability than the second gaming state and the second condition state. There is. As a result, the player proceeds with the game in anticipation that the gaming state is set to the first gaming state and the second condition state with a high probability, and enhances the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-6,
The second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening,
In the high probability, the second gaming state, and the second condition state, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second starting port is more than the second starting port By making it difficult to enter the second variable entry port disposed downstream, the entry possibility of the game ball to the second variable entry port, the high probability and the second game It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state are higher than the state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), which makes it difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entry ball slot disposed on the downstream side. Thus, when the second variable entry ball entrance possible state (open state) in the second special game, high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state is higher probability and second It is assumed that the ball entering frequency of the game ball to the second variable entrance is higher than the gaming state and the second condition state. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

  According to the gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 9)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter
A second starting opening that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the ball entry probability of the gaming ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball,
A second variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entering possible state in which the game ball can enter and into a ball impossible state in which the game ball can not enter.
First identification information that is variably displayed based on entering a ball into the first starting opening;
Second identification information that is variably displayed based on entering the second start opening;
The first gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is a predetermined frequency, and the second gaming state in which the entering frequency of the gaming ball to the variable starting opening is higher than the first gaming state Game state setting means that can be set;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, the special game in which the first variable entry port or the second variable entry port enters an enterable state is executed. Game execution means,
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be the identification result A gaming machine,
As the gaming state, the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, and the high probability and the second gaming state And
The second variable entrance is characterized in that when the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state is reached, the ball entering frequency of the gaming ball becomes high.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state setting means capable of setting the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability. In addition, the game state has a predetermined probability and a first gaming state, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, among which It is assumed that the ball entering frequency to the second variable entrance increases when the high probability and the first gaming state are reached. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first gaming state. Further, this makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
It has a launcher that launches game balls into the game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting opening is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter.
A second game area where game balls launched with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter the second start opening, the first variable entry aperture, and the second variable entry aperture. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the game ball is displayed in the first gaming area to variably display the first identification information to play a game,
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the gaming ball is fired to the second gaming area It is a gaming machine to play a game by variably displaying the second identification information.
In the gaming state in which the second identification information is variably displayed by playing the game ball in the second game area,
The entering frequency of the gaming ball to the second variable entry is higher than the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, and higher than the high probability and the second gaming state, the higher probability and the first gaming state Is characterized by being higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting opening is provided in the first game area where the player can enter with the first firing strength, and the second starting opening, the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance are , And is provided in the second game area where the player can enter the ball with the second launch intensity. When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, the game is performed by firing the gaming ball in the first gaming area and variably displaying the first identification information. Also, when the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, or a high probability and a second gaming state, the game ball is fired to the second gaming area and the second identification information is It is assumed that a variable display is made to play a game. Also, in the gaming state in which the game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, that is, in the second probability, the second gaming state, the second probability, the first gaming state, and the second probability, the second gaming state The game state in which the ball entry frequency of the game ball to the variable entrance is the highest is taken as the high probability and the first game state.

  As a result, when the player is in a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, the player proceeds with the game in the expectation that the gaming state is the high probability and the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming characteristics, and to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening,
In the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is caused to enter the second starting port disposed on the upstream side of the gaming area, and the second disposed on the downstream side than the second starting port By making it difficult to enter the ball into the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, the high probability and the second probability It is characterized in that the high probability and the first gaming state are higher than the gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting opening is provided on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening. Then, the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), which makes it difficult to enter the gaming ball into the second variable entry ball slot disposed on the downstream side. Thus, when the second variable entry ball entrance possible state (open state) in the second special game, the higher probability and the first gaming state is higher probability than the second gaming state, It is assumed that the game ball's entering frequency into the second variable entrance is high. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of entering the second variable entrance, make the gaming characteristics diversified, and enhance the fun of the game, depending on the gaming state when the second special game occurs.

  According to the gaming machine of the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, when a display condition of the variable display is a specific display result, the gaming machine is capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined profit can be given to the player when the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, during the variable display of the identification information, various effects for enhancing the player's sense of expectation are performed to improve the game interest. As such an effect, for example, information on fluctuation display of identification information currently being executed, fluctuation display of identification information to be executed thereafter, and the like (for example, an expectation (reliability) that a display result becomes a specific display result, display There is known an effect that displays (notices) a fluctuation (effect) mode or the like until the result is derived (see, for example, JP-A-2002-239122).

  However, the effects performed during the variable display of identification information as described above have already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effects are also uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance game interest. This reference invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect to be performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information. , To improve the game interest.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Variation display means capable of performing variation display of identification information;
State control means capable of controlling the game state when the variable information of identification information is displayed;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be awarded based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result;
An information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information on a game after the end of the fluctuation display while the fluctuation information of the identification information is displayed;
At least the first information, the second information, and the third information as the information.
The first information indicates that a special game is to be executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state will be more disadvantageous than the current gaming state after the end of the variable display,
At the start of the information display effect, the information display effect executing means can display at least two pieces of information among the first to third information.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect for displaying information on the game after the end of the fluctuation display is executed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, the start of the information display effect is performed on the fluctuation display The first information indicating that the special game is executed after the end, the second information indicating that the current gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display, and the gaming state is now after the end of the variable display It is possible to display at least two pieces of information out of the third information indicating that the player is in a disadvantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player makes an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 10-2 is the same as the gaming machine of the invention 10-1 described above,
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that the first information and the second information are displayed when the information display effect is started, and the second information and the third information are displayed. It is said that.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect is started, the first information and the second information may be displayed, and the second information and the third information may be displayed. Therefore, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can guess that there is no possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous, and the second If the information and the third information are displayed, the possibility that the later game development will be disadvantageous can not be excluded. As a result, it is possible to obtain a stage effect that stirs the player's expectation and anxiety.

The gaming machine of the invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of the invention 10-1 or the invention 10-2.
As the special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second special game is a special game having more available game benefits than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls the game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls the game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second gaming state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is to be executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display,
The third information is characterized by indicating that a gaming state is to be the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has at least a first special game and a second special game as a special game, and has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state as gaming states, a second special The game is a special game in which there are more game benefits obtainable than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state after the end of the first special game is the first game state, and the game state after the end of the second special game is the second game state. Then, the information display effect can be executed in the second gaming state (advantage state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is to be executed, the second The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued even after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state is to be the first gaming state. For this reason, the information display effect is to display information (game expansion) regarding the game after the game in the second gaming state (variation display of identification information) as a reference. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the second gaming state.

The gaming machine of the invention 10-4 is the same as the gaming machine of the invention 10-3 described above,
It has a fluctuation production execution means capable of executing fluctuation production during fluctuation display of identification information,
The said fluctuation production execution expedient can execute fluctuation production on the basis of the specified fluctuation production pattern,
At least a first variation presentation pattern, a second variation presentation pattern, and a third variation presentation pattern as the variation presentation pattern,
When the second special game can be executed by the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the first change effect pattern during the change display,
When the first special game can be executed by the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information becoming the specific display result, it is possible to execute the fluctuation presentation based on the second fluctuation presentation pattern during the fluctuation display,
When the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, it is possible to execute fluctuation presentation based on the third fluctuation presentation pattern during the fluctuation display,
The information display effect execution means is
The first information and the second information can be displayed when the fluctuation presentation based on the first fluctuation presentation pattern is executed and when the fluctuation presentation based on the third fluctuation presentation pattern is executed,
The second information and the third information can be displayed when the change effect based on the second change effect pattern is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute fluctuation presentation based on a predetermined fluctuation presentation pattern during fluctuation display of identification information, and at least a first fluctuation presentation pattern and a second fluctuation presentation as fluctuation presentation patterns. It has a pattern and a third variation presentation pattern. When the second special game can be executed by the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information becoming the specific display result, the fluctuation presentation based on the first fluctuation presentation pattern during the fluctuation display, the display of the fluctuation display of the identification information When the first special game can be executed when the result becomes the specific display result, the change presentation based on the second change presentation pattern during the change display, and the display result of the change display of the identification information is the non-specific display result In this case, it is possible to execute the fluctuation presentation based on the third fluctuation presentation pattern during the fluctuation display. Then, during the fluctuation display of the identification information, the information display in the fluctuation display is performed when the fluctuation presentation based on the first fluctuation production pattern is executed and when the fluctuation presentation based on the third fluctuation presentation pattern is executed It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the effect, and when the change effect based on the second change effect pattern is executed, the information display effect is started at the time of the change display. It is possible to display 2 information and 3rd information. For this reason, when the fluctuation presentation based on the second fluctuation presentation pattern is executed, the information display presentation which displays the first information and the second information is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to achieve matching between the information display effect and the fluctuation effect performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of the invention 10-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the inventions 10-1 to 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means can change the display mode of the information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize what the subsequent game development will be according to the display mode of the subsequent information. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above-described reference invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect capable of attracting the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the game interest.

(Reference Invention 11)
Conventionally, a variation display of identification information is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variation display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine that can execute a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be provided to the player. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, it is common to perform various effects along with the progress of a game such as a variable display of identification information or a special game. Among such gaming machines, there is a type of effect (reach effect etc.) indicating whether the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result as a character effect by a predetermined character (e.g. See 2016-154657).

  However, the configuration for performing character effects by reach effects or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and its execution mode is also uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance game interest. This reference invention 11 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the place made into the purpose aims at the improvement of the game interest of the gaming machine provided with the character production by giving the characteristic to the execution mode of the character production. It is.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Variation display means capable of performing variation display of identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be awarded based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result;
It is a game machine provided with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect executing means is
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
The present invention is characterized in that there are a case in which a character effect is performed in accordance with a variable display of identification information and a case in which a character effect is performed in accordance with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are cases in which a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to give relevance to the effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information and the effect accompanying the special game, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 described above,
It has state control means that can control the game state,
The state control means can control the gaming state when the variable display of the identification information is performed to a specific gaming state,
When the specified gaming state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing character effects by characters displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state when the variable information of the identification information is displayed becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed as the variable information of the identification information There is a case where it is executed along with a case where it is executed along with a special game. This makes it possible to enhance the game interest of the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above,
The first specific display result and the second specific display result are included as the specific display result,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the second specific display result,
The first special game has more available game benefits than the second special game,
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is executed in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the game profit that can be awarded to the player is relatively large. When it becomes possible, the character effect is executed along with the variable display, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit which can be awarded to the player is relatively small. When the second special game to be performed can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game. Thereby, when the variable display of the identification information is performed (when the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) which becomes the execution trigger of the first special game, or when the second special game is performed It is possible to enhance.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-4 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 described above,
A first variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a state in which the game ball can not enter and a state in which the ball can enter.
The game ball is provided with a second variable entrance capable of changing to a non-fillable state and a non-fillable state,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific gaming state, the ball entering frequency of the game ball to the second variable entrance associated with the second special game is higher than the gaming state other than the specific gaming state,
The effect executing means is
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result in the specific gaming state and the first special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result in the specific gaming state and the second special game can be executed, the character effect is executed along with the second special game It is characterized by

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game ball enters the first variable entrance. In the second special game executed by the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result becomes possible, it becomes possible to enter the game ball to the second variable entrance, and In the specific gaming state, the frequency at which the game balls enter the second variable entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in the gaming states other than the specific gaming state. As a result, the second variable entry associated with the second special game is performed under the condition that the variable display of the identification information can be executed (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) which becomes an execution trigger of the first special game It becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the entry of the game ball into the ball mouth and the execution of the character effect, and to enhance the game interest of the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-5 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. This makes it possible to enhance the fun of the gaming machine equipped with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the fluctuation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result,
The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined probability and the high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result (execution probability of the first special game), The probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the second specific display result (probability of execution of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. For this reason, the possibility that the second special game will be executed is high, and accordingly, the possibility of the character effect accompanying the second special game also becomes high. This makes it possible to enhance the fun of the game when the second special game is played.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-7 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result is a high probability. Therefore, the possibility of character effect accompanying the second special game Is high, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the execution of the character presentation accompanying the variable display of the identification information. This makes it possible to enhance the game interest of the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-8 is the game machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
The first character and the second character are included as the characters displayed on the predetermined display unit,
As the character effect, it has a first character effect and a second character effect.
The first character effect is an effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and is an effect that does not include the second effect,
The effect executing means is
When the character presentation is performed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, the first character presentation is performed,
In the case of executing a character effect along with the special game, the second character effect is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and character effects by the first character and the second character are executed. The character effect includes a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a first character and the second character after the first effect. The effect includes the second effect, and the second character effect is an effect that does not include the second effect of the effect by the first character and the second character. Then, the first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed along with the fluctuation display of the identification information, and the second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed according to the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the character effect in a mode suitable for the game situation, and it becomes possible to attract the player's interest in the character effect.

  According to the above reference invention 11, it is possible to improve the fun of the gaming machine provided with the character effect by providing the feature to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the display result of the fluctuation display becomes the specific display result. Are known. Among gaming machines of this type, there is a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other displays (see, for example, JP 2013-240381 A).

  In the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player pays attention to the display contents of each display means to advance the game. However, the configuration provided with a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many game machines, and the aspect of display by a plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the amusement of this type of gaming machine. This reference invention 12 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the place made into the purpose has the feature in the mode of the display by a plurality of display means, and the game enjoyment of the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means To improve.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
A first display means,
A second display means,
Fluctuation display start means capable of starting fluctuation display of identification information by the first display means based on establishment of a predetermined fluctuation start condition;
A suggestion display execution means capable of executing a suggestion display that suggests the possibility that the indication result of the variation indication of the identification information will be the identification indication result;
The suggestion display execution means can execute suggestion display on at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined change start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result is suggested. The suggestion display can be performed on at least one of the first display means and the second display means. As a result, in addition to the variable display of the identification information in the first display means, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the suggestion display by the first display means and the second display means.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-1 described above,
Equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the gaming area formed on the gaming board, and the second display means is provided outside the gaming area, a wide range of displays can be made inside and outside the gaming area Is possible. This makes it possible to make an impact indication with an impact.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-2 described above,
The second display means comprises left display means located on the side of the left gaming area in the gaming area, and right display means located on the side of the right gaming area in the gaming area,
The suggestion display execution means is characterized in that, when the indication display is executed by the second display means, the indication display can be executed by at least one of the left indication means and the right indication means.

  According to such a game machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and near the left game area, and the game area The suggestion display can be performed by at least one display means among the three display means with the right display means (second display means) provided outside the right gaming area and on the side of the right gaming area. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the suggestion display and to enhance the interest when the suggestion display is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-4 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 described above,
The suggestion display execution means is characterized in that, when the indication display is performed by the second display means, the indication display can be executed in different modes by the left display means and the right display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute different types of suggestion display in the left display means and the right display means, so the suggestion display performed in the left display means and the suggestion display performed in the right display means It is possible to make each player pay attention to the player. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-5 is the game machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-4 described above,
When the suggestion display execution means does not execute the suggestion display in the second display means, the second display means is provided with a predetermined display performing means capable of executing another predetermined display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the indication display is not executed by the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed by the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second display means.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-5 described above,
It comprises a specific display execution means capable of executing specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result after the start of the variable display of the identification information,
In the specific display execution means, there are a case where the specific display is performed by the first display means, and a case where the specific display is performed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, the specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is the first display means And the first display means and the second display means. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the specific display and to enhance the interest when the specific display is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-6 described above,
A stop display execution unit capable of executing display of stop identification information when stopping variable display of identification information;
The stop display execution means may execute the display of the stop identification information on the first display means, and the display of the stop identification information on the first display means and the second display means. It is characterized by

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display unit, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped is executed by the first display unit. , And may be executed by the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information stops and to enhance the interest when the stop identification information is displayed.

  According to the above-described reference invention 12, it is possible to impart a feature to the display mode by the plurality of display means, and to improve the fun of the gaming machine provided with the plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 for solving the problem relating to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 12 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
A first display means,
A second display means,
Fluctuation display start means capable of starting fluctuation display of identification information by the first display means based on establishment of a predetermined fluctuation start condition;
An effect display execution unit capable of executing an effect display related to the variable display of identification information;
The effect display execution means is characterized in that the effect display is performed by the first display means, and the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined change start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the effect display related to the variable display of the identification information is executed by the first display means And the first display means and the second display means. Thus, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display by the first display means or the second display means, triggered by the start of the variable display of the identification information in the first display means.

  Note that “effect display relating to variable display” means, for example, effect display that changes the background when performing variable display of identification information, or effect that indicates whether the result of the variable display is a specific display result or not It refers to various effect displays related to the variable display of the identification information, such as the effect display which indicates the level of the possibility that the result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.

The gaming machine of the invention 13-2 is the same as the gaming machine of the invention 13-1 described above,
As an aspect in the case where the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, a first aspect which is initially executed by the first display means and the second display means, and the first A second mode that is executed by one display means and then executed by the second display means,
When the effect display execution means executes effect display with the first display means and the second display means, the effect display based on the first aspect and the second effect display until the variable display of the identification information ends. It is characterized in that either one of the effect display based on the aspect can be performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, as an aspect in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display unit and the second display unit, the effect display by the first display unit and the second display unit from the beginning And a second mode in which the effect display is performed by the second display means after the effect display is performed by the first display means at first. And, when the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, any of the effect display based on the first mode and the effect display based on the second mode until the variation display of the identification information is finished. One or the other can be implemented. As a result, it is possible to enhance interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed, without making the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display uniform.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-3 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-2 described above,
The effect display based on the second aspect is an effect display according to an aspect in which the display area of the effect display executed by the first display means is gradually expanded to the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second aspect, that is, at first, the effect display is executed by the first display means, and thereafter, even by the second display means When the effect display is executed, the effect display is such that the display area of the effect display on the first display means is gradually expanded to the second display means. Thereby, it is possible to produce an effect such that the display area of the effect display gradually expands from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed. Become.

The gaming machine of the invention 13-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the inventions 13-1 to 13-3 described above,
Equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the gaming area formed on the gaming board, and the second display means is provided outside the gaming area, a wide range of displays can be made inside and outside the gaming area Is possible. This makes it possible to display an effect with impact.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-5 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-4 described above,
The second display means comprises left display means located on the side of the left gaming area in the gaming area, and right display means located on the side of the right gaming area in the gaming area,
The effect display execution means is characterized in that, when effect display is performed by the second display means, effect display can be performed by at least one of the left display means and the right display means.

  According to such a game machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and near the left game area, and the game area The effect display can be performed by any one of the three display means with the right display means (second display means) provided outside the right gaming area. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest when the effect display is performed.

  According to the above-described reference invention 13, it is possible to impart features to display modes by a plurality of display means, and to improve the fun of the gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 14)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of performing a special game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the display result of the fluctuation display becomes the specific display result. Are known. In this type of game machine, the frame (front frame) constituting the outer shell of the game machine is provided with rendering means such as movable characters (gimmicks), LEDs, speakers, presentation indicators, etc. There is a device that enhances the rendering effect by driving along with it (see, for example, JP-A-2016-195934).

  However, when providing the rendering means in the frame of the gaming machine, for example, the relationship with the island equipment (CR unit, data display, etc.) where the gaming machine is installed and the other gaming machines installed adjacently, the front It is necessary to consider the opening and closing of the frame, etc., usually accompanied by the constraints. For this reason, in the gaming machine provided with the rendering means in the frame, the installation mode of the rendering means is likely to be uniform, and the fact is that the novelty is lacking. This reference invention 14 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and the place made as the purpose is to provide the game machine which can make an installation mode of a presentation means have a feature, and to feel novelty. It is in.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A game board in which a game area is formed on the front,
A front frame that covers the front of the game board and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
The front frame is pivotally supported at one side end thereof so as to be openable / closable,
A first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided rotatably on the side of the viewing window on the one side end side of the front surface of the front frame. It is a thing.

  According to such a game machine, the front frame covering the front of the game board is provided so as to be openable / closable (rotatable) around the axis at one side end by pivotally supporting the one side end side . The first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image can be pivoted between the front window and the viewing window side of the front frame on one side end of the front of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported. Provided in Because the viewing window of the front frame, which allows the game area formed on the front of the game board to be viewed, is located on the inner side (center side) of the front frame than the one side end side of the front frame. By turning the first frame side display means to the viewing window side when the front frame is opened, it becomes possible to fit the first frame side display means to the viewing window side (inside the front frame). When closing the front frame, the first frame display means is rotated by rotating the first frame display means in the opposite direction (one side end of the front frame) as when the front frame is opened. Can be brought into the original state. Therefore, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one side end side of the front face of the front face on which the front face is pivotally supported, the opening and closing of the front face is hindered. Since it is not necessary, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement such as providing the display means (the first frame side display means) on one side end side of the front frame which is pivotally supported. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it possible to feel a novelty that has not been achieved conventionally.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-2 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1 described above,
The first frame display means is configured to be inclined toward the viewing window while the display surface is visible from the front when in the initial state in which the display means is not rotated toward the viewing window.
A maintenance means capable of maintaining the first frame-side display means in the initial state is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first frame display means is in the initial state in which it is not rotated to the viewing window side, the display surface is inclined to the viewing window while being visible from the front. It is possible to maintain the first frame side display means in that state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame display means is inclined to the viewing window side, a player who plays a game while viewing the game area through the viewing window displays the first frame display means with less eye movement. It becomes possible to visually recognize the face (display content), and by keeping the first frame display means in such a state (initial state), the first frame can be closed to play a game under the first condition. It becomes possible to secure good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame side display means.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-3 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-2 described above,
The maintenance means is characterized by biasing means for biasing the first frame side display means to the one side end side.

  According to such a game machine, the maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state urges the first frame side display means to the one side end side (the side supported by the front frame). It consists of an energizing means. For this reason, the initial state of the first frame side display means is solved by rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side, and the first frame side display means is released by releasing the rotation to the viewing window side. By the action of the biasing means (maintenance means), it is biased to one side end side of the front frame, and returns to the initial state. Thus, when the first frame display means is not rotated toward the viewing window, the first frame display means can be automatically brought into the initial state.

The gaming machine of the invention 14-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the inventions 14-1 to 14-3 described above,
A second frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other side end side facing the one side end side of the front face of the front face frame.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second frame display capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other side end side facing the one side end side provided with the first frame side display means among the front face of the front side frame Means are provided. As a result, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a novel frame (front frame) in which display means are arranged on both sides of one side end and the other side of the front frame.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-5 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-4 described above,
The second frame display means is configured to be inclined toward the viewing window while the display surface is visible from the front.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display means is configured to be inclined toward the viewing window while the display surface is visible from the front. Thereby, the player who plays a game while visually recognizing the game area through the visual recognition window visually recognizes the display surface (display content) of the second frame side display means with less eye movement as in the first frame side display means. It is possible to

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5 described above,
On the back side of the game board is provided a board-side display means which can display a predetermined image and can be viewed from the front through the viewing window.

  According to such a gaming machine, a board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board side display means can be viewed from the front through the front frame visible window It is assumed. As a result, various displays can be performed using frame side display means provided on the front side of the front side frame (outside the game area) and board side display means provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area). It becomes possible to increase the game interest.

  According to the above-described reference invention 14, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a characteristic to the installation mode of the rendering means and making it feel novelty.

(Reference Invention 15)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on entering the ball to the starting opening, it performs the decision of success or failure with a predetermined big hit probability and displays the symbols variably, and when the result of the success or failure decision becomes a big hit, it stops and displays the symbols in big hit symbols, There was something to execute the big hit game which opens the winning a prize mouth. In addition, the game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the result of the success or failure judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol Showed the possibility of Also, as a big hit, the player had a plurality of big hits of a relatively favorable big hit and a relatively disadvantageous big hit. Also, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, etc.), there are a plurality of game effects of different execution modes (render modes), showing different big hit reliability depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, when the game effect with a high hit probability is performed, the game interest of the player is enhanced, and when it is an advantageous big hit, the game interest is further enhanced.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the game effect with a large hit reliability is executed, while enhancing the game interest, when the result of the game effect is a relatively disadvantageous big hit for the player, the game interest is There was a risk of causing a decline. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances the sense of security for the game and enhances the game interest.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 15-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Game effect execution means capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information;
A variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is allowed to enter the ball,
Game state setting means capable of setting the game state after the end of the special game to the first game state and the second game state;
Equipped with
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
The game effect includes a first special game effect and a second special game effect in which the first special game effect and the effect mode are different,
The first gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The effect mode having a predetermined gaming state includes a first effect mode indicating the first gaming state and a second effect mode indicating the second gaming state.
When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and the special game is executed after the special game is over. Setting the rendering mode to the second rendering mode;
When the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode, and the special game is executed. The case where the first effect mode is continued without being performed, and the case where the special game is executed and the effect mode after the special game is ended is not set to the second effect mode. It is said that.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a first effect mode that suggests the first gaming state and a second effect mode that suggests the second gaming state as the effect mode that suggests the gaming state. The first gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Further, as the game effects that can be executed in the first effect mode, there are a first special game effect in which a specific character appears, and a second special game effect in which the first special game effect and the effect mode are different. And, when the first special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, the special game is executed when continuing the first effect mode without executing the special game. There are times when the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the second effect mode. In addition, when the second special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the first effect mode, There is a time to continue the first game mode without executing a special game, and the rendering mode is not set to the second rendering mode.

  Thereby, when the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode that suggests the player the first gaming state relatively advantageous, the effect mode does not shift to the second effect mode. The player can play the game with a sense of security. Also, when the second special game effect is executed, the first effect mode continues even after the special game is executed, or the first effect mode continues even if the special game is not executed. The player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, even when the first special game effect that may shift to the second effect mode is executed, the special game is not executed, but since the first effect mode is continued, the player's expectation is expected. It is possible to maintain the feeling and to prevent the decline of the game interest as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1.
The execution of the first special game effect in the first effect mode is characterized in that the effect mode is a condition for shifting from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode is set to the first effect mode that suggests the first gaming state advantageous to the player, the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode. Is the transition condition to the second rendering mode. As a result, since the effect mode does not shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode without the intervention of the first special game effect, the player when a game effect other than the first special game effect is executed As a result, it is possible to enhance the sense of security, enhance tension when the first special game effect is executed, and provide a sharp game.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 or Reference Invention 15-2,
As the identification result, the first identification result and a second identification result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first identification result is provided,
Having a third gaming state as the gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state.
As the effect mode, there is a third effect mode that suggests the third gaming state,
In the first special game effect, a specific character is to appear.
As the game effect, it has a third special game effect in which the specific character appears,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, the specific result is the second specific result. 1) It is characterized in that it becomes a specific result.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a specified result that is to execute the special game, it has a first specified result and a second specified result that is more disadvantageous than the first specified result. It has a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state. In addition, it has the 3rd production mode which suggests the 3rd game state as production mode, as the game production which can be executed in the 3rd production mode, the particular character which is common with the character which appears with the 1st special game production appears Have a third special game effect. Then, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the identification result, the identification result is taken as the first identification result advantageous to the player. .

  Thereby, in the first effect mode, the first special game effect causing a specific character to appear even if the result is a specific result appears, but in the third effect mode, a third special game causing a specific character to appear The effect is set to a game effect that results in an advantageous result when a specific result is obtained. That is, in the effect mode, a game effect in which the same specific character appears is regarded as a game effect having a different value for the player. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the feeling of expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears, depending on the effect mode, to prevent the boredom of the game and to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, after the special game is over A gaming state is set to the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is the identification result, the first game state after the end of the special game is determined. It shall be set to the gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase the value of the third special game effect in the third effect mode, and to increase the player's sense of expectation when the third special game effect in which the specific character appears in the third effect mode is executed. It becomes. Further, this makes it possible to make the sense of expectation for the game effect in which the same specific character appears different depending on the effect mode, to prevent the boredom of the game and to enhance the game interest. Further, the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to a first effect mode that suggests the first game state.

  When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed to set the effect mode after the end of the special game to the first effect mode. Further, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect is not executed by executing the special game and shifting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. A plurality of types may be provided. In addition, “when the predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect is not executed by executing the special game and shifting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. The number of ", when the predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed to shift the effect mode after the special game is over to the second effect mode. It may be more than the number of game effects.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the player's sense of security and enhances the game interest.

(Reference Invention 16)
In the conventional gaming machine, although the amount of winning balls earned during consecutive playing is indicated, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the amount of gaming profit earned during different periods. As a result, there is a possibility that the game interest will be reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily showing the amount of gaming profit acquired by the player and preventing a decrease in amusement of the game. It is.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 16-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
An identification information display unit that variably displays identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
A first profit information display section capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount of gaming profit acquired in the first period;
A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount of gaming profit acquired in the second period which is longer than the first period;
A first display device capable of displaying predetermined game information related to a game; (sub liquid crystal)
And a second display device provided separately from the first display device and capable of displaying predetermined game information related to a game (main liquid crystal)
The first display device may be provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device may be provided with the second profit information display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit acquired in the first period, and the gaming profit acquired in the second period longer than the first period A second profit information display section capable of displaying profit information indicating a quantity, and the first display apparatus is provided with the first profit information display section, and the second display apparatus provided separately from the first display apparatus is Provide a profit information display unit. This makes it possible to display game benefits acquired in different length periods on different display devices. As a result, the player checks the first display device if he wants to check the game profit earned in the first period, and the second display device if he wishes to check the game profit earned in the second period. Since it is sufficient to confirm, it becomes easy to grasp the game profit acquired in the desired period.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1.
It is a gaming machine that fires gaming balls in a gaming area to execute a game,
The first display device is provided outside the game area,
The second display device is provided inside the game area,
In a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device is provided with the first profit information display portion, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display portion and the identification information display portion. It is

  According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device provided with the first profit information display unit is provided outside the game area, and the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit are provided. A second display device is provided inside the game area. Thereby, the player plays the game while confirming the identification information and the game profit acquired in the second period by the second display device provided in the inner area of the game area, and confirms the game profit acquired in the first period. In this case, it is possible to check and confirm the first display device provided in the outer area of the game area. Further, as a result, since the first display device and the second display device are clearly separated and separated in the inside and outside areas of the game area, the player has acquired the desired period (the first period or the second period). It becomes possible to grasp the game profit easily and surely.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or Reference Invention 16-2,
When a plurality of special games occur in the second period,
The first period is a period including one special game,
The second period is a period including the plurality of special games.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a plurality of special games are generated in the second period, the first period is a period including only one special game, and the second period is a plurality of the plurality of special games. It is a period that includes all the special games of the times. Thus, when a plurality of special games are generated in the second period, the second profit information display section displays profit information including the total amount of game profits acquired in the plurality of special games, and 1) The profit information display section displays profit information including the game profit obtained in one of the special games. As a result, the player can easily and reliably grasp the game profit acquired in the desired period (the first period or the second period).

  In addition, "Period including one special game" may have only the execution period of one special game as the first period, and in addition to the execution period of one special game, after the end of the special game The predetermined game state (except for special games) may be included in the first period. Also, in the "period including a plurality of special games", similarly, only the execution period of a plurality of special games may be set as the second period, and in addition to the execution periods of a plurality of special games, the plurality of special games may be performed. A second period may be set including a game state during the special game and a predetermined game state (except for the special game) after the end of the last special game of the plurality of special games.

The gaming machine of the invention 16-4 is the gaming machine of the inventions 16-1 to 16-3,
The game state includes a first game state (high probability low base state), and a second game state (lower probability low base state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state.
The second period starts when the special game is executed, and ends when the gaming state is set to the second gaming state in the period other than the special game,
When the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of the first profit information display sections are provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state includes a relatively advantageous first gaming state and a relatively disadvantageous second gaming state, and the special game is executed for the second period. It is assumed that the process ends after the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game after the start. And, when a special game is generated a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of first profit information display sections for displaying profit information acquired in a period including one special game is provided. That is, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it becomes possible to provide a first profit information display unit corresponding to each special game. As a result, the player can grasp the total amount of gaming profits acquired in the second period and grasp how much gaming profits have been acquired in the first period including the special game of each time . Note that only one second profit information display unit for displaying profit information acquired in the second period may be provided.

The gaming machine of the invention 16-5 is the gaming machine of the inventions 16-1 to 16-4,
The second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a second specific result, (small hit game execution means)
The first gaming state is set to a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by execution of the second special game,
The first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first gaming state set after the end of the first special game,
In the first profit information display section, displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit earned in the first special game and the gaming profit earned in the second special game in the first gaming state It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state is set to a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by execution of the second special game. Further, the first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first gaming state set after the end of the first special game. Then, the first profit information display unit displays profit information obtained by adding the game profit acquired in the first special game to the game profit acquired in the second special game in the first gaming state following the first special game. It shall be. Thus, by looking at the first profit information display section, it becomes possible to confirm profit information indicating the amount of game profit acquired in one special game and the first gaming state set thereafter.

  Also, thereby, when providing a plurality of first profit information display portions when a plurality of special games are generated in the second period, each first profit information display portion includes a special game of each time and a first game thereafter. Since it is possible to display the profit information in combination with the state, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp through what process the profit information shown in the second profit information display unit has been acquired. It becomes.

The gaming machine of the invention 16-6 is the gaming machine of the invention 16-5,
Period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display unit. This makes it possible to grasp how long the execution period of the first gaming state following the special game is about the profit information displayed on the first profit information display unit. As a result, the profit information displayed on the first profit information display unit, that is, profit information indicating one special game and the game profit acquired in the first gaming state after the special game is over, what process It is possible to easily and reliably grasp whether or not the profit information has been obtained.

  For example, when the profit information displayed on the predetermined first profit information display section indicates an amount larger (or smaller) than the profit information displayed on the other first profit information display sections, the first profit information display section By looking at the added period information, it is possible to deduce that it is due to the length of the period of the first gaming state where it is possible to obtain gaming benefits by the second special game. In addition, when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, it is possible to grasp how much game profit can be obtained if the first gaming state during the special game continues for how long. Become.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the obtained gaming profit amount, and to provide a gaming machine which prevents the decrease in the amusement of the game.

  In addition, in the special game execution means that can execute the special game that can obtain the game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific result, the specific result is made a big hit (stop of the big hit symbol) and the special game is big hit It can be a game, and the special game execution means can be made a big hit game execution means. Also, in the second special game execution means capable of executing the second special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information becomes the second specified result, the second specified result is hit small (small hit The second special game may be a small hit game, and the second special game execution means may be a small hit game execution means.

  Further, the first gaming state can be set to the high probability low base state, and the second gaming state can be set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Then, the second period starts based on the execution of the big hit game in the second gaming state, and then ends when the gaming state is set to the second gaming state (low probability low base state) in a period other than the big hit game It is also possible to Also, a third gaming state (low probability high base state) or a fourth gaming state may be provided (high probability high base state). Also in this case, if the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state is entered after the start of the second period, the second period is continued, and the gaming state is the second gaming state (low probability low base state in a period other than the big hit game) When it is set to), it shall end. That is, this second period is also referred to as a "continuous period (special period)."

  In addition, the second profit information display section displays the total amount of gaming profit acquired in the big hit game and the small hit game generated in the second period, and the first profit information display section displays the big hit game in the second period. And the game profit acquired by the small hit game can be displayed until the next big hit game of the said big hit game occurs. Also, from the gaming profits displayed on the first profit information display unit and / or the second profit information display unit, the game profits acquired in the specific big hit game are not displayed (not added), that is, acquired in the specific big hit game It is also possible to exclude game profits. For example, the jackpot game (the 2R fifth jackpot game of this embodiment, the 2R sixth jackpot game, the 2R seventh jackpot game, the 2R eighth jackpot game), the first profit information display unit And / or may be excluded from the display targets of the second profit information display unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that such a player has experienced a relatively disadvantageous big hit game.

  Also, in a predetermined gaming situation (for example, high probability low base state, small hit in the game), the first display device outside the gaming area is provided with the first profit information display unit, the second display device in the gaming area 2) A profit information display unit may be provided. In other gaming situations (during a big hit), the first display device outside the gaming area is provided with a first profit information display unit, and the second display device in the gaming area is provided with a first profit information display unit and a second profit. An information display unit may be provided. In addition, in still another game situation (during reach effect, during character effect), the first profit information display unit and / or the second profit which have been displayed on the first display device and / or the second display device. There is a case where the information display unit is erased and neither the first profit information display unit nor the second profit information display unit is displayed on the first display device and the second display device. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily see the reach effect or the like (specific effect) and to easily inform the player of the determination result. In addition, it is also possible to apply the situation different from these as a game situation.

(Reference Invention 17)
In the conventional gaming machine, when the game effect with a large hit reliability is executed, while enhancing the game interest, when the result of the game effect is a relatively disadvantageous big hit for the player, the game interest is There was a risk of causing a decline.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances game interest.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 17-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Game effect execution means capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information;
A variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball;
Special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance can enter the ball-in-place state,
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
When the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is a specified result, predetermined identification information is set as a reach mode during the fluctuation display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and the identification information If the result of the variable display of is not the specific result, the predetermined identification information is taken as the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the out mode,
As the game effect, it has a plurality of game effects including a first game effect,
It has a plurality of identification information including first identification information as the identification information,
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, the reach aspect is to be the first identification information,
If the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is the identification result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hitting mode, and if the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is not the identification result, the above-mentioned first identification information It is characterized in that the reach mode is stopped and displayed in the off mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of identification information including the first identification information as the identification information, and a plurality of games including the first game effect as the game effect to be executed along with the variable display of the identification information. Has a rendition. And, in the case of executing the first game effect, when the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is a specific result, the effect of configuring the reach aspect with the first identification information is executed, and then the first identification information Shall be displayed in a stop mode. Thus, when the first game effect is executed and a specific result is obtained, the first identification information is hit. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of security when the first game effect is executed, and to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1.
The first identification result and the second identification result are included as the identification results,
The first specified result is more advantageous to the player than the second specified result.
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hitting manner, the result of the variable display of the identification information is the first identification result.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a specific result, it has a first specific result which is relatively advantageous to the player, and a second specific result which is more disadvantageous than the first specific result. Then, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner, that is, when the first game effect is executed, it is a relatively advantageous first specified result for the player. As a result, the player can expect to execute the first game effect, and can enhance the game interest when the first game effect is executed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2.
Having a second game effect as the game effect,
The second identification information is included as the identification information,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hitting manner, the result of the variation display of the identification information may be the second identification result,
When the second game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the reach aspect is reached with the first identification information, the reach aspect with the second identification information And when
The first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hitting manner if the reach mode is determined by the first identification information and the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, and the variation of the identification information is changed. If the display result is not a specific result, the reach mode of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the removal mode,
The second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hitting manner if the reach mode is determined by the second identification information and the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, and the variation of the identification information is changed. If the display result is not a specific result, the reach mode of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the removal mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a first game effect and a second game effect as game effects, and has first identification information and second identification information as identification information. And, in the case of executing the second game effect, when the result of the fluctuation display of the identification information is a specific result, the effect that configures the reach aspect with the first identification information is executed, and then the first identification There is a case where the information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the effect of configuring the reach mode by the second identification information is executed, and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode. Further, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner, the second identification result is relatively disadvantageous for the player. Thereby, when the second game effect is executed, even when it is a specific result, there are cases where the specific result is a first specific result and a second specific result. Thereby, the player expects the first game effect to be executed, and when the second game effect is executed, the player plays the game expecting that the first specified result is It is possible to raise

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4, in the gaming machines of Reference Invention 17-1 to Reference Invention 17-3,
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the reach mode is reached with the second identification information,
A change effect of changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed, and the reach aspect is set by the first identification information.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the reach mode is reached by the second identification information during the execution of the first game effect, the change effect of changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed. , Change to reach mode by the first identification information. Thereby, when the first game effect is executed, even if the reach aspect by the second identification information is generated, the game effect is enhanced by the change effect and the player's sense of security for the first game effect is enhanced. Is possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 17-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 17-4,
The change effect is performed at a second display position different from the first display position for displaying the second identification information,
After the change presentation, the first identification information is displayed at the first display position in the reach mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change effect is executed by moving from the first display position where the second identification information is displayed in the reach mode to the second display position. Then, the first identification information changed from the second identification information to the first identification information by the change effect is moved to the first display position and displayed in the reach mode. As a result, the player can easily notice the occurrence of the change effect by moving the change effect from the first display position and executing the change effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and to enhance the game interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-5,
In the identification information display area for displaying the identification information, the second display position is closer to a center position of the identification information display area than the first display position.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second display position where the change effect is executed is closer to the central position of the identification information display area than the first display position. As a result, it is possible to make the change effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and to enhance the game interest.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-7, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 or Reference Invention 17-6,
The first identification information displayed at the second display position in the change effect is larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before the change.

  According to such a gaming machine, the changed first identification information displayed on the second display position in the change effect is displayed larger than the second identification information displayed on the first display position before the change effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the change effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and to enhance the game interest.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the game interest.

(Reference Invention 18)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on entering the ball to the starting opening, it performs the decision of success or failure with a predetermined big hit probability and displays the symbols variably, and when the result of the success or failure decision becomes a big hit, it stops and displays the symbols in big hit symbols, There was something to execute the big hit game which opens the winning a prize mouth. In addition, the game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the result of the success or failure judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol Showed the possibility of In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls acquired by the big hit game, when there is a consecutive block where a plurality of big hit games are executed in a short period of time, how many amount of prize balls were acquired during the corresponding block There was a gaming machine that made an effect showing. As a result, by enhancing the sense of expectation to the occurrence of the big hit by the game effect, by grasping the amount of prize balls obtained in the big hit game, the game interest was enhanced.

  In the gaming machine as described above, although the amount of award balls obtained by the big hit game is shown, it was difficult to grasp whether the amount obtained is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a sense of distrust in the game, and there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in amusement of a game while showing the amount of gaming profit acquired.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 18-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of acquiring a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
Game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect according to the fluctuation display of the identification information;
And a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount of the acquired game profit;
As the game effect, it has a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect is assumed to indicate a higher possibility as the possibility of the special game than the second game effect.
A specific character is displayed on the first game effect,
The specific character is displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display section reaches a specific amount.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and has the first game effect and the second game effect indicating the possibility of executing the special game. Further, the first game effect is a game effect that indicates a higher possibility as the possibility of performing a special game than the second game effect, and is a game effect that displays a specific character. In addition, it is provided with a profit information display unit for displaying profit information indicating the amount of acquired game profit, and the specific character is displayed also when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit becomes a specific amount. Do. As a result, by displaying a specific character used in the first game effect indicating a relatively high possibility of special game execution at a timing when the profit information has become a specific amount, it is possible to obtain many game profits for the player. It is possible to inform the player that the player can easily recognize that he has acquired many game benefits.

The gaming machine of the invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of the invention 18-1:
The profit information display unit can not display the specified amount of profit information on the basis of the game profit acquired in one of the special games, and the specified amount on the basis of game profits acquired in the plural special games. Can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, only the gaming profit acquired in one special game does not display a specific amount of profit information, and in the case of gaming profit acquired in a plurality of special games, the specific amount It is possible to display profit information of Thereby, the profit information of the specific amount is set to an amount exceeding the game profit obtainable in one special game, and the profit information is displayed when the profit information is displayed, and the specific character is displayed. It is possible to increase the game interest of the player when being played.

The gaming machine of the invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of the invention 18-1 or 18-2.
The specific character displayed in the first game effect, and the specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit becomes a specific amount include characters of the same shape. It is characterized in that

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific character indicating the feasibility of the special game displayed in the first game effect and the specific information indicating that the profit information displayed based on the acquired gaming profit has become a specific amount The characters are configured to include the same shape. That is, not only are the specific characters displayed in these two scenes merely the same character, but also the shapes are the same. Further, the player can easily find that the specific character appearing in both scenes is the same specific character, and a situation advantageous to the player is generated in any scene as well (intuitive ) Can be recognized.

The gaming machine of the invention 18-4 is the gaming machine of the inventions 18-1 to 18-3,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variable display of the identification information,
The specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit becomes a specific amount is displayed during the execution of the special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variation display of the identification information, and the specific character displayed when the profit information reaches the specific amount is the special game Is displayed during the execution of. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific character appearable and to increase the appearance time of the specific character both during the variable display of the identification information and during the execution of the special game. Further, this makes it possible to make the specific character appear even in different game situations, and to maintain the game interest for a long time.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in the amusement of the game while showing the amount of gaming profit obtained.

(Reference Invention 19)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 is
Pass / fail judgment means capable of executing a hit / fail judgment based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination;
Game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode in a predetermined gaming state;
Providing a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the success or failure judgment is a specific result,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (low probability low base state) and a second gaming state (high probability low base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The first effect mode is executed as the effect mode (as well as the first specified effect mode which does not indicate that the player is in an advantageous gaming state) and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed And a second specific effect mode indicating that the game state is a game state advantageous to the player (the second game state).
In any of the case where the special game is executed as the specific result in the first gaming state, and the special game is executed as the specific result in the second game state, In the game state after the end of the special game, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, it is possible to shift to another effect mode (without going through a special game) based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times ,
There is a possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
When the special game is executed in the second gaming state and the special game is executed, and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the specific result is in the first gaming state It is characterized in that the special game is executed and higher than the case where the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the predetermined gaming state, the effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the predetermined effect mode is provided. In addition, the game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and at least a first effect mode is executed as an effect mode. There is a first specific effect mode, and a second specific effect mode which indicates that the second effect mode is executed and a game state (for example, a second game state) advantageous to the player is presented.

  And, in the first gaming state, when the result of the success or failure judgment becomes the specific result and the special game is executed, and, in the second gaming state, the result of the success or failure judgment becomes the specific result, the special game is executed, In either case, in the gaming state after the end of the special game, the first specific effect mode can be set. Further, in the first specific effect mode, when the variable display of identification information is performed a specific number of times, transition to another effect mode is enabled.

  Then, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game performed as the specific result in the second gaming state can be shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times In the first game mode, the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game executed as the specific result in the first gaming state is shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times Higher than possibility.

  Thereby, even in the same first specific effect mode, the effect mode to be transferred after that differs depending on the transition process, and it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the effect mode and to enhance the game interest. In addition, since the first specific effect mode shifted from the second gaming state can be expected more than the first specific effect mode shifted from the first gaming state, even in the same first specific effect mode, a different sense of expectation It is possible to play a game with

In the gaming machine of the invention 19-2 according to the gaming machine of the invention 19-1,
The third effect mode having a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode is provided as the effect mode.
The third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the gaming state is the first gaming state,
The second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that a game state is the second game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, by executing the third specific effect mode of the third effect mode, it is suggested that the gaming state is the first gaming state, and the second specific effect mode of the second effect mode is Execution indicates that the gaming state is a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. As a result, when the second specific effect mode is executed as the effect mode, the player can increase the sense of expectation and the game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 19-3 is the gaming machine of the invention 19-1 or 19-2.
The gaming state includes a third gaming state (low probability high base state) and a fourth gaming state (high probability high base state),
The third gaming state is transitioned to the first gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. When the variable display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the state, it is assumed that the game state is shifted to the second game state.
The first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode in any of the third game state and the fourth game state.
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth gaming state, transition to the second specific effect mode is performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and the above in the third gaming state When the first specific effect mode is being executed, transition to the second specific effect mode is not performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state includes the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state. In the third gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the third gaming state to the first gaming state based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state In the fourth gaming state, the gaming state is shifted from the fourth gaming state to the second gaming state based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times in the fourth gaming state. Further, in the fourth gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is shifted from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times. Further, in the third gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode is not shifted from the first specific effect mode to the second specific effect mode on the basis of performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times .

  That is, in the case of the fourth gaming state and the first specific effect mode, the second specific effect indicating that the effect mode is the second gaming state advantageous to the player based on performing the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times Although transition to mode is possible, in the case of the third gaming state and the first specific effect mode, the effect mode can not be transitioned to the second specific effect mode based on performing the variable display of identification information a specific number of times. Thereby, even when the same first specific effect mode is executed, the effect mode that can be shifted to later depending on whether the gaming state in which the first specific effect mode is being executed is the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state It is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effect mode and to enhance the game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 19-4 is the gaming machine of the invention 19-3,
A variable entrance capable of changing into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the game ball has a higher possibility of entering the ball than the first aspect, and
Ball pitch setting means which can be set to a predetermined frequency state (low base state) and a high frequency state (high base state) in which the ball insertion frequency to the variable entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state;
A probability setting unit configured to set the probability that the success / failure determination unit determines that the identification result is the specific result, to a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
The first gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. It is said that.

  According to such a game machine, a variable ball entry port, a ball entry frequency setting means capable of changing the ball entry frequency of the game ball to the variable ball entrance, and a probability setting means capable of changing the probability of success or failure judgment And. Then, the first gaming state is a gaming state set to a predetermined frequency state and a predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to a predetermined frequency state and a high probability. As a result, the second gaming state is determined to be a specific result with high probability when the success / failure determination is executed, so that the gaming state in which the special game is more likely to be executed becomes easier than the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the player for the special game and to enhance the game interest.

The gaming machine of the invention 19-5 is the gaming machine of the invention 19-4,
The third gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the predetermined probability (low probability high base state), and the fourth gaming state is the high frequency state and the high probability (high probability high) It is characterized in that it is a gaming state set to the base state).

  According to such a gaming machine, the third gaming state is set to a high frequency state and a predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is set to a high frequency state and a high probability. In other words, the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are both set to the high frequency state, and the probability of the determination of success or failure is different. Thereby, if the gaming state when the first specific effect mode is executed is the fourth gaming state, transition to the second gaming state in which the second specific effect mode is executed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times And the gaming state advantageous to the player. Also, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In another aspect, the special game is executed as a result of the determination in the second game state, and the first specified effect mode set after the end of the special game is based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times (special Make it possible to shift to the second specific effect mode, without going through a game)
The special game is executed as a specific result in the first gaming state and the special game is executed after the special game is ended, based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times (without going through the special game) It is also possible not to shift to the second specific effect mode.

  Further, as another aspect, the special game is executed in the second game state, and the possibility of shifting from the first specific effect mode set after the special game is over to the second specific effect mode is special in the first game state The game may be executed, and it may be higher than the possibility of shifting from the first specified effect mode to the second specified effect mode set after the end of the special game.

  Further, it can be said that the second gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state. Also, in the second gaming state where the result of the success or failure judgment is likely to be the specific result (set to a high probability), the possibility of the result of the success or failure judgment being the specific result is low (set to the predetermined probability) It can be said that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the third gaming state.

  In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment is the second specific result (small hit), it is possible to execute the second special game (small hit game), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state, the third gaming state, and The execution frequency of the small hit game (the occurrence frequency of the small hit) may be higher than that in the fourth gaming state.

(Reference Invention 20)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-1 is
First success / failure determination means capable of executing a first success / failure determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Second success / failure determination means capable of executing a second success / failure determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the first success or failure judgment or the result of the second success or failure judgment;
Game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode in a predetermined gaming state;
Providing a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the first judgment result or the second judgment result is a specific result,
The first effect mode is executed as the effect mode (as well as the first specified effect mode which does not indicate that the player is in an advantageous gaming state) and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed And a second specific effect mode indicating that the game state is a game state advantageous to the player (the second game state).
If the result of the first success or failure judgment is the specific result and the special game is executed, or if the result of the second success or failure judgment becomes the specific result, the special game is executed. Also in the game state after the special game is over, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode.
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, it is possible to shift to another effect mode (without going through a special game) based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times ,
There is a possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
When the special game is executed with the result of the second success or failure judgment being the specific result, and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the result of the first success or failure judgment is the above As a result of the identification, the special game is executed, which is higher than the case where the first specific effect mode is set after the end of the special game.

  Thereby, even in the same first specific effect mode, depending on the process of setting the first specific effect mode, the possibility of shifting to the second specific effect mode will be different thereafter, and various transition modes of the effect mode It is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, when the first specific effect mode is set according to the result of the second success or failure determination, it is possible to switch to the second specific effect mode than when the first specific effect mode is set according to the result of the first success / failure determination. You can expect a transition. Therefore, even in the same first specific effect mode, it is possible to play a game with a different sense of expectation.

  In addition, as the "identification information display means", the first identification information display means for fluctuating display of identification information based on the result of the first success or failure judgment (first special symbol success or failure judgment), and the second success / failure judgment (second special symbol And second identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination of the propriety. In addition, the gaming state may include a first gaming state (low probability low base state) and a second gaming state (high probability low base state) more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state .

The gaming machine of the invention 20-2 is the gaming machine of the invention 20-1.
The third effect mode having a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode is provided as the effect mode.
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, the effect mode shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information being performed the specific number of times Transitioning to the third specific effect mode,
The gaming state when executing the second specific effect mode is characterized in that the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state when performing the third specific effect mode.

  Thereby, when playing a game in the first specific effect mode, the player will play the game expecting the special game to be executed or the effect mode to be shifted to the second specific effect mode, It is possible to diversify the transition mode of the effect mode and to enhance the game interest.

In the gaming machine of the invention 20-3, the gaming machine of the invention 20-2 is
As the gaming state, a first gaming state (low probability low base state), a second gaming state (high probability low base state) that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state, and a first gaming state A third gaming state (low probability high base state) advantageous to the player and a fourth gaming state (high probability high base state) advantageous to the player than the first gaming state
The first specific effect mode is an effect mode that is executed when the gaming state is the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state,
The second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the gaming state is the second gaming state,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that a game state is the first game state.

The gaming machine of the invention 20-4 is the gaming machine of the invention 20-3,
The third gaming state is transitioned to the first gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. When the variable display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the state, it is assumed that the game state is shifted to the second game state.
The first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode in any of the third game state and the fourth game state.
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth gaming state, transition to the second specific effect mode is performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and the above in the third gaming state The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein when the first specific effect mode is executed, the transition to the second specific effect mode is not made based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times.

The gaming machine of the invention 20-5 is the gaming machine of the invention 20-3 or 20-4.
A variable entrance capable of changing into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the game ball has a higher possibility of entering the ball than the first aspect, and
Pitching frequency setting means that can be set to a predetermined frequency state and a high frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state;
A probability setting unit configured to set the probability that the success / failure determination unit determines that the identification result is the specific result, to a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
The first gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein

The gaming machine of the invention 20-6 is the gaming machine of the invention 20-5,
The third gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein.

As another mode, when the special game is executed with the result of the second success or failure judgment being the specific result, and the first special effect mode is set after the special game is over, the special game is over. The first specific effect mode set later can be shifted to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information for the specific number of times,
When the result of the first success or failure is the specific result and the special game is executed and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the first set after the special game is over The specific effect mode may not be transitionable to the second specific effect mode based on the variable display of the identification information for the specific number of times.

  In addition, when the special game is executed with the result of the first success or failure judgment being the specific result, and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the set up after the special game is over The first specific effect mode may not be transitionable to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information for the specific number of times, and may be transitioned to the third specific effect mode.

  Further, a plurality of times such as a first specified number (50 times), a second specified number (100 times), and a third specified number (150 times) may be set as the specified number. Moreover, the names of the effect mode are different between the first specific effect mode and the second specific effect mode. Further, the effect mode capable of transitioning to the advantageous effect mode (second specific effect mode) and the effect mode not transitioning to the advantageous effect mode are set as the effect mode (first specific effect mode) of the same name.

(Reference invention 21)
In the conventional gaming machine, based on entering the ball to the starting opening, it performs the decision of success or failure with a predetermined big hit probability and displays the symbols variably, and when the result of the success or failure decision becomes a big hit, it stops and displays the symbols in big hit symbols, There was something to execute the big hit game which opens the winning a prize mouth. In addition, as the game state, there are multiple game states where the probability of success or failure judgment and the entering frequency to the predetermined starting opening are different, depending on the game state, there was something which changes the firing area of the game ball and plays the game (For example, patent documents: 2014-161615).

  Further, in such a gaming machine, in order to indicate a game area (a launch area) to be launched by the player according to the gaming state, an instruction notification of the launch area has been performed. For example, in a low probability low base state in which the game proceeds by so-called left hitting, when it is a big hit, a notification such as “right hitting!” Is given, and the game proceeds by so-called right hitting. The player can proceed with the game without receiving any disadvantage by changing the firing area in accordance with the instruction notification of “right strike!”. In addition, if the gaming state set after the big hit game is to be performed with a right hit, the command notification of "right hit!" Is given again after the big hit is finished and a command to continue the game by right hit is given. Inform. The player proceeds with the game according to these instruction notices, so that even a complicated gaming machine that changes the launch area depending on the gaming state does not get confused or suffer from disadvantage. It is possible to advance the game.

  In the gaming machine as described above, since an instruction notification of the firing area is performed each time the gaming state changes, the player may play the game according to the instruction, and even a beginner can easily play the game. However, since anyone can play a game easily, when playing a game for a long time, there is a risk that the game gets bored and that the amusement of the game is lowered.

  The present invention 21 is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of diversifying the indication notification effect of the launch area and enhancing the game interest.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 21-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
As a launch area for launching the game ball, it has a first launch area and a second launch area,
Launch area instructing means for executing an instruction effect for instructing a launch area of the game ball;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A variable entry ball slot capable of changing into a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter and a ball entry impossible state in which the game ball can not enter the ball;
It is a gaming machine comprising: special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable ball entry is allowed to enter the ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
The special game includes a first special game (first bonus), a second special game (second bonus), and a third special game (fourth bonus),
As the instruction effects for instructing the same emission area (second emission area, right-handed area), it has a first instruction effect, a second instruction effect, and a third instruction effect.
When the first special game is performed, the first instruction effect is performed. When the second special game is performed, the second instruction effect is performed, and the third special game is performed. Is characterized in that the third instruction effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game ball has a first shooting area and a second shooting area as the shooting areas of the gaming ball, and is provided with a shooting area designating means for executing instruction effects for instructing the shooting area of the gaming ball. ing. In addition, as a special game, it has a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game, and as an instruction effect for instructing the same emission area (for example, the second emission area), a first instruction effect And has a second instruction effect and a third instruction effect, and executes the first instruction effect when the first special game is executed and the second instruction effect when the second special game is executed Is executed, and the third instruction effect is executed when the third special game is executed. As a result, since the instruction effects of different effect modes are executed depending on the type of special game to be executed, it is possible to diversify the game effects and to enhance the game interest.

  Moreover, it has a 1st specification result, a 2nd specification result, and a 3rd specification result as a specification result, and, in the case of a 1st specification result, performs a 1st indication effect, and, in the case of a 2nd specification result, The second instruction effect may be executed, and in the case of the third specified result, the third instruction effect may be executed. In the case of the first specified result, the first special game is executed, in the case of the second specified result, the second special game is executed, and in the case of the third specified result, the third special game is also executed. Good.

  Moreover, after the end of the first special game (first bonus), the super effect mode is executed, and after the end of the second special game (second bonus), the super effect mode is executed or the first count effect mode is The second count effect mode may be executed after the end of the third special game (the fourth bonus). The first special game, the second special game, and the third special game may have different effect modes after the end of the special game, or may have different game states after the end of the special game. The game benefits obtainable in the special game may be different. In addition, it is possible to predict the special game and the subsequent game state depending on the type of instruction effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 21-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 21-1,
In a predetermined gaming state, it has effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode,
A first specific effect mode for executing a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode are executed as the effect mode, and a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first specific effect mode And a second specific effect mode that suggests that
After the end of the first special game, the second specific effect mode is set, and after the end of the second special game, the first specific effect mode is set and the second specific effect mode is set. After the end of the third special game, the first specific effect mode is set.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect mode for executing the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as the effect mode to be executed in the predetermined game state and the first specific effect mode is performed more than the first specific effect mode And a second specific effect mode indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the first special game, the second specific effect mode is set, and after the end of the second special game, there are a case where the first specific effect mode is set and a case where the second specific effect mode is set. After the end of the third special game, the second specific effect mode is set. That is, the player plays a game expecting that the second specific effect mode is executed rather than the first specific effect mode.

  In addition, the special game is in the order of high possibility of setting the second specific effect mode, that is, the order of the first special game, the second special game, the third special game (first special game> second special game> In the third special game), the player becomes a highly anticipated (favorable) special game. Thereby, in the instruction effect, the first instruction effect executed in the first special game, the second instruction effect executed in the second special game, the third executed in the third special game In the order of the indication effect (first instruction effect> second instruction effect> third instruction effect), the player has a high (favorable) instruction effect with high expectation for the player. Also, thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict the subsequent special game and the effect mode depending on which instruction effect is executed, thereby diversifying the game effect and providing highly entertaining game characteristics. It becomes possible.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-3, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1 or Reference Invention 21-2,
It has a plurality of display units capable of displaying the instruction effects,
The first instruction effect is displayed on a larger number of display units than the second instruction effect, and the second instruction effect is displayed on a larger number of display units than the third instruction effect. It is a thing.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of display units are provided as display units for displaying instruction effects, and the first instruction effect is displayed using a larger number of display units than the second instruction effect, The two-instruction effect is displayed using a larger number of display portions than the third instruction effect. That is, effects are produced using different numbers of display units depending on the instruction effect. As a result, the player can clearly distinguish the instruction effect under execution, and it is possible to predict the subsequent special game and the effect mode by the instruction effect to be executed. In addition, it is possible for the player to feel the expectation of the player and to enhance the fun of the game by producing instruction effects with high expectation for the player using many display units.

  Note that the plurality of display units may be a plurality of separately configured (separated and arranged) display devices. Further, the display area of one display device may be divided into a plurality of display portions and each of them may be used as the display portion.

The gaming machine of the invention 21-4 is the gaming machine of the inventions 21-1 to 21-3,
As the plurality of display units, a middle display unit provided substantially at the center of the game area, a left display unit provided on the left side of the middle display unit, and a right display unit provided on the right side of the middle display unit Have
The first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect are each configured by combining a pictorial image indicating a launch area and a character image indicating a launch area.
Each of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect is characterized in that a character image is displayed on the middle display portion.

  According to such a gaming machine, the middle display unit, the left display unit and the right display unit provided on the left and right of the middle display unit are provided as the plurality of display units. Further, each of the instruction effects (the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect) is configured by combining a pictorial image indicating the emission area and a character image indicating the emission area. Then, among the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect, among the images constituting the instruction effect, the character image indicating the firing area is displayed on the middle display portion of the substantially central portion of the game area. . That is, any indication effect is displayed using the middle display unit.

  Thereby, even if the display mode of the instruction effect is different, the character images of all the game effects are commonly displayed on the middle display portion that is most easily noticed by the player, and the player is easy and It is possible to reliably grasp the character image. When the number of display units to be used is changed according to the instruction effect, it is possible to change the number of display units for displaying a pictorial image or the like indicating the emission area constituting the instruction effect. It should be noted that the character image indicating the emission area may also be displayed on another display unit (the left display unit or the right display unit) in addition to the character image if it is displayed at least on the middle display unit.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 21-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 21-4,
The first indication effect is displayed on three display units, the left display unit, the middle display unit, and the right display unit,
The second instruction effect is displayed on two display units, the middle display unit and the right display unit,
The third instruction effect is displayed on one display unit of the middle display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first instruction effect is displayed using the three display units of the left display unit and the right display unit in addition to the middle display unit, and the second instruction effect is added to the middle display unit The display is performed using the two display units of the right display unit, and the third instruction effect is displayed on one display unit of the middle display unit. As a result, effects can be produced using different numbers of display portions according to the instruction effects, and the player can clearly distinguish the instruction effects being executed. Moreover, it becomes possible to predict the subsequent special game and the effect mode by the instruction effect to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 21, it is possible to diversify the indication notification effect of the launch area, and to provide a gaming machine that enhances the game interest.

In addition, as another aspect, the fourth instruction effect is provided as an instruction effect for instructing the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the emission area (the first emission area, the left hitting area) different from the third instruction effect. And
The first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect are instruction effects for instructing a launch to the second emission area,
The fourth instruction effect may be an instruction effect for instructing a release to the first emission area.

  In addition, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect (shooting instruction to the second launch area) are (when the playing state is the game state), the fourth instructing effect (when the The game state is made more advantageous than the game state). That is, it can be said that the state in which the game ball is fired to the second firing area to play a game is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the state in which the game ball is fired to the first firing area to play the game.

  As an instruction effect for instructing the release to the second emission area, there are three types of instruction effects different in display mode (effect mode), and one type as the instruction effect for instructing emission to the first emission area . That is, there are more types of instruction effects for instructing the emission to the second emission area than types of instruction effects for instructing emission to the first emission area. This is because the number of types of gaming states when launching to the second launch area is greater than the types of gaming states when launching to the first launch area. By the way, as a game state when you shoot to the second firing area (the second game area) and play a game, it has three types of low probability high base state, high probability high base state, high probability low base state , Is consistent with the number of directed effects. In addition, it has one kind of low probability low base state as a game state when it fires to the 1st launch territory (1st game territory) and plays the game, it agrees with the number of indication effect.

  In addition, the fourth instruction effect is displayed using a plurality of display units. More specifically, the fourth instruction effect is displayed on three display units of the left display unit, the middle display unit, and the right display unit. In addition, the fourth instruction effect is configured by combining a pictorial image indicating the emission area and a character image indicating the emission area, and the fourth instruction effect is displayed on the left display portion of the character image and the pictorial image, and the middle display Display on the three display units of the unit and the right display unit. It is necessary to change (return) the firing area from the second firing area (second gaming area) to the first firing area (first gaming area), that is, change the firing direction from the previous firing areas In order to indicate the launch area more clearly to the player, such a display mode is used.

  In addition, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect (shooting instruction to the second launch area) are (when the playing state is the game state), the fourth instructing effect (when the The game state is made more advantageous than the game state). That is, it can be said that the state in which the game ball is fired to the second firing area to play a game is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the state in which the game ball is fired to the first firing area to play the game. Therefore, the fourth instruction effect instructing the launch to the first launch area is executed when the subsequent gaming state is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous gaming state (return to the normal mode). Ru.

  Therefore, the character image constituting the fourth instruction effect is constituted by "instruction by polite words" so as not to reduce the player's game interest. Specifically, it says "Please return to the left." As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in gaming as much as possible and to increase (do not reduce) the motivation to continue the game. In addition, since the number of used display units is large, it is possible to give instructions in a polite and long sentence.

  On the other hand, although the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect are different in the degree of advantage of the gaming state after these instruction effects, they are all instructions for instructing to the second firing area It is an effect, which is more advantageous than the gaming state in which the player shoots into the first launch area to play a game. Therefore, as compared with the fourth instruction effect, each of them is configured by “instruction by instruction word (tone)”. Specifically, they say "right strike!" Or "Aim at the right." This makes it possible to convey the instruction contents simply and accurately with short characters (sentences), but does not reduce the amusement interest. In addition, as described above, the instruction content (even if the number of used display units is different) (even if the number is different) by the instruction effect of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect It is possible to communicate the launch area) to the player.

  In addition, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, the third instruction effect, and the fourth instruction effect may mutually differ in the color of the instruction effect. Further, the sizes of the instruction effects constituting the instruction effects may be different from each other. Further, the directions of the pictorial images showing the emission areas constituting the instruction effects may be different from each other. In the “direction of the pictorial image indicating the launch area”, for example, when the pictorial image is configured by an arrow, the orientation of the arrow is different. Specifically, the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, and the third instruction effect all indicate the right direction in order to instruct the release to the second emission area (the second game area).

  However, the directions (angles and shapes) are all different by making the shape different, and for example, the right strike is instructed by piercing the upper right with an arrow, or the right strike is issued by inserting the lower right. Instruct or direct rightward by stabbing straight right, or temporarily curve from lower to upper right and instruct rightward, or proceed from lower left to upper right, lower right It is possible to indicate a right-handed strike on a semi-circular route. In addition, these may be directed effects that allow the player to imagine the shooting direction by advancing the light effects along the above-mentioned route instead of using the arrows.

  As described above, the display modes (the size, the number of display portions to be used, the color, the shape, the effect, etc.) of the first instruction effect, the second instruction effect, the third instruction effect, and the fourth instruction effect are made different. Thus, the player can clearly recognize which of the instruction effects has been executed. In addition, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the instruction effect and to enhance the game interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player grasp the degree of advantage such as the subsequent game state or the big hit game by the instruction effect, and to enhance the game interest.

(Reference invention 22)
In the conventional gaming machine (e.g., JP-A-2016-83536), in the effect mode under execution, the number to be displayed is subtracted each time the variable display of the symbol is executed, and the player can easily finish the end of the effect mode. To understand. However, when the effect mode is ended, the display of the remaining number display unit is also ended, which makes it difficult to grasp how long the variable display of symbols has been executed. In addition, simply displaying a large number of game information at the same time may interfere with the visibility of game effects such as reach effects, which may lead to a decrease in game interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily grasping the game situation while securing the visibility of the game effect as much as possible.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 22-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode;
Game effect executing means for executing a predetermined game effect;
A game machine comprising: special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result;
A first display unit for displaying at least the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and the game effect to be executed by the game effect executing means;
And a second display unit for displaying at least a game effect executed by the game effect executing means,
As the effect mode, there is a special effect mode,
The special effect mode is set after the end of the special game, and ends based on the execution of the variable display of the identification information a specific number of times,
A fluctuation number display unit that displays the number of times of execution of the fluctuation display of the identification information;
And a remaining fluctuation number display unit that displays the remaining number of fluctuation display of the identification information until the special effect mode ends.
The remaining variation count display unit is displayed on the first display unit, and the variation count display unit is displayed on the second display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display section displaying at least the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and the game effect executed by the game effect executing means, and the game effect And a second display unit for displaying at least a game effect to be executed by the execution means. Further, it has a special effect mode which is set after the end of the special game and ended based on the variable display of the identification information of the specific number of times. And a remaining number display unit for displaying the number of remaining variable display of the identification information until the special effect mode is ended. 1) Display the remaining fluctuation number display unit on the display unit, and display the fluctuation number display unit on the second display unit. As a result, it becomes possible to separately recognize the remaining number of times of the special effect mode and the number-of-changes display unit capable of recognizing the number of times the identification information has changed. Also, this enables the player to accurately and reliably grasp the game status (progress status).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 22-1.
The first display unit is provided substantially at the center of the game area, and the second display unit is provided at a predetermined position around the first display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display for displaying the identification information, the effect mode of the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, the game effect executed by the game effect executing means, and the remaining fluctuation number display The unit is provided substantially in the center of the game area where the player can easily recognize. In addition, a second display unit for displaying a game effect to be executed by the game effect executing means and the variation count display unit is provided at a predetermined position around the first display unit as a sub position. As a result, the remaining period of the special effect mode being executed is displayed easily in the substantially central portion of the game area, and the number of times of change in the identification information is displayed by displaying the change number display on the second display. It is also possible to recognize Also, this enables the player to accurately and reliably grasp the game status (progress status).

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 22-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 22-1 or Reference Invention 22-2.
When the special effect mode is ended based on the execution of the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times and the transition to another effect mode, the remaining fluctuation number display unit ends the display, and the fluctuation number The display unit continues to display the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information even after shifting to another effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect mode ends and shifts to another effect mode, the display from the first display unit to the remaining change number display unit ends the display, and the change number display unit displays the special effect mode. Continue to display after finishing. Thereby, while the special effect mode is being executed, it is possible to grasp the number of changes and remaining period of identification information, and after the end of the special effect mode, from the predetermined timing to which the number of changes in the special effect mode is added It becomes possible to grasp the number of changes in identification information.

The gaming machine of the invention 22-4 is the gaming machine of the inventions 22-1 to 22-3,
The number of times displayed on the variation number display unit may be initialized based on the end of the special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the number of times displayed on the fluctuation number display unit is initialized based on the end of the special game. Thereby, it becomes possible to display and grasp | ascertain the fluctuation | variation display frequency of the identification information from the last special game on a fluctuation | variation frequency display part. Further, since the initialization is performed based on the end of the special game, it is possible to grasp how many times the variation display of the identification information has been executed from the previous special game while the special game is being executed.

The gaming machine of the invention 22-5 is the gaming machine of the inventions 22-1 to 22-4,
As a game effect, it has a specific game effect,
When executing the specific game effect in the special effect mode, the specific game effect is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit,
In the first display unit, the specific game effect is given priority display and the remaining change number display unit is not displayed, and in the second display unit, the change frequency display unit is given priority display and the specific game effect and It is characterized by displaying the said fluctuation | variation number display part.

  According to such a gaming machine, when executing the specified game effect in the special effect mode, the specified game effect is displayed on both the first display unit and the second display unit. Further, in the special effect mode, the first display portion gives priority display to the specific game effect than the remaining change number display portion, and the second display portion gives priority display to the change number display portion over the specific game effect. As a result, in the first display section provided substantially in the central portion of the game area, the remaining variation count display section is made non-display to show specific game effects with priority, thereby performing highly entertaining game effects, and the game entertaining It is possible to raise

  In addition, in the second display section provided around the first display section, the specific game effect is displayed in the other display areas while the display of the variation count display section is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute a highly entertaining game effect according to the specific game effect by the display area of the first display unit and the display area of the second display unit. In addition, by keeping the variation count display section displayed while the specific game effect is being executed, it becomes possible to grasp the variation frequency even while the specific game effect is being executed. In addition, since the change number display unit is displayed on the second display unit provided around the first display unit, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the specific game effect from being disturbed as much as possible.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily grasping the gaming situation while securing the visibility of the game effect as much as possible.

(Reference Invention 23)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-1 is
A determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a symbol when the determination is made and then displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stopped state;
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
Holding means capable of holding the right of the judgment to a predetermined number;
And effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect;
The effect control means is
As the effect of notifying the determination result of the determination means, a hit notification effect notifying that the special game is executed or a loss notification effect notifying that the special game is not executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol Run
In the case where the lost notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect performed during the variable display of the symbol, and the right of determination that the hit notification effect is to be executed is held by the holding means, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an expected effect for expecting the special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game is executed when the loss notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect and the right of determination that the hit notification effect is to be executed is held. Expectation rendering to expect things may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the expectation effect to be executed when the loss notification effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the special game to be executed is lowered. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 23-1,
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute the first reach effect and the second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
The second reach effect is executed as the predetermined reach effect.

  By the way, when the first reach effect and the second reach effect are compared, the second reach effect is easier to hit than the first reach effect, and therefore the second notice effect is executed in the second reach effect. In this case, it is considered that the player's sense of expectation for the special game to be executed is likely to be reduced rather than the loss notification effect being executed in the first reach effect. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the expectation notification effect is executed when the lost notification effect is executed by the second reach effect, and the right of the determination that the hit notification effect is to be executed is held. May be performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the expectation effect to be performed, and to effectively suppress a significant decrease in feeling of expectation due to the loss notification effect being performed by the second reach effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 23-3,
A determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
Symbol display control means for causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a symbol when the determination is made and then displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stopped state;
Special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
Holding means capable of holding the right of the judgment to a predetermined number;
And effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect;
The effect control means is
As the effect of notifying the determination result of the determination means, a hit notification effect notifying that the special game is executed or a loss notification effect notifying that the special game is not executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol Run
It is possible to execute the suggestion effect which suggests that the possibility that the special game is executed is relatively high, during the fluctuation display of the design,
The hold means holds the right of determination in which the lost notification effect is performed by a predetermined reach effect performed during the variable display of the symbol and the suggested effect is performed when the determination is performed. When it is, it is characterized in that it is possible to execute an expectation effect which expects the special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game is executed when the loss notification effect is executed by a predetermined reach effect, and the right of the determination to perform the suggested effect when the determination is performed is suspended. An expectation rendering may be performed which causes the player to expect to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the expectation effect to be executed when the loss notification effect is executed, and the player's expectation for the special game to be executed is lowered. Can be suppressed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 23-4 is the same as the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 23-3,
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute the first reach effect and the second reach effect in which the hit notification effect is easier to be executed than the first reach effect,
The first reach effect is performed as the predetermined reach effect.

  By the way, when the first reach effect and the second reach effect are compared, the second reach effect is easier to hit than the first reach effect, so even if the first reach effect is executed, It is considered that the player is unlikely to expect the special game to be executed. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the expectation presentation effect is performed when the loss notification effect is executed by the first reach effect and the right of the determination that the suggestion effect is to be executed is held. May be executed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the special game to be executed by executing the expectation effect.

  Note that two or more arbitrary inventions of the reference invention 1 to the reference invention 23 described above may be combined.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display area), 8 effect symbol, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first large winning opening, 35 second large winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control), 90 secondary control board (sub control Part), 100 image control board (image control part), 103a third effect suspension indicator, 103b fourth effect suspension indicator.

Claims (5)

Pass / fail judgment means capable of executing a hit / fail judgment based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination;
Game state setting means capable of setting a predetermined game state;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a predetermined effect mode in a predetermined gaming state;
Providing a special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player;
It is a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the success or failure judgment is a specific result,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The first specified effect mode for executing the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode are executed as the effect mode, and a second game state is suggested to indicate that the game state is advantageous to the player. And a specific effect mode,
In any of the case where the special game is executed as the specific result in the first gaming state, and the special game is executed as the specific result in the second game state, In the game state after the end of the special game, the effect mode can be set to the first specific effect mode,
When the effect mode is set to the first specific effect mode, transition to another effect mode is enabled based on the variable display of the identification information being performed a specific number of times,
There is a possibility that the first specific effect mode set after the end of the special game shifts to the second specific effect mode based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times,
When the special game is executed in the second gaming state and the special game is executed, and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over, the specific result is in the first gaming state Game machine characterized by being higher than when the special game is executed and the first specific effect mode is set after the special game is over. The third effect mode having a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode is provided as the effect mode.
The third specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that the gaming state is the first gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second specific effect mode is an effect mode that suggests that a gaming state is the second gaming state. As the gaming state, there is a third gaming state and a fourth gaming state,
The third gaming state is transitioned to the first gaming state when the variation display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is the fourth gaming state. When the variable display of the identification information is performed the specific number of times in the state, it is assumed that the game state is shifted to the second game state.
The first specific effect mode can be executed as the effect mode in any of the third game state and the fourth game state.
When the first specific effect mode is being executed in the fourth gaming state, transition to the second specific effect mode is performed based on the fluctuation display of the identification information of the specific number of times, and the above in the third gaming state When 1st specified production mode is executed, it does not shift to the 2nd specified production mode on the basis of the fluctuation indication of the aforementioned identification information of specified frequency of times 1 or 2 characterized in Gaming machine. A variable entrance capable of changing into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the game ball has a higher possibility of entering the ball than the first aspect, and
Pitching frequency setting means that can be set to a predetermined frequency state and a high frequency state in which the frequency of ball entry into the variable entrance is higher than the predetermined frequency state;
A probability setting unit configured to set the probability that the success / failure determination unit determines that the identification result is the specific result, to a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
The first gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the second gaming state is a gaming state set to the predetermined frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein.   The third gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the predetermined probability, and the fourth gaming state is a gaming state set to the high frequency state and the high probability. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein

Images